JP2017104285A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's interest.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 1, a main board 409 controls one of a plurality of game states, and holds an internal lottery for selecting a winning combination from among a plurality of combinations, based on a lottery table determined for each game state in a game, where a predetermined number of game media is fed. A pattern variation display device 300 displays a pattern combination by a plurality of patterns based on a winning combination selected by the internal lottery. The main board 409 executes control for putting out the game media based on the pattern combination displayed by the pattern variation display device 300.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 48

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a swivel type gaming machine (also referred to as a “pachislot machine” or a “slot machine”).

  A general conventional swivel-type gaming machine (game machine) has a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols arranged therein, and a symbol display area in which a part of the plurality of symbols attached to each reel is displayed. Is provided. In such a gaming machine, when a start operation such as operating a start lever is performed after a predetermined number of game media (for example, medals) is placed, an internal lottery of a winning combination is performed, and based on the winning combination The reel is controlled. Thereafter, when a reel stop operation is performed, each reel stops at a stop position based on the winning combination, and a combination of symbols (symbol combination) is shown to the player, and this symbol combination indicates a winning combination of the combination If it is, a privilege is given according to the combination (payout of game media, operation of a bonus game, etc.).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, the gaming machine is generally provided with a gaming state advantageous to the player, for example, a game equipped with a bonus game that can acquire a certain number of gaming media in a short period of time. There was a chance. As a gaming machine that enhances the interest of a player by a bonus game, for example, a gaming machine that can operate a bonus game continuously in a relatively short time by stocking a plurality of bonus winnings has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-054675 A

  However, at present, the gaming machine as disclosed in Patent Document 1 cannot be provided, and there are a number of problems that it is difficult to obtain the interest of the player.

  In view of the above-described problems, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of a player.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides a game state control means for controlling any one of a plurality of gaming states and a game in which a predetermined number of game media are played, for each gaming state. Based on a determined lottery table, a lottery means for performing an internal lottery for selecting a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and a symbol display for displaying a combination of symbols based on the winning combination selected in the internal lottery And a privilege granting means for paying out gaming media based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means, wherein the gaming state includes a plurality of bonus combinations including a plurality of bonus combinations. In a normal gaming state in which the internal lottery is performed for a combination, and in a game from when the bonus combination is won until the symbol combination related to the bonus combination is displayed on the symbol display means A bonus internal state controlled according to the bonus combination, and a bonus intermediate state in which a bonus game is executed according to the bonus combination based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means. The bonus combination includes at least a first bonus combination related to the execution of the first bonus game and a second bonus combination related to the execution of the second bonus game. First bonus control means for controlling the game media to be easily increased in the bonus game, and control for making it difficult to acquire more game media than the number of bonus games multiplied in the second bonus game. And the second bonus control means for ending the second bonus game when a specific condition is satisfied in the second bonus game. And a bliss creation means for creating a series of advantageous periods that can be expected from an increase in gaming media starting from the normal gaming state, wherein the bliss creation means is performed in the normal gaming state during the advantageous period. In the internal lottery, the second bonus combination is prevented from being won simultaneously with other combinations, while the first bonus combination is allowed to be simultaneously selected as a small combination or replay combination, If the player continues to win the small role or the re-playing role, the stay in the advantageous period is maintained without being controlled by the gaming state associated with the winning of the second bonus role, and the first bonus role And bliss improvement means that increase the degree of expectation for winning.

  According to such an invention, in the advantageous period, when continuing to win a small role or re-playing role in the internal lottery, without shifting to a game period unfavorable to the player accompanying the winning of the second bonus role, It is possible to increase the degree of expectation for the first bonus game in which the increase of the game medium is easy, and it is possible to expect the first bonus game by displaying the small role or the replaying role that appears relatively frequently. In this respect, it is possible to achieve an effect that greatly enhances the interest of the player.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the player.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which omitted the door-shaped front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door-shaped front member. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a Z1 part in FIG. 4. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is omitted. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7 showing a state where the connector holder is moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of Fig.8 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side. It is a disassembled perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of the stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a fragmentary perspective view of the symbol variation display apparatus which shows the other form of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relationship between a case member and the stopper of the outer main body side. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a design variation display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a lower half portion of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26. It is the rear view which looked at the heat radiation opening from the back side of the slot machine. It is a partial cross-section partial front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked up at the power supply device from the bottom. It is a principal part sectional drawing of the side plate of an outer main part, and a power supply device which shows another form. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emitting unit. It is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member which disassembles and shows a transparent board. FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member equipped with a transparent plate. It is a disassembled / assembled perspective view of a hinge metal fitting. It is a diagram which shows the chain | linkage of a hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door-shaped front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupling tool to the vertical direction. It is a principal part crossing top view of the door-shaped front member which shows the example of another hinge metal fitting. It is a cross-sectional plan view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and the frame member in the model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door-shaped front member, connecting a connector. FIG. 3 is a development view in which a symbol array of a reel band is developed in a plane. It is an enlarged view near the symbol display window in the slot machine as viewed from the front. It is the schematic which shows roughly the structure of the various mechanism elements with which the slot machine is equipped, an electronic device, an operation member, etc. It is an example of the lottery table used for the lottery (internal lottery) of the winning combination in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery table shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination corresponding to each condition apparatus (or winning combination). It is a flowchart which shows the basic 1 game processing procedure in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a starting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a game state transfer control process. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition relation of the gaming state in 1st Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the average number of stay games for every game state. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of a rough process of an instruction | indication function process. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the instruction | indication function display of a 1st example. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the instruction | indication function display of a 1st example. It is a figure for demonstrating the indicator used by the instruction | indication function display of a 2nd example. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the instruction | indication function display of a 2nd example. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the instruction | indication function display of a 2nd example. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of a display of the instruction | indication function display of a 2nd example. It is FIG. (1) for demonstrating the example of a display of the instruction | indication function display in which the several display mode was set. It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating the example of a display of the instruction | indication function display in which the several display mode was set. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the group display in instruction | indication function display. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific example of a display of the instruction | indication function display of a 1st example. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a display period by various displays etc. It is a timing chart which shows another example of a display period by various displays etc. It is FIG. (The 1) for demonstrating a 1st type expectation degree display (pattern 1). It is FIG. (2) for demonstrating a 1st type expectation degree display (pattern 1). It is a figure for demonstrating a 1st type expectation degree display (pattern 2). It is a figure for demonstrating a 2nd type expectation degree display (pattern 1). It is a figure for demonstrating a 2nd type expectation degree display (pattern 2). It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the priority display (expectedness priority display) of timing is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the priority display (instruction function priority display) of timing is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the priority display (expectedness priority display) of a layer is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the example of a display when the priority display (instruction function priority display) of a layer is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the expectation degree display which produces the display availability of a specific aspect. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a reel stop process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game start process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of a bonus game completion | finish determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of AT game determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the data block of RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating the error display by special display LED. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of the error generation in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart (the 2) for demonstrating the process at the time of error generation in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a process sequence of the electric power interruption reset process in 1st Embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example (part 1) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating a display period example (part 2) when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating an example (part 3) of a display period when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 6 is a timing chart illustrating a display period example (part 4) when an error occurs in the first embodiment. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a display period example (part 1) when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 89 is performed during a game. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a display period example (part 2) when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 89 is performed during the game. FIG. 90 is a timing chart showing a display period example (part 3) when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 89 is performed during a game. 12 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1b. 12 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1b. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. 12 is a flowchart (No. 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1c. 12 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1c. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. 10 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1d. FIG. 10 is a flowchart (part 2) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine 1d. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. It is a flowchart (the 1) for demonstrating the process at the time of error generation in the slot machine 1e. 12 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence process in the slot machine 1e. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. 10 is a flowchart (part 1) for explaining an error occurrence process in the slot machine if. 12 is a flowchart (No. 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine if. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f. FIG. 10 is a development view in which a symbol array of a reel band is developed in a plane in the slot machine of the second embodiment. It is an example of the lottery table used for the lottery (internal lottery) of the winning combination in the slot machine of the second embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery table shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol combination corresponding to the condition apparatus (or winning combination) shown in FIG. It is an example of the lottery table used for the lottery (internal lottery) of the winning combination in the slot machine of the third embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery table shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition relation of the gaming state in 3rd Embodiment. It is an example of the lottery table used for the lottery (internal lottery) of the winning combination in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery table shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating extension of the MB game stay period in 4th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings, taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine with the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is a door-shaped front member omitted. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of the Z1 part of FIG. 4 showing a state where the connector holder is moved, and FIG. FIG. 8A is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7, and FIG. 8B is an enlarged view of the Z2 portion of FIG. 7 showing the state in which the connector holder is moved. 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8A, FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show a temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view in which the cover of the wiring relay member is omitted, and FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder. 18 is a perspective view of a stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of a stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are cross-sectional views of the main part showing the guide structure of the case member, and FIG. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer main body side, and FIG. 24 is the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol fluctuation display device. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view showing the lower half of the slot machine with the medal releasing device omitted, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Figure 28 shows heat dissipation from the back of the slot machine. FIG. 29 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply device viewed from below, and FIG. 31 shows another embodiment. FIG. 32 is a schematic sectional view of a lighting device showing another embodiment, FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing the transparent plate and the light emitting unit in an exploded manner, and FIG. Is an exploded perspective view of the door-shaped front member shown by disassembling the transparent plate, FIG. 35 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member mounted with the transparent plate, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member, FIG. 39 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member in the middle of opening, and FIG. The perspective view seen from the back side which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member, FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing another example of the hinge fitting. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part showing the door-shaped front member shown in FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the coupler is connected.

[1. First Embodiment]
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention has a box-shaped outer body 100 having an open front surface, and a rotary shaft 100a on the front surface of the outer body 100. A door-shaped front member 200 that is pivotably attached to a door, a symbol variation display device 300 that varies a plurality of symbols by driving means, and an opening 401 on the front surface that is detachable from the outer body 100. It has a case member 400 and an image display body 500 that displays an arbitrary image.

[2. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer body 100 has side plates 102 and 102 attached to the left and right sides of the bottom plate 101, and a top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102 and 102. It has a letter-shaped frame shape and is formed in a box shape in which only the front surface is opened by fixing a back plate 104 to the back of the frame. The left and right side plates 102, 102 have a trapezoidal shape in which the front edges are slightly inclined in a backward inclined state, and thus the opening of the outer body 100 has a backward inclined inclination. In addition, a plurality of (in the embodiment, in the embodiment) the top plate 103 is located in a region facing the upper pier 600 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 25) of the gaming machine installation island in a state of being installed on the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) through-holes 132 are formed.

[2-1. Outer body-partition plate]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf-like partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal and has a substantially convex shape in front view having a protruding portion 106 at the center as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, and vertical mounting pieces 107 formed at both ends are attached to the outer body 100. The side plate 102 is fixed to the inner surface of the side plate 102, and a vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 is formed with a cylindrical projection (not shown) by burring (metal processing for raising a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch). The cylindrical protrusion is driven into a small hole (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and positioned. In addition, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in the innermost part on both sides of the partition plate 105.

[2-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal releasing device 110 that releases a medal as a game medium to a medal tray 201 at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200, and the medal releasing device 110 A medal auxiliary storage box 111 for storing overflowing medals, a power supply device 112, and the like are provided.

[2-1-1-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Medal release device]
The medal releasing device 110 is obtained by attaching a medal storage hopper 110b to a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means. A medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a. A certain medal is sent out one by one toward the discharge port 110c by the operation of the driving means. The hopper 110b is provided with an overflow rod 110d for discharging overflowing medals, and the above-mentioned medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the protruding end of the overflow rod 110d. The medal releasing mechanism of the medal releasing device 110 may employ any currently known mechanism, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

[2-1-1-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply unit]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to an inner corner portion in which three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 and the back plate 104 are orthogonal to each other. Yes. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electrical components such as the medal discharge device 110 and is likely to generate heat. Therefore, the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 radiates heat to the attachment portion of the power supply device 112. A mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112a of the power supply device 112 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. By doing so, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find an unauthorized work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) of the power supply device 112 and the like. The device case 112a includes an upper plate 112b that covers the upper surface, a rear plate 112c that faces the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, a front plate 112d that covers the opposite side of the rear plate 112c, and an interior of the slot machine 1. It is formed by a side plate 112e that covers the facing side, a slope plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a that faces the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the side plate 102 of the outer body 100 is provided with a convex surface portion 102a to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is provided below the guard portion 102b. It is a specification that sneaks one side. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint between the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is blocked by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter cannot be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is formed in a groove shape. In this example, the edge of the upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a slightly protrudes toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard portion 102b is formed. It fits into the groove.

  Thus, in the device case 112a of the power supply device 112, when the surface of the outer body 100 that is in contact with the side plate 102 has an open structure without a cover and is covered with the side plate 102 during use, the device case 112a is moved into the device case 112a. The substrate 112s or the like can be easily assembled using the open surface, and workability is improved because it is not necessary to attach a cover to the open surface after the substrate 112s or the like is assembled into the apparatus case 112a.

  The upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a are formed with a large number of air holes 112g, 112g. . The device case 112a is lifted in a raised manner by legs 112h, 112h... Provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer body 100. Therefore, low-rise and relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the ventilation holes 112g, 112g,. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment communicates with the heat radiating port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air at the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. If the inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i is formed at the boundary between the rear plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a, the height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a are formed. Even if there is a deviation in the height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[2-1-1-2-1. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes an attachment piece 112k that is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion that protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. 112 m and the heat radiating port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 are fixed to the outer main body 100.

  That is, the contour of the heat radiating port 104a is formed smaller than the contour of the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a, so that the power supply device 112 hits the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiating port 104a. The protrusion 112m protruding from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a is in a position inscribed in the heat radiating port 104a, and is a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the radiating port 104a to resist the lifting operation of the power supply device 112. It consists of a piece 112m-1 and a vertical protrusion 112m-2 inscribed in the vertical side of the heat radiating port 104a in order to resist the rollover operation of the power supply device 112. Therefore, the power supply device 112 is pushed along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100, and the protrusion 112m is inserted into the heat radiating port 104a. Fixing in the right direction (rollover) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is regulated by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the downward direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply device 112 can be completely restricted with respect to directions other than the direction of pulling forward by a simple operation of only fitting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of screw through holes 112p are formed in the mounting piece 112k projecting from the front plate 112d, and are fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q in at least one of the through holes 112p. Thus, since the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction of pulling forward, the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with one wood screw 112q.

[2-1-1-2-2. Outer body-Partition plate-Lower space-Power supply-Power cord]
A power cord (not shown) for receiving power from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. Conventionally, a bulging portion is provided on the side of the heat radiating port 104a and the power cord is pulled out from the bulging portion. However, at this position, there is a high risk that the power cord is bundled with the ground. The slot machine 1 may be turned on during manufacturing, and a power cord must be taken out of the outer main body 100 in preparation for the case. Therefore, the slot machine 1 is moved on the manufacturing line or between lines. When moving the power cord, the power cord may slip on the ground or get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment expands the cord outlet 104b from the upper side toward the upper side, and draws the power cord from there. This ensures a sufficient height for hanging the bundled power cords in a suspended state. Therefore, the trouble of accidentally damaging the power cord in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present invention, since the power supply device 112 is set at the inner corner portion of the outer main body 100 and only one wood screw 112q is screwed in, the mounting is completed. Great labor saving in installation work. Further, in the present invention, fixing is completed by screwing to one surface, and therefore, particularly when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply device 112, it is easy to see and can be fixed securely. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw with respect to a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112. In particular, a screw fixed to the back plate 104 is difficult to visually recognize and may be forgotten.

  Further, since the heat radiating port 104a is necessary as a cooling means for the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiating port 104a is used for fixing the power supply device 112, an extra process and cost hardly occur. On the contrary, the cooling efficiency is improved because the position of the heat radiating port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are matched for fixing. In addition, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting projection 112m can be integrally formed, so that it costs little. Therefore, the total cost required for mounting the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared with the conventional case.

  Furthermore, when the device case 112a is made of a synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the step portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as a measure against heat generation of the power supply device 112 can be implemented with almost no cost.

[2-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is housed in a space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and a wiring relay member 113 serving as the core of the wiring means described later is provided on the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. The back plate 104 is further provided with a vent hole 133 for heat dissipation above the wiring relay member 113.

[3. Door-shaped front member]
3 shows the front side of the door-shaped front member 200, and FIG. 1 shows the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal tray 201 on the lower side on the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided in the approximate center on the front side. The operation unit 202 includes a medal insertion slot 203 and a one-sheet insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal stored as data in a memory of a main board 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX insertion button 206 for instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, three) that can be used in one game, and a medal return for returning a medal packed in a medal selector 207 to be described later to the medal tray 201. A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (medical release command) stored as data in the memory of the main board 409, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300 And three reel stop buttons for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. Down 211a, 211b, 211c and the like are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto.

  In addition, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion slot 203, and a medal basket 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return basket 213 is connected to the bottom. The medal selector 207 is a known one that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown). In addition, in a gaming state in which medals are refused to be inserted, such as medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return basket 213 side. When the door-shaped front member 200 is in a closed position where the door-shaped front member 200 covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the tip of the medal basket 212 faces the hopper 110 b of the medal discharge device 110. The medal that flows through the medal bowl 212 through the hop-off reaches the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return basket 213 is connected to the front-side medal tray 201, and the medal that flows from the insertion slot 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return basket 213 returns to the medal tray 201.

[3-1. Door-shaped front member-perspective window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front surface of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is a see-through window for games covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. 214. The see-through window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the design variation display device 300 can be seen side by side, and the image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integrated with the door-shaped front member 200. The regions of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided vertically. In this way, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is switched up and down. However, it can be used as it is.

[3-1-1. Door-shaped front member-see-through window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a uses a transparent synthetic resin (for example, methacrylic resin containing rubber excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acrypet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd. is used. ) In a generally inverted trapezoidal shape, and an edge member 214b that bulges to the front side of the three sides (left and right sides and upper side) excluding the bottom, with the side facing the player as the front 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a mold for resin molding. When the edge member 214b is integrally formed on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to increase the strength of the entire transparent plate 214a. As described above, even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, bending and distortion hardly occur.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b is a shell structure that opens to the rear surface side (not a solid, but a shell-like structure with a space inside, and the thickness of each part is arbitrary). The light emitting unit 217 and, for example, a decorative member (not shown) having a pattern or characters on the surface are incorporated in the internal space as necessary.

  In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is depicted as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214b is not limited to that shown in the figure, and can be arbitrarily changed according to the design of the light emitting unit 217 and the decorative member. Further, the portion where the edge member 214b is provided is not limited to the three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a as in the embodiment, and may be provided on any one side at a minimum.

  In addition, in FIGS. 33 and 34, reference numeral 218 denotes a fixing member provided at the left and right corners on the transparent plate 214a. The screw is passed through the through hole 214c (see FIG. 33 enlarged view) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown), it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 functions as a corner decoration on the appearance, and on the through holes 200a and 214d (see an enlarged view of FIG. 33) provided at the corner portions on the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It is screwed into a screw (not shown) passed from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby serving as a nut for fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member that supports the light emitter 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the left and right is set at an angle so as to reflect a large amount of light from the rod-shaped light emitter 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1. In the form in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, the light emitter 217a can be arranged on the front side of the slot machine 1, so that it looks like a lighthouse at the tip of the cape. This is advantageous when light is emitted toward the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located above is set so as to reflect a large amount of light from the light emitter 217a (a combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) upward of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light-emitting unit 217 having the above-described structure can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit is made, and can produce an effect that appeals to the surroundings of the occurrence of the big win. In this way, by performing an effect with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, it is possible to draw attention to the player who has won a big hit, and the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, which further increases the game. In addition, it is expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operating rate will improve by appealing to the surroundings that the jackpot is coming out.

  The transparent plate 214a of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the bottom of the plate-shaped front member 200 is formed with respect to the concave groove 219 (see an enlarged view of FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door-shaped front member 200. Inserted obliquely from the front and fitted into a joiner type, in that state, the transparent plate 214a is erected to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door-shaped front member 200. It fixes with the screw | thread 603 (refer FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cut view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time. As is apparent from FIG. 35, if the player has a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Even if it is forcibly inserted, there is little room for the tip of the foreign material to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, it exhibits an excellent crime prevention effect.

[3-2. Door-shaped front member-lock device]
A lock device 215 that opens and closes using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided on one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200.

[4. Design variation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotation type display device, and incorporates and accommodates, for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that can be individually rotated by driving means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. And a device case 302 that plays a game with a combination of a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c.

  The device case 302 has a deformed hexagonal column shape excluding three faces from the octagonal column that lies on its side to the front (player), and includes a bottom plate 304, a top plate 305, and a right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between the top plate portion 305 and the rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308. And a part of the arc of the reels 301 a, 301 b, and 301 c protrudes from the front of the device case 302.

  In addition, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 that can be changed between a useable state in which a finger can be hooked and a non-use state in which the top plate portion 305 is depressed. To carry.

  The configuration in which the changeable handle 311 is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the apparatus case 302 as described above is closely related to a measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as will be described later, a reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400 to give the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to allow the image display body 500 to be cantilevered. Since such a reinforcing bar 402 crosses the opening 401, it clearly becomes an obstacle to the insertion and removal of the apparatus case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 can be changed and hung on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Accordingly, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in the direction crossing the opening 401 at the opening 401 of the case member 400 only by providing the handle 311 that can be changed as described above on the top plate 305 of the device case 302. Become. Incidentally, the conventional apparatus case has a room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member because the handle protrudes from the top plate and becomes an obstacle.

  In addition, the handle 311 of the embodiment is configured to swing and change between the standing use state and the lying down non-use state, but the structure that can change the handle 311 between the use state and the non-use state is implemented. The form is not limited. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belt loops 314, 314 are cut and raised on the top plate 305, and the belt loops 314, 314 are made of, for example, synthetic resin or leather, and stoppers 315, 315 are provided at both ends. A useable state in which fingers can be hooked, such as a structure in which the band-shaped handle 311 provided is inserted and the center is pulled up to change to a usable state in which fingers can be hooked from the obstructed non-use state of FIG. Any structure may be used as long as it can be changed to the unused state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-like lower handle 316 protrudes from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 of the embodiment, and the device case 302 is pushed in by grasping the lower handle 316. By pulling, it is easy to put in and out the case member 400.

[5. Case material]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and includes a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. The rear plate 405 is erected on the rear edge of the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 covers the upper surface of the rear plate 405 and the side plates 404, 404.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404, 404, the rear plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin. Members 407, 407, and 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 across the opening 401 is stretched between the reinforcing members 407 and 407 of the side plates 404 and 404. The area below the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the symbol variation display device 300, and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 is the installation area for the image display body 500. An area surrounded by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is assigned as a wiring work space 408, and a main board 409 as a main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the rear plate 405 of the wiring work space 408, and Control boards other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510 (see FIG. 44)) are also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  The top plate 406 of the case member 400 is formed with skylight portions 443 and 443 as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two with a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406 interposed therebetween, each of which has an axis line passing through the through holes 132, 132. It exists in the area | region containing an intersection, and is opened sufficiently widely than this through-hole 132,132 .... However, the peripheral edge on the front side of the skylight portion 443 is close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, since the through hole 132 can be found by searching with the periphery of the skylight portion 443 as a reference, the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined even if the operator does not look into the skylight portion 443. Here, the skylight 443 also functions as the opening of the present invention. That is, by providing a plurality of skylight portions 443 as openings on the upper surface of the case member 400, the weight can be reduced, and the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement can be further reduced.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410, 410 project from the outer surface of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400, and the bosses 410 serve as the back plate of the outer body 100. The boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104 are fitted and positioned. 2 and 5, the bosses 410 and 410 are provided near a wiring window 411, which will be described later. On the other hand, the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer body 100 side are close to the wiring relay member 113. Accordingly, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a concave step portion 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the concave step portion 412 fits into the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. A tapered portion 413 extending in the rearward direction is provided at the end on the rear plate 405 side of the recessed step portion 412, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105 and the case member 400. The concave step 412 can be smoothly fitted. Thus, the case member 400 is straightly guided to the back of the partition plate 105 by the fitting of the concave step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the protruding step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a concave groove is laid on the plate 105 or press-molded integrally. On the other hand, a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. Also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, a rail member 116 having a convex shape is laid or integrally formed on the partition plate 105, and on the other hand, flanges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail member 116 may be sandwiched between the flanges 415 and 415 of the wheel 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by a swing lever-shaped stopper 117 shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18, and 23 in a state where the case member 400 is set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and the two attachments 118 and 118 suspended from the top plate 103, as shown by the solid line in FIG. The operation posture engaged with a part of the case member 400 and the non-operation posture not engaged with the case member 400 as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. Regulate movement. If the stopper 117 is key-shaped as shown in FIG. 19 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the stopper 117 pivotally attached to the fixture 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing a locking hole 442 penetrating the corner portion of the side plate 404 and the top plate 406 of the case member 400. The operation posture and the non-operation posture can be switched from the inside of the case member 400 while the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole penetrating to the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100 is opened on the rear plate 405 of the case member 400. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. The horizontal empty space 417 above the upper swash plate 309 (or a horizontal triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main board 409) and the back. It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf-like temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as “temporary fixing shelf”) at a substantially intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419 are formed on the outside of the rear plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411, which are wiring passages that pass through the left and right side surfaces of the case member 400.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified with reference to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 has the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c as a lower limit, that is, the height at which the lower side is placed within the range. In other words, it is an arrangement.

[6. Image display]
The image display body 500 is a panel-type unit that can display an image, for example, which includes at least a liquid crystal display (or may be a plasma display or an organic EL display), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44). Note that the image display body 500 is attached to a reinforcing member 407 provided on the left side plate 404 of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (see the shaded portion in FIG. 11 for the attachment position), and is rotated by the hinge fitting 420. It is supported freely.

  As shown in FIG. 44, a sub-board 510 is assembled on the back side of the image display body 500. For this reason, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the sub-board 510 can be integrally configured, and the handling is facilitated, and the wiring connecting the both can be omitted. The complexity of the space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the sub-board 510 appears so as to jump out of the case member 400, so that the workability for the sub-board 510 can be significantly improved.

[6-1. Image display-Hinge bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. FIG. In addition, since the hinge metal fitting 420 has a symmetrical structure, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 is fixed to the fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, the rotating member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the rotating member 420b. It comprises a short link 420c and a long link 420d that connect the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate. One end of a long link 420d is connected to the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e by a pin P1, and a short link is connected to the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the rotating member 420b of the hinge bracket 420 has a horizontal bearing piece 420f that is in the form of a shelf plate. One end of the long link 420d is pin P3 on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f, and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. In addition, one end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c, and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-bar rotation chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. A so-called double lever mechanism is formed in which a fixed piece 420e facing a certain bearing piece 420f is a fixed link. As shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C, both the lever mechanisms approximate the rotation trajectory of the image display body 500 to the rotation trajectory centering on the rotation shaft 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200. Therefore, each pin position is set. That is, the hinge bracket 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and even if the rotation position of the door-shaped front member 200 changes, the rotation outer edge side of the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are not rotated. The distance from the edge side is made substantially constant.

  The long link 420d and the short link 420c have overlapping regions 420g and 420h that overlap vertically when the image display body 500 is rotated (opened) by approximately 90 degrees (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d). The region 420g is expanded in a triangle so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.), And pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. The pin holes 420i and 420j are aligned on the same axis and inserted into a rod-shaped stop pin (not shown) to connect the long link 420d and the short link 420c, thereby locking the lever mechanism and locking the image display body. It is for fixing 500 to an open position.

[6-2. Image display-Lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the vertical reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400 is locked to the reinforcing member 407 on the opposite side of the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 (on the right side in FIG. 11). A piece 421 is pivotally attached. When the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 11, the tip of the lock piece 421 is engaged with a receiving portion 508 projecting from the back side of the image display body 500. The image display body 500 is locked at a position where the upper portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the lock piece 421 is rotatable about the hinge fitting 420. Normally, before the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent unnecessary rotation, while in the state where the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100, the image is displayed. The display body 500 is unlocked to be rotatable.

[6-3. Image display body-connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, when the inside of the case member 400 is visually recognized or the case member 400 is operated. In this case, the door-shaped front member 200 on the near side must be opened first, and then the image display body 500 on the far side must be opened, which may reduce workability and annoyance. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present example, the rotation direction of the image display body 500 is set to the same direction as the rotation direction of the door-shaped front member 200, and the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. 700 is connected, and the image display body 500 is also opened and closed together with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. According to this, when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. In other words, the image display body 500 is rotated around the door-shaped front member 200, and not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 can be visually recognized by a single lateral opening operation.

  Here, as described above, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment are configured such that the pivot locus of the image display body 500 is the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge fitting 420. However, there is still a relative shift between the movements of the two. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the coupling tool 700 of the embodiment forms a fixed sheath member 701 on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is accommodated in a free state, and the tip of the rod 702 is connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the lock device 215) so as to be rotatable by a stop shaft 703. is there. By doing so, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 opens and closes together as if it is an accessory part of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The rod 702 of the connector 700 enters and exits the fixed sheath member 701 to absorb the relative shift in movement.

  Note that the maximum protrusion length when the rod 702 protrudes most from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is when the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, when it is opened 90 °). It is set based on the distance between the rotating outer edge of the door-shaped front member 200 (position of the stop shaft 703) and the rotating outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be set to the minimum necessary length, and the increase in size of the coupler can be suppressed.

  The retaining shaft 703 is attached to support pieces 215b, 215b, and 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215 so as to be movable up and down, and is always urged downward by a spring 703a. Has been. Therefore, the stop shaft 703 can be moved up against the urging force of the spring 703a, and the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached and detached by moving up and floating the lower end. That is, the stop shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the shaft hole portion 702a formed at the tip portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 denotes an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700. The rod 702 removed from the stop shaft 703 is attached to the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is held inside, and is engaged with a hook wall 702b at the end of a groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the rod 702 from blinding. On the side of the rod 702, a knob 706 protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, and the stopper 704 is unlocked by picking the knob 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is like that. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the front end side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701a is in contact with the hooking wall 702b when the rod 702 protrudes the most, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixed sheath member 701.

  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion protruding from the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotating outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 is engaged with the reinforcing bar 402 that traverses the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide part 402 a inclined downward toward the image display body 500 in order to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. Further, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin excellent in lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably attached to the image display body 500. Yes.

  By the way, the relative displacement of the movement due to the difference in the rotation trajectory between the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above-described telescopic rod-type connector 700 but also a flexible wire. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connecting tool is a flexible wire or the like, the door-shaped front member 200 will hit the image display body 500 that is stopped while being opened at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, thereby impairing smoothness. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, an urging means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 so as to constantly urge it in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image display body 500 is closed by itself while pulling the coupling tool by the action of the urging force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for rotating the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 is not limited to the above. For example, the hinge bracket 420, which is an element for rotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the both lever mechanisms as described above, but is centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. A simple one that rotates the image display 500 may be used.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above, in which the image display body 500 is attached to the case member 400 with a hinge structure so that the image display body 500 can be rotated like a door. When the above-mentioned lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select the handling, and in that case, since the important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the sub board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, it is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. .

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is attached by a finger passing through the gap 10. It can be grasped. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front center portion of the top plate 406 of the case member 400 (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443 and 443), and a finger passing through the handle opening 422 is used to attach the top plate 406 to the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be gripped. Therefore, the case member 400 can be properly used for the handle 422 and the gap 10 in accordance with the place and posture of handling. For example, when the case member 400 is transported before being incorporated into the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a bowl shape using the handle port 422. On the other hand, the case member 400 mounted on the outer main body 100 is shown in FIG. As described above, the grip port 422 is hidden behind the outer body 100 so that a finger does not enter, so that the case member 400 is pulled out by placing the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 protrudes from the front center of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer body 100 is pushed or pulled by holding the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily taken in and out of the case. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integrated with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with screws. Therefore, the lower handle 316 protrudes in front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

[6-4. Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers almost the entire region above the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400. In addition, a frame member 501 that surrounds a region below the reinforcing bar 402 of the opening 401 of the case member 400, that is, a front region of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape, is integrally formed below the image display body 500. The reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are bordered by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, on which an appropriate pattern is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 is an electric decoration composed of a light emission source such as an LED, a light emission control board that controls the light emission source, and a decorative member that is disposed in front of the light emission source and can transmit light. Is provided. Here, what combined the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 is demonstrated as the front opening / closing member 90 (refer FIG. 44) below.

[6-4-1. Image Display Body-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
A lighting device 502 is provided on the upper and lower sides of the frame member 501, and the design of the symbol variation display device 300 is illuminated brightly by the lighting device 502. Since the frame member 501 is suspended below the image display body 500 and is close to the symbol variation display device 300, it is possible to bring the light source closer to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 into such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 has a feature that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low amount of light compared to the conventional lighting device.

  As illustrated in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 illustrated as an embodiment has a strip-like substrate that is elongated in a direction perpendicular to the paper surface of the drawing (in the width direction of the slot machine 1 and in the same direction as the rotation axis of the reel 301 a...). A large number of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as LEDs) 504 are arranged in a row 503, and the lower lighting device 502 includes an LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed with, for example, a milky white translucent cover plate 505. On the other hand, the upper illuminating device 502 is formed by disposing the LED 504 downward in a translucent cover 507 having a U-shaped cross section upward, for example, milky white.

  Note that the upper lighting device 502 is installed obliquely downward with the lighting direction from directly below to the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side, as shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED mounting surface of the substrate 503 is set so that the center line L (see the enlarged view of FIG. 4) of the main irradiation region of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  Also, if a rod-like light emitter such as a fluorescent lamp is used as the light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 in FIG. 4 is changed to a plate-like or concave reflecting member that wraps the light source, and direct light and What is necessary is just to set so that the centerline of the main irradiation area directed by the sum total of reflected light may strike the back surface on the transparent plate 214a side. As described above, when the irradiation aim of the illumination device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if a part of the leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, there is almost no influence.

  According to experiments, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed to the peripheral surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are strongly reflected and difficult to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is inclined with respect to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a, so that the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. It was confirmed that a wide range became bright and easy to see. The reason for this is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 hits the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused over the entire surface, or the reel 301a, It is presumed that the wide range of 301b and 301c looks bright or is due to their synergistic action.

  The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can also be adopted in the lower illumination device 502, and of course, it can be adopted only in the lower illumination device 502 as shown in FIG. 32 is a diagram in which the upper illumination device 502 in FIG. 4 is disposed on the lower side and the lower illumination device 502 is disposed on the upper side. Therefore, “upper” in the description of the illumination device 502 is “lower”. And read “below” as “upper”.

  By the way, when the LED is used as the light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) the conventional driving is performed at a high voltage (for example, about 800 V at start-up and about 600 V at operation) because it is driven at a low voltage. (B) Longer life than a cold cathode tube, (c) Stronger than a cold cathode tube that is a glass tube, (d) Width of production because multicolor emission is possible (E) There is an advantage that it is lighter than a cold cathode tube used in combination with an inverter, and therefore the burden on the hinge fitting 420 that supports the image display body 500 is small.

[7. Wiring means]
For example, each of the insertion buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 (hereinafter simply referred to as “generic names” in the operation unit 202 of the medal discharge device 110, the power supply device 112, and the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer body 100. The main body 409, etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as “case member side electric component” as a generic term for the case member side electric component). Connected. In the slot machine 1 according to the embodiment, the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable from the outer main body 100. At this time, rational wiring means is provided for easily connecting or disconnecting the main body side electrical component (housing side electrical component) and the case member side electrical component.

[7-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper part of the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and faces the empty space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. Yes. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality of (two in the embodiment, large and small) connector boards (hereinafter referred to as “mounting board”). It may also be referred to as a “connector connection terminal board”.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120, and is connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 that is paired with the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 is provided.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector board 123 located on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached in a non-fixed and free-movable state in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. Accordingly, FIG. As shown in Fig. 4, the movable member can move in the vertical direction and can move in the horizontal direction. This small connector board 123 is provided with a connector 125 that makes a pair with the connector 427 at the tip of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main board 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are board-fixed types that are fixed to a printed circuit board by fixing means such as soldering, and inexpensive DIN standards are used.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 includes two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding in a position side by side with the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half. And a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 that projects to the front of the part.

  The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or is bundled with a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 protruding from the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 are distributed to the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 as shown by a one-dot chain line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed substantially vertically near the corners of the side plates 102 and 102 and the back plate 104, many of which are The wiring board 109 is connected to the electrical component on the main body side through the wiring opening 109 provided in the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electrical component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, regardless of the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105. Connected as is.

From the wiring means described so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) The rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is self-exposed between a horizontal plane passing through the rotation center of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and a horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c. The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) A wiring relay member 113 is installed on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 to relay the main body side wirings 119 connected to the main body side electric parts and the case side wirings 423 connected to the case member side electric parts.
(C) A vertical wiring path through which wiring passes along the inner surfaces of the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 is formed.
(D) The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is guided to the side of the case member 400, and is connected to the main body side electrical component through the wiring path therefrom.

  In the gaming machine having the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wirings 119 do not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102, 102 of the outer main body 100 are connected. Since the wiring path provided along the corner (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)) is bypassed, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c can be brought close to the back plate 104 of the outer body 100. The diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is larger than that of the conventional configuration, that is, the conventional configuration in which the main body side wirings 119 pass through the back of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c almost down the center of the back plate 104. Can be bigger. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, the greater the force at the time of rotation.

[7-2. Wiring means-connectors 425 and 427]
As described above, the two connectors 124 and 125 provided on the wiring relay member 113 include the connector 425 at the tip of the harness 424 connected to the main board 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main board 409. The connectors 427 at the ends of the harnesses 426 connected to the electrical components are respectively connected.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 includes a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 that has a through hole 430 at a substantially central portion and protrudes on both sides of the holder main body 429, and It consists of a well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name “Nylatch”: registered trademark) mounted in the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and as shown in FIGS. 5 and 8A, the wiring relay member 113 An attachment piece 431 is applied to the tip of the support cylinder 128, and a button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Accordingly, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as a fixing means, and then fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 cannot be disconnected.

[7-2-1. Wiring Relay Board-Connector 425, 427-Temporary Stop Shelf]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113. However, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the completion of installation, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected. 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400.

  The temporary fixing shelf 418 is a shelf-like member that faces the wiring window 411 from the inside of the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12, and 13, and is shown in FIG. In this way, a substantially horizontal bench portion 433 on which the connector holder 428 is placed, a bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433, and three inward claw pieces 435, 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , 435. Between the central one of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, and 435 and the other two on the upper and lower sides, there is an interval at which the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and is supported at one end by applying a force in the X direction indicated by an arrow in FIG. It can be bent outward like a leaf spring, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in the bent state. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent into a key shape. By doing so, the connector holder 428 can be removed just like pressing the button as indicated by arrow Y. It can be done easily.

  6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is attached to the inward claw pieces 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434. The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporary fixing shelf 418 by being fitted between 435. Of course, even if it is temporarily fixed, the connector holder 428 is set to have a strength that does not come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and therefore, before the case member 400 is assembled into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed to a temporary fixing shelf 418 provided in the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tips of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit the parts in the case member 400 and, of course, the parts. There is no danger of damaging itself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8B → FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after the case member 400 is fixed to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is bent outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporary fixing shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where the attachment piece 431 thereof contacts the support tube 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connector of the wiring relay member 113. 124 and 125 (details will be described later), the button-shaped panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in that state, and the attachment piece 431 is locked to the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6, if the guide rail 440 for guide is provided on the bench portion 433, it is only necessary to push the connector holder 428 inward, so that workability is improved. improves.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stable with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a supporting base and is not in contact with the case member because it is separated from the case member. Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relatively, an unreasonable load is not applied.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(A) an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and the power supply device and other body side electrical components are provided;
(B) a model unit provided with a symbol variation display device for changing a plurality of symbols on a case member detachably attached to the outer main body, and other case member side electrical components;
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring connected to the case member side electric component;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case-side wiring;
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided in the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member in a state before the model unit is mounted on the outer body. (I) A gaming machine, wherein the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means while the model unit is mounted on the outer body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the above gaming machine, the mounting of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and the connection of the connectors are performed separately. In contrast, for example, a connector is directly attached to the model unit 50. A method of automatically connecting the connectors by the operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100 is conceivable. However, in this method, when the model unit 50 having a large mass vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a heavy burden is applied to the connector coupling portion, so there is a concern about reliability, and there is a problem that costs for the countermeasure are high. is there.

  The gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-type front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-type front member 200. In contrast, a gaming machine in which the door-shaped front member is divided into two upper and lower stages and the upper door-shaped front member is a part on the model unit 50 side is also conceivable. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player who is excited during the game hits the upper door-shaped front member, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, so that the coupling of the connector may become unstable. There is a problem that requires a new security structure for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent from the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is coupled to a component (wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer body 100 and separated from the model unit 50 as shown in FIG. 5. Therefore, even when a low-cost general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board is used, there is no concern about reliability and durability during transportation and gaming. In addition, only the model unit 50 is an object to be replaced when the model is changed, and the door-shaped front member 200 is not an object to be replaced.

[7-2-2. Connector 425, 427 and connectors 124, 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. By doing so, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed by one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to a predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a practical problem, in the structure in which the independent elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are gathered together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes a difficult problem. encounter. That is, if the positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not accurate, the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 cannot be coupled together. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at the cost of mass-produced products. As one means for solving such a problem, a method of using a so-called drawer connector having a mechanism for enhancing flexibility at the time of connection without soldering to a printed circuit board can be considered, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Therefore, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 as the board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are respectively attached, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired. A direction that is non-fixedly placed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121 and is orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “orthogonal” is not strictly 90 degrees). , Meaning that it is about 90 degrees on social belief)). In such a configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is set to the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector board 123 moves and the deviation is corrected. Since it moves to correct, connector 427 and connector 125 can also be coupled.

From the explanation so far, the following technical idea can be grasped.
(1) “In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors that are paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and paired with these connectors. The connector board is mounted on the connector board, the connector board is further divided for each connector, one of them is fixed to the board support member, and the other connector board is connected to the board support member in the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(2) “A plurality of symbols are attached to an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate, and includes a power supply device and other main body-side electrical components; In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member and a board that is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and is fixed to the printed board A connector connection terminal board, which is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and to which the connector of the other connector group is fixed. The connector terminal board is divided for each connector and one of them is fixed to the wiring relay member, and the other connector connecting terminal board is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction. A gaming machine characterized by doing so. "
(3) In a gaming machine having “two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each connector, one connector group is fixed to the board support member via the connector board. In addition, another connector group that is paired with these is attached to one connector holder, and one connector in the connector group is fixed to the connector holder, and the other connector is connected to the connector holder in the direction of connector connection. A gaming machine characterized by being mounted so as to be movable in an orthogonal direction. "
(4) “A plurality of symbols are provided on an outer body having a box shape in which the front surface is open and the back surface is covered with a back plate and provided with a power supply device and other body-side electrical components; In order to relay a model unit provided with a variable symbol display device and other case member side electric parts, main body side wirings connected to the main body side electric parts, and case side wirings connected to the case member side electric parts A wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body; two or more connectors attached to the tip of the case side wiring; a connector holder that collectively supports the two or more connectors as a connector group; and the connector A fixing means for fixing the holder to the wiring relay member and a board that is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and is fixed to the printed board And a connector connection terminal board that is attached to a wiring relay member attached to the back plate and to which a connector of the other connector group is fixed, and the connector holder. On the other hand, a gaming machine characterized in that one connector in the connector group is fixed and the other connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connector coupling direction.

  The above gaming machines are designed so that the connector holder is operated by aiming at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board, even if there is a slight deviation due to manufacturing error etc. in the relative position between other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal board moves together with the connector and moves to correct the deviation and absorbs the error, it is possible to connect the connectors which are not the joint aim. Accordingly, it is possible to collectively connect a plurality of systems of connectors using one connector holder. In addition, the connector used is a general-purpose and inexpensive, for example, DIN standard soldered to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body through the wiring relay member, and by extension, the wiring relay member, by fixing means such as Nylatch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via a flexible harness. Even if the model unit moves, the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder because the flexible harness absorbs the movement. . For this reason, even if a relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves only with the outer body and is not affected by the model unit. No load is applied to the part. Therefore, the reliability of connector connection is very high.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector board 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 is movable and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are used as a reference for coupling is compared to the opposite configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily combined. This is because the smaller connector board 123 can be handled with a lighter force, so that it is easy to automatically correct the deviation. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled before the other connectors 427 and 125, so that the connectors for coupling aiming can be easily matched.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 9, the chamfered portion C (the chamfered portion C ( If a straight chamfering or a curved chamfering is possible), the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered portion C makes the connectors more connectable.

  In addition to the configuration in which the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 are movable as in the embodiment, it is also possible to allow any one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side to be movable. In this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receiving cylinder 429a with a female thread is provided on the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while ear pieces 427b having free holes 427a on both sides of the connector 427 are formed, and the receiving cylinder 429a of the connector holder 428 is formed. The loose hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move with respect to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. In this case, the connector boards 122 and 123 may be fixed to the mounting plate 120 integrally. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 12, the back of the rear plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the rear plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened near both ends of the cable groove 437. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 and the main board 409 and the like. In FIG. The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the non-hinge side surface of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable is inserted into the cable groove 437, and the tip of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main board 409 or the like. The cable groove 437 is provided with cable stoppers 439 at predetermined intervals so that the cable 313 does not fall off from the cable groove 437.

  Thus, the main board 409 and the reel board 312 are both case member-side electrical components in the case member 400, and it is not necessary to pull out the cable 313 outside the case member 400. The reason why the case member 400 is intentionally provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel substrate 312 is a non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (device case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing connectors in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferable. On the contrary, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side surface of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) that is fully opened and the reel substrate 312 are close to each other. This is because a large working space required for inserting and removing the connector cannot be secured because of facing each other.

  However, on the other hand, when the connection part of the boards (main board 409, sub board 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to the reel board 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 of the case member 400. The cable 313 crosses the inside of the case member 400. Then, the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, or the cable 313 may be caught when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the case member 400 is provided with the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 to bypass the cable 313 to the outside as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. In addition, the wiring work is better when the device case 302 is slightly pulled out from a predetermined position, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel board 312 is also the wiring cost. There is room to say. Accordingly, the cable 313 is slackened with the apparatus case 302 set at a predetermined position, and the cable 313 is slackened depending on the amount of pull-out. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is formed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the apparatus case 302 and the corner portion at the back of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. The loose part of can be escaped.

  Further, when the cable groove 437 is inflated toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, it is between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302. Useful for effective use of dead space. Note that wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 is not limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, the code | symbol 441 is a function separation relay terminal board.

  The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in a finished product state in which the case member 400 is mounted on the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the amusement hall. At this time, as shown in an imaginary line in FIG. 25, the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the game machine installation island are connected with a wood screw or the like. When stopping with the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted into the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 from the inside of the case member 400 through the skylight 443, The fixing member 601 is tightened over the skylight 443 with a tool 602 such as a screwdriver, and the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper rail 600 of the gaming machine installation island are fixedly connected. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can be arbitrarily selected and used as needed. For example, even if the position and size of the upper beam 600 vary, the through hole 132 corresponding to the upper beam 600 can be selected. Further, when the entire gaming machine is replaced, if the through-hole 132 to be used is changed, it is possible to prevent the adverse effect that the hole of the fixing member 601 is opened at the same position of the upper rail 600 (so-called fool hole formation).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and heat generated from the image display body 500 or the like is used to cool the image display body 500 (not shown). Then, it passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 through the gap S to the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, there is a wiring relay member 113 between the back plate 104 and the case member 400, which acts like a barrier and closes the gap S over a wide range. Therefore, the hot air flowing through the gap S is blocked by this portion, and the wiring relay member 113 It is positively discharged to the outside from the vent hole 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[8. Each reel symbol, symbol row]
For example, as shown in FIG. 46, each reel 301a, 301b, 301c has a symbol row (a total of 21 indicated by array numbers 0 to 20) formed by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at regular intervals. A reel band (symbol band) on which a single symbol) is written is attached. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol rows written on the reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are developed in a plane. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arrange | positioned in a symbol row | line | column, the said sequence number is described for convenience. 46 shows the reel 301a to which the reel band 321a is attached as the left reel, the reel 301b to which the reel band 321b is attached as the middle reel, and the reel 301c to which the reel band 321c is attached as the right reel. In this description, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are indicated as necessary.

  Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c has a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row, and the opening 401 (also referred to as symbol display window, hereinafter symbol). It arrange | positions so that it can visually recognize via the display window 401 (refer FIG. 47 demonstrated next).

  46, for example, in the case of FIG. 46, there are two designs of “7 symbols” and “7 red symbols” and “7 symbols” in FIG. ”White 7 design”), “BAR design” with the letter “BAR”, “Cherry design” with cherry design, “Watermelon design” "Watermelon design", "Replay design", "Bell design with bell design", and "Bom design" with design imitating a character like a bomb . In FIG. 112, which will be described later, the bell symbol is “bell 1 symbol” in which one star is drawn and “bell 2 symbol in which two stars are drawn, depending on the number of stars drawn in the bell. ”. In addition, in FIG. 112, “blank 1 symbol” and “blank 2 symbol” are also shown in addition to these symbols.

  In the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 46, “7 symbols (seven red symbols)” is one of the array numbers 10 in the reel band 321a and one of the array numbers 20 in the reel band 321b. In 321c, one of the sequence number 20 corresponds. “BAR design” has three arrangement numbers 4, 15, and 20 in the reel band 321a, two arrangement numbers 4 and 12 in the reel band 321b, and arrangement number 19 in the reel band 321c. One of these corresponds. “Cherry design” corresponds to two of array numbers 5 and 14 in the reel band 321a, and five of array numbers 2, 6, 10, 14, and 18 in the reel band 321b. It does not exist in the band 321c. “Watermelon design” is one of array number 9 in the reel band 321a, one of array number 1 in the reel band 321b, and array number 3, 7, 11, and 15 in the reel band 321c. These four correspond. “Bell design” has eight arrangement numbers 1, 3, 6, 8, 11, 13, 16, and 18 in the reel band 321a, and the arrangement number 3 in the reel band 321b. No. 7, No. 15, No. 15 and No. 19, and in the reel band 321c, there are five arrangement numbers No. 4, No. 8, No. 12, No. 16, No. 21. The “replay symbols” are five in the reel band 321a: array numbers 2, 7, 12, 17, and 19, and in the reel band 321b, array numbers 5, 9, 13, 17, No. 5 and reel band 321c correspond to array numbers No. 1, No. 5, No. 9, No. 13, and No. 17. “Bomb design” has one of array number 21 in the reel band 321a, two of array numbers 8 and 16 in the reel band 321b, and array number 2, 6, and 10 in the reel band 321c. -Five of 14 and 18 correspond. Description of the arrangement shown in FIG. 112 is omitted. In addition, the kind of design is an example, Comprising: It is not restricted to these kinds.

[9. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows an enlarged view around the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401 in the slot machine 1 as viewed from the front. 47, a symbol display window 401 is formed at the center of the frame member 501, and a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs (corresponding to “various indicators” described later) around the symbol display window 401. Is shown to be placed. A part of the three reels (reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is made visible through the symbol display window 401. Further, it is shown that the effect display surface of the image display body 500 is arranged above the frame member 501, and images (including moving images) displayed on the image display body 500 are visible from the player. It has become. Hereinafter, each of the above-described configurations shown in FIG. 47 will be described in detail.

[9-1. Symbol display window]
As shown in FIG. 47, from the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c are visible. The three positions where the symbols are displayed are “upper (or upper position)” (for example, the position where “BAR symbol” of the reel 301a is displayed), “middle (or middle position)” (for example, The position where the “replay symbol” of the reel 301b is displayed) and the “lower (or lower position)” (for example, the position where the “bell symbol” of the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, it is possible to display “number of stages × number of reels” symbols in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, a maximum of nine symbols can be displayed in the symbol display window 401 by “the number of stages (3) × the number of reels (3)”.

  Various lamps are provided on the left side of the frame member 501 (also referred to as a display panel, which will be unified as the display panel 501 below) on the left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401. Among them, “BET1”, “BET2 ”And“ BET 3 ”are BET lamps (bet lamps) 614. The numbers of the BET lamps (the numbers 1, 2, and 3 of“ BET 1 ”,“ BET 2 ”, and“ BET 3 ”above) are as follows. Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets, the number corresponding to the number of medals bet), that is, “1” is one bet (the number of bets placed is one) and “2” is 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2), and “3” corresponds to 3 bets (also called a MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

  An effective arrangement is determined according to the number of bets. This “effective arrangement” is also called an effective line. Hereinafter, it is referred to as an effective line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, which will be described later, is determined to be displayed as a combination mode of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one active line. That is, even if each symbol constituting the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, each symbol is not arranged on any of the active lines (that is, the predetermined symbol is displayed). If the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not arranged on the active line), it is not determined that the symbol combination mode corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is not arranged on the active line, it is determined that the disparate symbol combination mode (that is, the lost symbol combination) is displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the effective line will be specifically described. In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as an example, a game with three cards is defined or recommended throughout the normal gaming state (general gaming state), the bonus internal state, and during the bonus game (a prescribed number of three). Shall. However, the prescribed number does not have to be limited to the same number in all gaming states. For example, in a bonus state controlled during a bonus game, a game with two cards is played (the prescribed number is two). Also good. In addition, the effective lines in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment are five straight lines formed across the three reels 301a to 301c. Specifically, it corresponds to the effective lines 623a to 623e shown in FIG. 47, and the respective lines may be referred to as a middle line 623a, an upper line 623b, a lower line 623c, a lower right line 623d, and a right upward line 623e. . Further, when a plurality of effective lines 623a to 623e are collectively referred to, they are simply referred to as effective lines 623.

  Note that the bet number and the active line are not limited to the above example. For example, the effective line may be a line that can be visually recognized by the player in the symbol display window 401, and may be, for example, a mountain-shaped or V-shaped array in addition to one or a plurality of linear arrays. Further, the number of effective lines is not limited to two, and one or a plurality of effective lines may be set. For example, in the second to fourth embodiments described later, only the middle stage line 623a is an effective line. Further, the number of active lines may be changed according to the number of medals bet in the game.

[9-2. Various indicators]
As shown in FIG. 47, the display panel 501 has a plurality of indicators such as lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or blinked) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1 around the symbol display window 401. Yes. Among such a plurality of displays, various displays other than the special display LED 612 will be described.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light (or flash) when any trouble or failure (hereinafter referred to as “error”) occurs during the game of the slot machine 1, and an error is currently occurring. It is a lamp that has the role of notifying players (including hall attendants). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the error lamp 604, an error is abbreviated and “ERR” is drawn. Since it is difficult to show details of the error only by lighting or blinking with the error lamp 604, the slot machine 1 can display information indicating the details of the generated error on the special display LED 612 provided separately. .

  The replay lamp 606 is a lamp having a role of notifying the player that a replay can be performed (a game can be performed again without betting a new medal) when the game result is a replay (described later). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the replay lamp 606, replay is abbreviated and the letters “REP” are drawn.

  The start lamp 608 is a lamp that starts to light (or blink) when the number of bets reaches the MAX bet and prompts the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation). In FIG. 47, the characters “STR” are drawn in the vicinity of the start lamp 608 for abbreviated start.

  The medal IN lamp 610 is a lamp having a role of prompting the player to bet by continuing to be lit (or flashing) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet). In FIG. 47, in the vicinity of the medal IN lamp 610, the letters “INS” are drawn, omitting the insert (input of game value).

  The stored number display LED 613 displays the number of stored medals (game value) that can be used by the player when the player inserts medals or pays out medals accompanying game results. This display has a role of notifying the player of the number of medals stored, and is composed of two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs (the number of stored number display LED 613a on the left side and the number of stored number display LED 613b on the right side). For example, when the upper limit number of medals that can be used by the player is 50, and the upper limit number is stored, “5” is displayed on the stored number display LED 613a and the stored number display LED 613b is displayed. By displaying “0”, the stored number of medals “50” is displayed so as to be distinguishable from the player.

  The BET lamp 614 (614a to 614c) indicates the number of BETs when a BET operation for betting medals (game value) up to the specified number is performed before the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game. By displaying, it is a display device having a role of notifying the bet number (BET number) of game value in one game, and is composed of three lamps corresponding to the BET number. Specifically, when the number of BETs is 1, the BET lamp 614c is turned on, and when the number of BETs is 2, the BET lamp 614b is turned on in addition to the BET lamp 614c, and the upper BET number is 3 (MAXBET). Then, all the BET lamps 614a to 614c are turned on by further turning on the BET lamp 614a.

  Note that these display units described above are controlled by the main board 409 (see FIG. 48 described later).

  In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game, which will be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying the total number of medals paid out in the bonus game, etc., and counting the bonus game are provided separately. Also good.

  Further, the indicator such as the stored number display LED 613 and the special display LED 612 (described later) is not limited to the 7-segment LED as long as the information to be displayed on the indicator can be displayed. For example, the number of segments may be different from “7” (14-segment or 16-segment), or LCD (liquid crystal display), VFD (fluorescent display tube), organic EL, etc. may be used instead of LED. May be.

[9-3. Special display LED]
The special display LED 612 has a role of displaying a payout number to notify the player of the payout number of the game value by displaying the payout number when there is a payout of medals (game value) accompanying the game result. It is a display, and is composed of two side-by-side 7-segment LEDs (the special display LED 612a on the left side and the special display LED 612b on the right side). Specifically, a two-digit number can be displayed using the special display LEDs 612a and 612b, and when 15 medals are paid out according to the game result, the timing at which the medals are paid out one by one. In addition, by changing the display contents such as “01”, “02”,..., “15”, it is possible to notify the player of the game value (medal) payout status in real time.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 has a role of displaying an instruction function for displaying the instruction content by the “instruction function” in the game, in addition to the role of displaying the number of payouts. The details of the “instruction function” will be described later. In summary, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the occurrence of an instruction by the “instruction function” is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the special display LED 612 As the instruction function display, information indicating the pressing position of the reels 301a to 301c and the stop order (reading as the pressing order or the pressing position of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the stop operation) is displayed, and depending on the content of the display When the reel 301 is stopped, a game result advantageous to the player is provided.

  In the instruction function, the performance that affects the generation of the instruction (specifically, lottery related to the instruction function and management of state transition, etc.) is controlled by the main board 409, and specifically, lottery related to the instruction function. In addition to the control of the state transition, the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is managed by the main board 409. On the other hand, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on the determination result by the main board 409, other display means (for example, the image display body 500) other than the display destination of the instruction function display indicate the instruction function of the same content. However, such a display may be controlled by a peripheral board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510). The connection relationship between the special display LED 612, the main board 409, and the sub board 510 is illustrated in FIG.

  Specifically, for example, when an advantageous privilege can be given to the player by performing a stop operation in a specific push order based on the result of the internal lottery in the game (for example, a game having an AT or ART function) In the machine, when a so-called push order small combination is won), under the control of the main board 409 (especially the CPU 1110), an “appropriate push order” advantageous to the player (for example, in the case of a push order small combination, the maximum The instruction content of the stop order in which the payout is obtained is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, in such a case, the player can recognize the proper pressing order by understanding the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. On the other hand, information similar to the display content of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510 by a command or the like, so that the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510 that has received the command indicates It is possible to display an image indicating the “push order” on the image display body 500. A specific display example of the instruction function display will be described later in [11-3-4].

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, since the three reels 301a to 301c are used, the pushing order (reel 301 stop order) is “left-middle-right”, “left-right-”. There are six types: middle, middle-left-right, middle-right-left, right-left-middle, and right-middle-left. In the following description, the respective pressing orders are referred to as “forward pressing”, “clamping pressing”, “middle pressing”, “middle reverse pressing”, “reverse clamping pressing”, and “reverse pressing”, respectively. In addition to distinguishing the six pushing orders as described above, the first reel 301 to be stopped may be emphasized, and the three pushing orders may be distinguished. This is referred to as “left push” to stop at 1, “middle push” to stop the middle reel 301b first, and “right push” to stop the right reel 301c first.

  In the slot machine 1, such an instruction function display can be performed in a mode in which any display unit in the display panel 501 also functions (in this example, the special display LED 612 that displays a payout number is displayed. ) That is, with the special display LED 612, the instruction function display and the payout number display are performed. For example, by dividing each display period, it is possible to display both without confusion. In this embodiment, the payout number display function is also used. However, a display device having other functions may be used, or a display function display dedicated display may be provided.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when an error is detected as an abnormal state, the error lamp 604 is turned on to notify the occurrence of the error, while the special display LED 612 can identify the type of the error. It also has a function for displaying error information. The display timing of the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error information display will be described later in [11-3-5], [11-3-7], and the like.

[10. Slot machine internal configuration]
FIG. 48 schematically shows configurations of various mechanism elements, electronic devices, operation members, and the like that are installed in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main board 409 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game. On the main board 409, a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, and the like are mounted. The main board 409 has a function that influences a game result (acquisition of game value), specifically, for example, a lottery such as a winning combination, bonus, AT, etc., and a game state control and instruction based on the lottery result It manages the determination of instructions by function and the payout based on winning combinations.

  48, as an example of a configuration not shown in FIG. 48, a door open detection switch that detects the open state of the door-shaped front member 200, a storage release switch 209 (stored medal clearing switch), and a medal selector 207. And a stop button LED (stop button LED_1, stop button LED_2, stop button LED_3) that can be lit around each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, and the like. These configurations are controlled by the main board 409.

  The above-described single-load buttons 205 and 206, start lever 210, reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c, storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main board 409, and these operation buttons use sensors not shown. Thus, an operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main board 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-described symbol variation display device 300 (starting the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211b, 211c are operated, operation signals for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are output to the main board 409, respectively.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are referred to as a left reel 301a, a middle reel 301b, and a right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are referred to as a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b, and a right reel stop button 211c.

  The slot machine 1 accommodates other devices together with the main substrate 409, and various signals are input from these devices to the main substrate 409. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include a medal discharge device 110 and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, and right reel drive motor 341c). This reel drive motor is composed of a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be rotated and stopped independently. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously displayed from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401. Is displayed while changing.

  The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c have position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c for detecting a reference position related to the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. (Left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). By inputting detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 409, the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 207, the solenoid 207a and the insertion sensor 207b described above are installed. The insertion sensor 207 b detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a medal detection signal to the main board 409. When the solenoid 207a is OFF, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 207b in the medal selector 207 is locked out so that the medal insertion is not accepted, and even if the player inserts a medal, the medal selector 207 The medal flowing through the return basket 213 passes through the medal tray 201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, so that neither betting by medal insertion nor medal storage is performed.

  The medal releasing device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the payout medals one by one in the discharge port 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. Has been. The auxiliary storage box 111 for game medals is provided with a medal full sensor 111a. When the number of stored medals exceeds a predetermined number, a detection signal indicating that the number of medals exceeds the predetermined number is sent to the main board. Output to 409. At this time, the image display 500, the special display LED 612, the error lamp 604, etc. display an error display notifying the abnormality of the medal accumulation, so that the player, the hall employee, etc. are notified of the occurrence of the abnormality (see FIG. 86 described later). Equivalent to “Auxiliary storage full error” shown in

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main board 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal discharge device 110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341a, 341b, and 341c described above is output from the main board 409. The medal releasing device 110 receives a driving signal from the main board 409 according to the combination of symbols stopped on the active line, and the medal releasing device 110 performs a medal payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals necessary for payout is insufficient or there are no medals in the medal releasing device 110, the number detection by the payout sensor 110e is delayed. When a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, the payout sensor 110e outputs a payout medal abnormality signal to the main board 409, and in response to this, the main board 409 indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the medal payout. The notification content is displayed on the error lamp 604, special display LED 612, image display body 500, etc. to notify the player, hall employee, etc. that an abnormality has occurred (in the “payout medal empty error” shown in FIG. 86 described later). Equivalent). The main board 409 and various indicators (error lamp 604, start lamp 608, special display LED 612, stored number display LED 613, etc.) are connected by a harness, for example, and the main board 409 is connected to each of these indicators via corresponding ports. The lighting and display in can be operated.

  The slot machine 1 includes a sub board 510 as a peripheral board different from the main board 409. The sub board 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (Audio). Amplifier) 1126, sound source IC 1128, and the like are mounted. The sub board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409 and controls the display of the image display body 500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 and the operation of the speaker 512.

  Further, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game hall via the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200. Note that the connection configuration in FIG. 48 is merely an example in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. For example, as another connection configuration, not only the main board 409 but also a peripheral board other than the main board 409 (for example, the sub board 510) may be connectable to the external relay terminal board 131. Various signals can be transmitted from various boards connected to the relay terminal board 131 to the external relay terminal board 131 and output to the hall computer 1200 via the external relay terminal board 131. More specifically, various game information managed by the sub-board 510 and emergency information that can be managed by the sub-board 510 (for example, error information for notifying malfunctions and malfunctions of the components of the slot machine 1) are provided. The data can be output to the computer 1200.

  In addition, the power supply device 112 is attached with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1 and can be operated only when the door-shaped front member 200 is opened. Among them, the power switch 112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112u is for releasing an error that has occurred in the slot machine 1, and is also operated when changing the setting together with the setting key switch 112t. Note that these switches described above may be installed on the main board 409.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In a game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the bet number of medals is determined, the reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player rotates the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated, the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are controlled to stop, and when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the active line, and necessary. Accordingly, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is awarded.

  As described above, the reels 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, respectively (see FIG. 46). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 401 (the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line) of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. It is determined whether or not a combination mode (design combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on the aforementioned effective line 623 in the symbol display window 401.

  When the slot machine 1 has a plurality of effective lines, it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on each of the plurality of effective lines. As a result, when it is determined that a plurality of symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed, medals of a quantity that is the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each displayed winning combination are paid out. In the slot machine 1, a predetermined number (for example, 15) can be defined as the upper limit of the number of medals paid out per time. In such a case, if the sum of the number of payouts corresponding to each winning combination displayed on multiple active lines exceeds the upper limit, a predetermined number of medals will be paid out and the upper limit will be exceeded. Minutes are truncated. In addition, the excess of the upper limit value is not divided into the next and subsequent games and paid out.

  In the following, the case where the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one of the active lines is the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is called the winning combination symbol). It is said that the combination is complete or the winning symbol is complete.

  46, there are “7 symbols”, “BAR symbols”, “Cherry symbols”, “Watermelon symbols”, “Replay symbols”, “Bell symbols”, and “Bom symbols”. As described above, among these, “7 symbols” and “BAR symbols” are more conspicuous and easier to identify than other symbols. Here, the ease of identification refers to the level at which the player can easily identify the symbol including the reel being rotated and the reel being stopped. These symbols can be easily stopped while aiming so that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs a stop operation because of the color and size of the symbols even while the reel is rotating. (That is, it is easy to push). In particular, since only one “7 symbols” is arranged on each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, it is easy to press them.

  Each symbol attached to the reel strips 321a to 321c is basically a symbolic symbol by itself (it does not correspond to a winning combination with only one symbol), but a predetermined combination. Thus, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is obtained. That is, a predetermined game privilege is given. In the following, a combination of symbols allowed corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described. In the present embodiment, there is a symbol combination of “cherry role” as an exceptional symbol combination mode. Specifically, as long as the “cherry symbol” stops on the left reel 301a of the effective line 623, the symbol combination is “other”. Whatever the stop symbol of the reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) is determined as a symbol combination of cherry.

[10-1. Combination of winning roles and symbols]
Here, the winning combination (including what is called a winning combination) of the slot machine 1 and a combination of symbols corresponding thereto will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 50 and 51. FIG.

  FIG. 49 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery (internal lottery) of the winning combination in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. A lottery table (also referred to as a winning value determination table) shown in FIG. 49 is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. Although details will be described later, in the slot machine 1, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 performs a lottery for a winning combination, and such a lottery is also referred to as “internal lottery”. When a winning combination is won in the internal lottery, the operation of a condition device determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination (winning combination) is allowed. Therefore, in FIG. 49, “condition device” and “winning combination” may be read.

  Although details will be described later, the winning combination drawn in FIG. 49 includes a single combination and a simultaneous winning combination. A simultaneous winning combination is a combination of a single combination and a combination having the same name because a single combination is won at the same time. It may be treated as a “winner”. The same applies to the “condition device”.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram for explaining the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery table shown in FIG. The winning probability shown in FIG. 50 can be calculated by the ratio of the total of all the numbers and the number of each winning combination. For example, in FIG. 49, the total of all the numbers is different for each gaming state. Since the number of BB1 at normal time is 4800, the winning probability of BB1 at normal time in FIG. 50 is 1 / 13.65 (4800/65536). In addition, the winning probability of BB2 at the normal time in FIG. 50 is 1 / 20.48 (3200/65536). The winning probabilities of BB1 and BB2 are much higher than the BB winning probabilities (in many cases, about 1/200 to 1/500) in conventional general gaming machines.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining a symbol combination corresponding to each condition device (or winning combination). Note that the symbol combination shown in FIG. 51 is generally also referred to as a “combination”. 51 is a “look” configuration on any of the straight lines straddling the reels 301 a to 301 c displayed in the symbol display window 401. That is, in the case where the effective line 623 corresponds to all the straight lines as described in the first embodiment (effective lines 623a to 623e), the “right” appearance combination and the symbol combination on the effective line 623 are combined. However, if the effective line 623 does not completely match the straight line, the “right” appearance combination and the actual symbol combination in the effective line 623 may be different. Further, the symbol combination of FIG. 115 to be described later also has a “look” combination.

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as a procedure for a stop operation for stopping the reel 301, in a game in which a special push order is not taught, the left reel 301a is stopped first (ie, It is recommended to perform a stop operation on the reel stop button 211a first) “Left press (“ forward press ”or“ squeeze press ”)”. However, what kind of processing should be performed when a stop operation is not performed according to such a recommended procedure, that is, when a middle press or a right press is performed (for example, a measure that is disadvantageous for the player) Whether or not) can be set in any manner according to design specifications.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is allowed based on the fact that one or more combinations are won by the internal lottery. May be allowed. At this time, under the priority control (for example, “number priority control” or “symbol combination priority control”), the drawing pull-in control for stopping the reel 301 differs according to the pressing order of the reel stop button 211. When it is set to be executed, it is possible to change the mode of the stop appearance based on the pressing order, and as a result, it is possible to make a difference in the number of payouts.

  Here, the “number priority control” refers to a condition device that maximizes the number of payouts at the time of winning when a plurality of condition devices are allowed to operate. Is a pull-in control in which a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device is drawn on an effective line and stopped. In addition, “symbol combination priority control” gives priority to a condition device that maximizes the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed by “drawable symbols” when multiple condition devices are allowed to operate. In addition, it refers to pull-in control in which a symbol corresponding to the condition device is pulled onto the effective line and stopped.

  The symbols that can be drawn onto the active line when the reel 301 is stopped are limited based on the position of the reel 301 when the reel stop button 211 is stopped (specifically, for example, a maximum of four frames). Depending on the timing of this stop operation (pushing timing), symbols that can be drawn and symbols that cannot be drawn are generated. As a result, the mode of the stop appearance differs depending on the push timing, and the priority of the condition device corresponding to the push timing is also set in advance.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 allows the operation of a plurality of condition devices based on the winning combination of the internal lottery, and sets different priority control regarding the drawing pull-in control on the reel 301, thereby providing “appropriate pushing order”. When a game based on "" is performed, a privilege (for example, paying out a relatively large number of medals) that is more advantageous to the player than when a game based on "inappropriate pushing order" is performed can be given. It can be stopped at the stoppage.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1, for a combination that can change the degree of advantage of the granted privilege depending on the pressing order (so-called pressing order small combination), the game medium is paid out when the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped. For example, a push order may be used for a “replay role” to which a replay right is granted (so-called push order replay). Hereinafter, such push order replay will be briefly described. Strictly speaking, a replay combination is not a “pocket” because the gaming value is not paid out even if the corresponding symbol combination stops on the active line, but is included in the “push order small role” for convenience of explanation. ing. In addition, since the push order replay is one of the replay roles, any combination of the replay roles on the effective line will always be used regardless of the push order or the push position at the time of winning. Will be stopped and a replay privilege will be granted.

  When the push order replay is used in the slot machine 1, similar to the push order bell described above, a plurality of winning combinations for the push order replay are prepared according to the number of push orders, and each push order replay is selected at the time of the win. A combination of a plurality of condition devices that are allowed to operate is prepared. Then, by setting priority control that stops the “specific symbol combination” when a stop operation is performed in a “specific push order” for a combination of these multiple condition devices, A special replay combination that “a specific symbol combination can be displayed when a stop operation is performed in the order of pressing” can be realized, and the “specific symbol combination” appears in the symbol display window 401 It is possible to make the stop appearance in the characteristic aspect. Specifically, for example, when a predetermined pressing order replay is won, only when a stop operation is performed in a “specific pressing order” of reverse pressing, a “special” is displayed on a predetermined line in the symbol display window 401. It is possible to make it possible to stop a “specific symbol combination” in which “symbol matching” is displayed.

  As an example of a method of using such push order replay, when the above-mentioned “specific symbol combination” appears on a predetermined line in the symbol display window 401, a gaming privilege other than payout of gaming value may be obtained. It should be granted (the game value is not paid out because it is a replay role). The granting of the game privilege specifically includes, for example, transition to an advantageous game state, addition of the number of AT games / RT games, and the like. And in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when winning the push order replay and giving the above-mentioned game privilege, by instructing “a specific push order” based on the instruction function, A player can be notified of a gaming method that can stop the “combination”, and the gaming interest can be enhanced. If the above gaming benefits are not granted at the time of winning the push order replay, the stop operation is not performed in the “specific push order” (for example, a stop method other than the “specific push order” is instructed) Etc.) is preferable.

[10-1-1. Types of winning roles]
A lottery table used for determining a winning combination in the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. In the slot machine 1, different lottery tables are prepared according to the gaming state, and an internal lottery for selecting a winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations is performed using the lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state. In FIG. 49, regarding the winning combination selected in the internal lottery, “single role” in which one winning combination is selected alone and “simultaneous winning combination (including duplicate roles) in which two or more winning combinations are selected simultaneously. "Is shown. Specifically, for example, “Bell” is a single role in which only “Bell role” is elected alone, and “Bell + 1 role” is a simultaneous win in which “Bell role” and “Single role” are simultaneously elected. The winning role. Details will be described later in [10-1-2].

  First, the gaming state illustrated in FIG. 49 will be described.

  “Normal time” is a normal game state in which a bonus game is not being performed and the bonus flag is not established, and is also referred to as “normal state”, “normal game state”, “general game state”, and the like. The details can be calculated from the number of each winning combination and the number of payouts shown in FIG. 49, but in the “normal time”, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game media inserted per game (the payout rate) is 1. It does not exceed, that is, in theory, as the game is repeated, the player's hand medal decreases. The payout rate is “1” indicating that the handheld medal does not increase or decrease, “less than 1” indicates that the handheld medal decreases, and if “above”, the handheld medal increases. Indicates the state. Therefore, when judging only by the appearance rate without considering the expected transition to the advantageous state or the like, if the output rate is “above 1”, the game state is advantageous to the player, and the output rate is In the case of “less than 1”, the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player. Further, when the payout rate is “1”, there is no advantage / disadvantage to the player in terms of the number of hand-held medals, but the game state is disadvantageous for the player considering the time required for the game.

  However, “normally” is a game state that is disadvantageous for the player when only the play rate is seen, but considering the degree of expectation of transition to the advantageous game state (BB1 game, BB2 game), It can be said that it is an advantageous gaming state next to the advantageous gaming state. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 49, in the “normal time”, the allocation of the numbers to BB1 and BB2 is large as “4800” and “3200”, and the respective winning probabilities are also “1 / 13.8”. ”And“ 1 / 20.48 ”, which are set to be significantly higher than conventional general gaming machines (see FIG. 50). And when BB1 and BB2 are added together, the winning probability is as extremely high as “1 / 8.19”. Since the winning probability of BB1 and BB2 is very high in this way, “normal time” is a game state in which it is easy to shift to the advantageous game BB1 game or BB2 game. Even if it does not exceed, it can be considered as a gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In this embodiment, “1” is described as the reference value for the payout rate, but the reference value for the payout rate according to the present invention is not limited to “1”, and other predetermined values are used. Also good. However, it is preferable that the “predetermined value” as a criterion of the payout rate here is a value close to the boundary value of advantage / disadvantage for the player or the hall manager, and such “predetermined value” is used. Thus, if the ball-out rate exceeds the “predetermined value”, it is advantageous for the player (disadvantage on the hall side), and if the ball-out rate is below the “predetermined value”, it is disadvantageous for the player (on the hall side) Profit). Further, the “predetermined value” as a reference for the above-mentioned payout rate may be a different value depending on the setting of the gaming machine.

  In the lottery table of FIG. 49, “BB1”, “BB2”, “MB”, and “SB” are prepared as winning combinations in which a bonus flag is established by winning in the “normal time” by internal lottery. Here, “BB1” and “BB2” are the winning roles that act as triggers for the continuous action device for the first type special feature (so-called “BB”), and “MB” is the second special feature. This is a winning combination that triggers the operation of the accessory continuous operation device according to (so-called two types BB, CT), and “SB” is a winning combination that triggers the operation of the ordinary accessory. In addition, when the accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special combination is operating in response to the winning of BB1 or BB2, "Type BB (JAC)" is the operation trigger for the first type special combination. The winning role. Similarly, when the consecutive action device related to the second type special feature is activated in response to the MB winning, “Type 2 BB (JAC)” is the trigger for the second type special feature. The winning role.

  “Inside BB1” means that when a bonus combination (specifically, BB1) is won by an internal lottery and the bonus flag of BB1 is internally established until a bonus game (BB1 game) based on the bonus combination is made. The game state of the bonus internal state to be controlled, also called “BB1 internal state”. When the game state controlled at the start of the game (when the lever is ON) is “inside BB1”, the bonus flag of BB1 is internally established in the game before the game, and the game is bonus (BB1) This is a game in which the winning establishment status is carried over.

  “Inside BB2” means that when a bonus combination (specifically, BB2) is won by an internal lottery and the bonus flag of BB2 is internally established until the transition to the bonus game based on the bonus combination (BB2 game). The game state of the bonus internal state to be controlled, also referred to as “BB2 internal state”. When the game state controlled at the start of the game (when the lever is ON) is “inside BB2”, a bonus flag of BB2 is internally established in the game before the game, and the game is bonus (BB2) This is a game in which the winning establishment status is carried over.

  “BB1 in general” is a bonus that operates based on the winning of a bonus combination (specifically, BB1) by an internal lottery and the display of a symbol combination (symbol combination of BB1) corresponding to the bonus combination. Among the advantageous gaming states of the game (BB1 game), it is not during the bonus game in which the first type special character is operating (in the type BB) and the bonus flag is not established (in the type BB (JAC)) It is a gaming state controlled when not winning. This gaming state is also referred to as “BB1 general state”.

  “BB2 in general” is a bonus that operates based on the fact that a bonus combination (specifically, BB2) is won by an internal lottery and a symbol combination (symbol combination of BB2) corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed. Of the advantageous gaming states of the game (BB2 game), it is not during the bonus game in which the first type special character is operating (in the type BB) and the bonus flag is not established (in the type BB (JAC)) It is a gaming state controlled when not winning. This gaming state is also referred to as “BB2 general state”.

  In the present embodiment, “BB1” and “BB2” may be collectively referred to as “BB”. Similarly, “inside BB1” and “inside BB2” are collectively referred to as “inside BB1”, and “inside BB1 in general” and “in BB2 in general” are collectively referred to as “in BB in general”, “ The “BB1 game” and the “BB2 game” are collectively referred to as “BB game”.

  “Inside BB (JAC) inside”, a bonus flag for operating the first type special character in “BB1 general” or “BB2 general” is established in the advantageous game state by the BB game (one type This is a gaming state in which the winning state of the bonus is carried over without shifting to the bonus game (one kind of BB), although it has won the BB (JAC). This gaming state is also referred to as “a kind of BB internal state”.

  “Type BB Medium” wins the winning combination (type BB (JAC)) that triggers the operation of the first type special character by the internal lottery in the advantageous game state by the BB game, and corresponds to the winning combination This is a gaming state during a bonus game with a first-type special object that operates based on the symbol combination being displayed (JAC IN).

  In “MB inside”, a bonus combination (specifically, MB) is won by internal lottery, and the bonus winning establishment state is carried over without shifting to the bonus game (MB game) of the bonus combination. The game state in the bonus internal state, also referred to as “MB internal state”.

  “MB in general” is a bonus that operates based on winning of a bonus combination (specifically, MB) by an internal lottery and displaying a symbol combination (MB symbol combination) corresponding to the bonus combination. Among the gaming states of the game (MB game), it is not during the bonus game in which the second type special character is operating (during type 2 BB), and the bonus flag is not established (type 2 BB (JAC It is a gaming state controlled when not winning). This gaming state is also called “MB general state”.

  “Inside 2nd Class BB (JAC)” is a bonus flag for operating the 2nd Special Type in “MB General” in the MB game (winning 2nd Class BB (JAC)) In this gaming state, the bonus winning establishment state is carried over without shifting to the bonus game (type 2 BB). This gaming state is also referred to as “two-type BB internal state”.

  “Type 2 BB” is a winning combination (Type 2 BB (JAC)) that triggers the operation of the Type 2 special combination by an internal lottery during the MB game, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is This is a gaming state during the bonus game by the second type special character that operates based on the displayed (JAC IN). This bonus game is also called “two-type BB game” or “CT”.

  “In SB” is a single bonus that operates based on the winning of a bonus combination (specifically, SB) by an internal lottery and the display of a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination (SB symbol combination). This is a gaming state during a game (SB game). In addition, when SB is won by internal lottery, the symbol combination of SB is displayed in the corresponding selected game. Further, the SB game ends in one game.

  Note that the types and number of bonuses prepared in the slot machine 1 are not limited to the above combinations, and for example, the SB may not be provided. In addition, the BB1 game or the BB2 game may be an accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special accessory.

  Next, the types of winning combinations (condition devices) illustrated in FIG. 49 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the winning probability (or number) for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state, and is prepared in advance corresponding to each gaming state. An internal lottery is performed using the lottery table. Then, in the slot machine 1, when a winning combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and a symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the effective line, which will be described later. A reel stop process is performed. When any winning combination is indicated by the symbol combination displayed on the active line, medals are paid out based on the winning combination. In the medal payout based on the winning combination, the medal payout number may be set to be different depending on the game state and the number of medals to be played (specified number). At this time, it is preferable to separately prepare a lottery table corresponding to the specified number.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, since one condition device and a reel control pattern correspond one-to-one, when it is desired to prepare a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination. A plurality of conditions may be satisfied for one winning combination. By doing so, it is possible to prepare a plurality of patterns of stopping points (a combination of symbols displayed on the effective line) for one winning combination.

  The winning combination shown in FIG. 49 can be broadly divided into a bonus combination, a small combination, or a replay combination (re-playing combination). Here, “exclusion” is not strictly a winning combination. However, as in the case where the result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination is each winning combination shown in FIG. 49, when the result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination is “out of place”, based on the result ( In other words, since the subsequent internal processing is set (as if the winning combination of “out” is won), for the sake of convenience, “exclusion” may be included in the following description.

  To briefly explain each of them, the “bonus combination” is a combination that triggers the execution of the bonus game. Specifically, “BB1”, “BB2”, “MB”, and “SB” are bonus combinations. Equivalent to. As described above, “BB1” and “BB2” are the winning combinations that act as the triggers for the continuous action device for the first type special combination, and are internally won for “BB1” or “BB2”. By displaying the symbol combination, the accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special accessory operates (BB game is executed). In addition, “MB” is a winning combination that triggers the operation of the continuous action device for the second type special combination, and “MB” is an internal winning combination, and the corresponding symbol combination is displayed. The accessory continuous action device related to the seed special accessory is activated (MB game is executed). In addition, “SB” is a winning combination that triggers the operation of a normal actor, and the symbol combination of SB is always controlled to win in the winning game. Therefore, by winning “SB” internally, one game Single bonus in between.

  And in the slot machine 1, as the specifications of the gaming machine, the operation of the first type special character (in the first type BB), the second type special character (in the second type BB), and the operation of the normal character In a gaming state other than medium (in SB), the win probability of the small role does not change. For convenience, the re-gamer has a payout number of “0”, but since it is not a winning role in which a game medium is paid out by winning a prize, it is not strictly a small role and is excluded from the above-mentioned number specifications. The

  The “replay combination (replay combination)” is a combination that allows the next game to be executed without re-inserting medals. The symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination (for example, see FIG. 51) is displayed on the active line 623, so that the right to replay the next game is granted.

  In addition, even if the above-mentioned bonus combination and replay combination are displayed on the active line 623, the game medium is not paid out.

  The “small role” is a role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by the winning. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 49, “bell”, “cherry”, “watermelon”, “single-piece role”, “Double role” and “all roles (for CT)” correspond to small roles. Note that although not illustrated in FIG. 49, the small combinations that may have different payout numbers at the time of winning depending on the stop order (push order) or stop position (push position) of the reel 301 are collectively referred to as a small push order. In some cases, a small role that does not change the number of payouts at the time of winning depending on the pressing order or the pressing position is described as a push order unrestricted small role or a push position unrestricted small role. can do. Details of each winning combination will be described later.

  Further, “out” means that no winning combination is selected as a result of the internal lottery regarding the winning combination. In the case of “out of”, the symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is not stopped except when the established state of the bonus combination is carried over (that is, the bonus internal state). On the other hand, if the bonus internal state becomes “out of”, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination that has been established internally can be stopped.

  In the case of FIG. 49, the winning probabilities of each small role and replaying role in “inside BB1”, “inside BB2”, or “inside MB” corresponding to the bonus internal state are “normal” The numerical value is set so as not to change from “hour” (specifically, refer to FIG. 50 described later). In the case of FIG. 49, the player's hand-held medals are kept at a pace that is not different from the normal state in the bonus internal state based on winning of BB1, BB2, MB by performing such allocation of numbers. Is consumed. Further, in the case of FIG. 49, the player's hand-held medals are consumed at the same consumption pace as in the normal state even during the general MB. In the bonus internal state described above, a different number than the “normal time” may be set for each small role or replaying role, but in such a case, the consumption pace of handheld medals may change. .

  In addition, even if one of the winning combinations (bonus combination, replay combination, small combination) is won as a result of the internal lottery, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination executes the pull-in control described later. A stop operation (operation to push the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c) is performed at an appropriate timing (push position) aiming at stopping within the symbol display window 524 (more strictly, the effective line 623) as much as possible. Otherwise, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination may not be displayed on the active line (however, depending on the winning combination, special appropriate operations may not be performed due to arrangements, stop control, etc. In some cases, a combination of symbols corresponding to the effective line 623 is displayed). Therefore, as a result of the lottery, if a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the active line even though one of the winning combinations is won, as in the case where “out” is selected, it will be described later. In step S6 of FIG. 52, it is determined that the game result is lost. In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when the game result is lost despite winning a winning combination, the winning combination is not displayed at random. You may make it control so that the predetermined | prescribed symbol combination (stop appearance) which shows having won the winning based on a combination is displayed on a symbol display area. The symbol combination (stopping appearance) displayed at the time of the loss is hereinafter referred to as “zeroing (or zeroing)”.

  In addition, in the description related to the present embodiment, the expression “rose” (separated) may be used separately from the above “zero”. “Disjoint” is not a “uniform eye” that makes it easier for the player to recognize the characteristics of the stop appearance, but a stop appearance such as a combination of seemingly disjointed symbols (so-called “soaking eyes”). "Disseminated eyes"). That is, the “separated eyes” is one of the categories related to the display mode of the symbol combination, and even the separated eyes are not always lost, so that medals may be paid out.

[10-1-2. Winning form of winning role]
Among the winning combinations illustrated in FIG. 49, “BB1”, “BB2”, “SB”, “replay”, “Bell”, “Cherry”, “Watermelon”, “One-player”, “Two-player” “All roles (for CT)” and “Type 2 BB (JAC)” are single roles in which only one role is selected in one lottery opportunity. When the single combination is won, the subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the condition device based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1, among the winning combinations illustrated in FIG. 49, “MB + Cherry”, “Bell + 1 sheet combination”, “Bell + 2 sheet combination”, “Bell + 1 sheet combination + 2 sheet combination”, and “Type BB”. A simultaneous winning combination in which a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously selected, such as (JAC) +1 winning combination, may be prepared. Such a simultaneous winning means that a plurality of winning roles are selected at the same time in one lottery opportunity. For example, a plurality of small roles (“Bell” and “1” “Board”) may be selected at the same time, or a bonus role (“MB”) and a small role (“Cherry”) may be simultaneously selected, such as “MB + Cherry”.

  When the simultaneous winning combination is selected by the internal lottery, the subsequent reel stop control is performed based on the simultaneous operation of the condition devices based on the respective winning combinations included in the simultaneous winning combination. In the reel stop control when winning the simultaneous winning combination, a predetermined priority order (for example, a priority order such as “replay> pocket> bonus” or “replay> bonus> pocket”). Accordingly, the reel stop process is performed while the display of the winning combination symbol combination is allowed, and a bonus according to the winning combination is paid out. Depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the combination of small roles, or the setting method of the active line, control may be performed so that the simultaneous winning combination is won together. Awards are paid out according to the winning role. In any case, the small role is a “non-carry-over role” that can be won only in the winning game, and the winning status of the winning role that could not be won in the winning game will not be carried over after the next game. Even if the simultaneous winning of the winning combination is selected, the medal corresponding to the winning combination is not paid out to the winning combination that could not be won in the winning game.

  In addition, when a bonus combination and a small combination are won simultaneously, a combination selected in such a combination is also referred to as a duplicate combination. When a bonus combination and a small combination are simultaneously elected, the condition device corresponding to each winning combination is activated at the same time as in the case of the simultaneous winning of the small roles, and a predetermined priority order (for example, “ Reel stop processing is performed in accordance with the winning combination according to the winning combination symbol display according to the priority order (such as “Game> Small> Bonus” or “Replay> Bonus> Small”). Awards are paid out. However, for the bonus combination, even if the corresponding symbol combination is not displayed in the winning game as described above, the winning combination state of the bonus combination is carried over until the bonus combination is displayed after the next game. It can be a “carry-over”. Specifically, the bonus combination is a “carry-over combination”, and the replay combination or small combination is a “non-carry-over combination”. In this way, when a “carry-over combination” and a “non-carry-over combination” are simultaneously selected by winning a duplicate combination, which symbol combination is allowed to be displayed is controlled by the reel stop process. When the symbol combination corresponding to “carry-over combination” is not displayed in the winning game, the winning establishment state of “carry-over combination” is carried over after the next game. However, in such a “next game”, when winning another small role, both the “carry-over” and “other small role” will be in the winning state. Since they are selected at different lottery opportunities (games), they do not correspond to duplicate roles.

  Note that, in the case of simultaneous winning, it is determined based on the priority setting in the reel stop process which combination of symbols corresponding to which winning combination is to be displayed on the active line.

  Hereinafter, the winning combinations roughly classified as described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50 and FIG.

[10-1-3. Bonus role]
First, the bonus combination will be described in detail. When the bonus combination is selected as a winning combination by internal lottery, even if the corresponding symbol combination is displayed, the gaming medium is not paid out and the gaming state is shifted. Further, when the bonus combination is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed, the bonus internal state is controlled until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed. . A predetermined number of game media may be paid out when a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

  Here, it supplements about the transition timing of the game state accompanying the winning of a bonus combination. If a bonus combination is won in an internal lottery in the normal gaming state (normal time), the bonus flag of the bonus combination is internally established at the timing of winning the bonus combination, and the gaming state shifts to the bonus internal state. Then, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination stops on the active line in the game, the game state of the bonus game related to the bonus combination (for example, BB1 in general) is shifted, and the bonus game is started from the next game. Executed. If the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination does not stop on the active line in the game, the state in which the bonus flag is internally established is maintained (that is, controlled to the bonus internal state). The next game is played. When the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is stopped on the active line in the game started in the bonus internal state, the gaming state shifts to the gaming state of the bonus game (for example, BB1 in general), and the next game A bonus game is executed.

  That is, in the slot machine 1, the gaming state controlled in one game may be changed. In the above example, there are a case where a transition is made from the normal gaming state to the bonus internal state, and a case where the bonus internal state is shifted to the gaming state of the bonus game. However, in any case, a series of game progress within one game, such as the internal lottery of the winning combination, the reel stop control, and the provision of a privilege, is performed according to the game state controlled at the start of the game. In the description of the present invention, unless otherwise specified, the gaming state controlled at the start of the game is the gaming state of the game (for example, display of gaming state in FIGS. 54 and 55 described later). Also, “average number of stay games for each gaming state” shown in FIG. 56 to be described later indicates the average number of stay games based on the gaming state at the start of each game.

[10-1-3-1. BB1]
The winning combination “BB1” shown in FIG. 49 is a bonus combination related to the accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special combination (so-called type BB). When the bonus combination is selected as a winning combination, the corresponding condition device (BB1) is activated, a reel stop process is performed, and a privilege is granted based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a bonus game (BB1 game) based on BB1 is executed by displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device “BB1” (according to FIG. 51, “red 7”). This bonus game is a game in which a player has an opportunity to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games, and continues until the “end condition for the BB1 game” is satisfied. When the “end condition regarding the BB1 game” is satisfied, the gaming state shifts to a normal state (normal time). In the present embodiment, the bonus combinations “BB1” and “BB2” may not be a single combination but may be a double combination, or may be provided as a single combination and a double combination.

  Referring to FIG. 46, the symbol combination corresponding to “BB1” (the symbol alignment of “Red 7”) is not necessarily drawn on the effective line in all the reels 301a to 301c, depending on the timing of the stop operation with respect to the reel stop button 211. The array is not possible. However, “BB1” is a carry-over role that can carry over the winning flag, and even if the symbol matching “red 7”, which is the symbol combination corresponding to the winning game, is not displayed (not aligned), the next game or later Until the winning establishment state is carried over and the symbol combination is stopped, the game is played as a bonus internal state (inside BB1).

  When the bonus internal state is controlled, if a replay combination or small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order. Specifically, it is assumed that the priority is “replay (replay role)> small role> bonus”. At this time, even if the established state of BB1 is maintained as the bonus internal state, the symbol combination of BB1 is displayed. Opportunities that can be done are limited to cases where neither the replay role nor the small role is won in the internal lottery (that is, a loss).

  Next, the gaming state during the BB1 game will be described in detail. As described above with reference to FIG. 49, the gaming state in the BB1 game in the present embodiment includes a plurality of gaming states. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 49, the game state of “BB1 is in general” is controlled until a type BB (JAC) is won in the BB1 game, and if a type BB (JAC) is won, a type BB (JAC) Until the symbol combination corresponding to is displayed (until JAC IN), the game state is controlled to be “inside BB (JAC) inside”. After JAC IN, a bonus game based on the type BB is performed under the control of the gaming state of “in type BB”. The bonus game based on the type BB is ended when a prescribed end condition (specifically not shown) regarding the type BB is satisfied, and when the above-mentioned “end condition regarding the BB1 game” is not satisfied, “BB1 The game state is shifted to the “medium” game state.

  As a specific example of the “end condition regarding the BB1 game”, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the total payout number (specified upper limit number) of game media paid out during the BB1 game reaches 280. To do. The “end condition regarding the BB1 game” may be a condition other than the above example, for example, when the number of games in the BB1 game reaches a prescribed upper limit number (for example, 30 games). The number of times of the kind BB bonus game executed in the BB1 game (number of times of JAC IN) may reach a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 3 times).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the distribution of the winning combination and the winning rate in each gaming state included in the BB1 game (in general in BB1, inside one type BB (JAC), inside one type BB), etc. Each feature will be described.

  In “BB1 in general”, there is no replay distribution compared to “normal time”, while a set number is set to “one kind of BB (JAC) +1 combination”. Since the winning probability of “one kind of BB (JAC) +1 player” is relatively high (1 / 3.28), the game state of “BB1 in general” is changed to another game state relatively early (about 4 games). However, since the stop of the symbol combination of “one-piece combination”, which is one of the simultaneous winning combinations, is preferentially controlled, there is no direct transition from “in general BB1” to “in type BB” It goes through “A kind of BB (JAC) inside”. In the present embodiment, the winning combination of “one type BB (JAC)” does not necessarily have to be a double combination like “one type BB (JAC) +1 combination”, and may be a single combination. Moreover, both a single combination and a double combination may be prepared.

  “One kind of BB (JAC) inside” is “Bell + 1 winning combination” (winning probability 1 / 113.11) and “Bell + 2 winning combination” (winning probability 1 / 1131.07). Since it is 13 instead of 1 or 2 in other game states, the payout rate is greatly increased, and “kind inside BB (JAC)” is a game state in which the payout rate exceeds 1. . Furthermore, in “inside BB (JAC) inside”, the number of replays set is set higher than usual so that the appearance ratio of replays is increased, so that the game state in which the play rate exceeds 1 The number of staying games can be extended. Speaking of the winning probability, it is 1 / 7.30 in normal times, but it is significantly increased to 1 / 1.31 inside the kind BB (JAC). In addition, the probability of selecting “losing” as a transition condition from “inside one type BB (JAC)” to “in one type BB” is 1 / 29.35, which is a value that can be actually won. It can be assumed that JAC IN is performed after staying for about 30 games on average.

  In “one kind of BB”, as shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, “cherry” for paying out 2 sheets, “watermelon” for paying out 4 sheets, “bell + 1 sheet combination + 2 sheet combination” for paying out 13 sheets, and “ "Lost" is set as the main winning combination by internal lottery, and the winning probability of "Bell + 1 + Double +" is expected to be the most among all winning combinations excluding lost By setting it high (1 / 6.55), a game state with a payout rate exceeding 1 is achieved.

  In this way, in the BB1 game shown in FIG. 49, at least “inside the kind of BB (JAC)” and “in the kind of BB” are controlled so that the payout rate is greater than 1, and during the BB1 game The ratio of staying in these gaming states is considerably higher than the ratio of staying in “BB1 in general”. That is, the gaming state throughout the BB1 game can be said to be a gaming state that is advantageous to a player with a payout rate greater than one.

[10-1-3-3. BB2]
The winning combination “BB2” shown in FIG. 49 is a bonus combination relating to the accessory continuous operation device related to the first type special combination (so-called type BB). When the bonus combination is selected as a winning combination, the corresponding condition device (BB2) is activated, a reel stop process is performed, and a privilege is granted based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a bonus combination based on BB2 (BB2 game) is displayed by displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device “BB2” (according to FIG. 51, the symbol arrangement of “Red 7-Red 7-BAR”). Is executed. This bonus game is a game in which a player has an opportunity to concentrate and acquire medals over a plurality of games, and continues until the “end condition for the BB2 game” is satisfied. When the “end condition regarding the BB2 game” is established, the gaming state shifts to a normal state (normal time). In the present embodiment, only the end conditions are different between the BB1 game and the BB2 game.

  Referring to FIG. 46, the symbol combination corresponding to “BB2” (the symbol alignment of “red 7-red 7-BAR”) depends on the timing of the stop operation on the reel stop button 211 in the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c. However, the arrangement cannot always be drawn on the effective line. However, “BB2” is a carry-over role that can carry over the winning flag, and the symbol combination “red 7-red 7-BAR”, which is the symbol combination corresponding to the winning game, is not displayed (not aligned). In addition, the game is played as a bonus internal state (inside BB2) until the winning establishment state is carried over after the next game and the symbol combination is stopped.

  When the bonus internal state is controlled, if a replay combination or small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order. Specifically, the priority is “replay (replay combination)> small combination> bonus”. At this time, even if the establishment state of BB2 is maintained as the bonus internal state, the symbol combination of BB2 is displayed. Opportunities that can be done are limited to cases where neither the replay role nor the small role is won in the internal lottery (that is, out of play).

  Next, the gaming state during the BB2 game will be described in detail. As described above with reference to FIG. 49, the gaming state during the BB2 game in the present embodiment includes a plurality of gaming states. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 49, the game state of “BB2 is in general” is controlled until a type BB (JAC) is won in the BB2 game, and when a type BB (JAC) is won, a type BB (JAC) Until the symbol combination corresponding to is displayed (until JAC IN), the game state is controlled to be “inside BB (JAC) inside”. After JAC IN, a bonus game based on the type BB is performed under the control of the gaming state of “in type BB”. The bonus game by the type BB is ended when a predetermined end condition (specifically not shown) regarding the type BB is satisfied, and when the above-mentioned “end condition regarding the BB2 game” is not satisfied, “BB2 The game state is shifted to the “medium” game state.

  Further, as a specific example of the “end condition regarding the BB2 game”, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the total payout number (specified upper limit number) of game media paid out during the BB2 game reaches 110. To do. It should be noted that the “end condition regarding the BB2 game” may be a condition other than the above example, as in the case of the “end condition regarding the BB1 game”.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, the distribution of the winning combination and the payout rate etc. in each gaming state included in the BB2 game (in general in BB2, in one type BB (JAC), in one type BB), etc. Each feature will be described.

  In “BB2 in general”, there is no replay distribution compared to “normal time”, while a “number of BB (JAC) +1 combination” is set. Since the winning probability of “one kind of BB (JAC) +1 player” is relatively high (1 / 3.28), the game state of “BB2 in general” becomes another game state relatively early (about 4 games). However, it is not possible to shift directly from “BB2 general” to “one kind of BB” by preferentially controlling the stop of the symbol combination of “one-piece combination” which is one of the simultaneous winning combinations. It goes through “A kind of BB (JAC) inside”. In the present embodiment, the winning combination of “one type BB (JAC)” does not necessarily have to be a double combination like “one type BB (JAC) +1 combination”, and may be a single combination. Moreover, both a single combination and a double combination may be prepared.

  “One kind of BB (JAC) inside” is “Bell + 1 winning combination” (winning probability 1 / 113.11) and “Bell + 2 winning combination” (winning probability 1 / 1131.07). Since it is 13 instead of 1 or 2 in other game states, the payout rate is greatly increased, and “kind inside BB (JAC)” is a game state in which the payout rate exceeds 1. . Furthermore, in “inside BB (JAC) inside”, the number of replays set is set higher than usual so that the appearance ratio of replays is increased, so that the game state in which the play rate exceeds 1 The number of staying games can be extended. Speaking of the winning probability, it is 1 / 7.30 in normal times, but it is significantly increased to 1 / 1.31 inside the kind BB (JAC). In addition, the probability of selecting “losing” as a transition condition from “inside one type BB (JAC)” to “in one type BB” is 1 / 29.35, which is a value that can be actually won. It can be assumed that JAC IN is performed after staying for about 30 games on average.

  In “one kind of BB”, as shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, “cherry” for paying out 2 sheets, “watermelon” for paying out 4 sheets, “bell + 1 sheet combination + 2 sheet combination” for paying out 13 sheets, and “ "Lost" is set as the main winning combination by internal lottery, and the winning probability of "Bell + 1 + Double +" is expected to be the most among all winning combinations excluding lost By setting it high (1 / 6.55), a game state with a payout rate exceeding 1 is achieved.

  In this way, in the BB2 game shown in FIG. 49, at least “inside the kind of BB (JAC)” and “in the kind of BB” are controlled so that the payout rate is greater than 1, and during the BB2 game, The rate of staying in these gaming states is considerably higher than the rate of staying in “BB2 general”. In other words, the gaming state throughout the BB2 game can be said to be a gaming state advantageous to a player having a payout rate greater than one.

[10-1-3-3. MB]
The winning combination “MB + Cherry” shown in FIG. 49 is a simultaneous winning combination of “MB” as a bonus combination and “Cherry” as a small combination. Among these, “MB” is a bonus combination relating to the accessory continuous operation device related to the second type special combination (so-called type II BB). When the bonus combination is selected as a winning combination, the corresponding condition device (MB) is activated, a reel stop process is performed, and a privilege is given based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a bonus game based on MB (MB) is displayed by displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device “MB” (according to FIG. 51, the symbol alignment of “Replay”-“Replay”-“Bom”). Game) is executed. The MB bonus game continues until the “end condition regarding the MB game” is satisfied, but in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the overall payout rate does not exceed at least 1. When the “end condition regarding the MB game” is satisfied, the gaming state shifts to a normal state (normal time).

  In the present embodiment, the operation of the condition device “MB” is permitted when “MB + Cherry” wins in the internal lottery. However, in the winning game, the condition based on the winning of “Cherry” constituting the simultaneous winning combination The operation of the device “Cherry” is prioritized. More specifically, the display of the symbol combination “cherry” has priority over the display of the symbol combination “MB”. Then, when the reel stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbol combination of “cherry” can be drawn onto the effective line, the symbol combination of “cherry” is stopped by the operation of the condition device “cherry”. The symbol combination corresponding to “MB” is not displayed and the bonus internal state “MB inside” is shifted to. On the other hand, when the reel stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbol combination “cherry” cannot be drawn on the effective line, the operation of the condition device “MB” is permitted. According to FIGS. 46 and 51, the symbol combination “MB” can be drawn on the effective line regardless of the stop timing of the reel. In such a case, the symbol combination “MB” is displayed and “MB general medium” is displayed. ”. In the present embodiment, the winning combination simultaneously with “MB” is not limited to the small role “Cherry”, and may be, for example, another small role or a replay role.

  When the bonus internal state is controlled, if a replay combination or small combination is won as a result of the internal lottery, a winning combination that can be displayed is determined according to a predetermined priority order. Specifically, it is assumed that the priority is “replay (replay role)> small role> bonus”, and at this time, the MB symbol combination is displayed even if the MB internal state is maintained as the bonus internal state. Opportunities that can be done are limited to cases where neither the replay role nor the small role is won in the internal lottery (that is, out of play).

  Referring to FIG. 46, the symbol combination corresponding to “MB” (“Replay” — “Replay” — “Bomb”) is the timing of the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 in all the reels 301a to 301c. Regardless of the arrangement, the arrangement can always be drawn on the active line. Therefore, when a replay combination or small combination is not won in the internal lottery “MB inside” (that is, in the case of a loss), the symbol combination corresponding to “MB” is always displayed in the game.

  Next, the gaming state during the MB game will be described in detail. As described above with reference to FIG. 49, the gaming state in the MB game in the present embodiment includes a plurality of gaming states. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 49, the game state of “MB general” is controlled until the two-type BB (JAC) is won during the MB game, and the two-type BB is selected when the two-type BB (JAC) is won. Until the symbol combination corresponding to (JAC) is displayed (until JAC IN is performed), the game state is controlled to be “inside of type 2 BB (JAC)”. After the JAC IN, the bonus game with the two-type BB is performed under the control of the game state “in the second-type BB”. The bonus game based on the type 2 BB ends when a prescribed end condition (specifically not shown) related to the type 2 BB is satisfied, and the above-mentioned “end condition regarding the MB game” is not satisfied. The gaming state is shifted to “MB general”.

  As a specific example of the “end condition regarding the MB game”, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the total payout number (specified upper limit number) of game media paid out during the MB game reaches 253, Alternatively, SB is won by internal lottery (SB game is activated). The SB game will be described later. Note that the “end condition regarding the MB game” may be a condition other than the above example.

  Here, see FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 for the distribution of the winning combination and the winning rate in each gaming state included in the MB game (inside MB general, inside type 2 BB (JAC), type 2 BB) Each feature will be explained.

  In “MB general”, there is no distribution to “BB1”, “BB2”, and “MB + Cherry” compared to “normal time”, and the assigned numbers are “two types BB (JAC)” All of the items other than the distribution of “1” to “” are turned to “out”. Specifically, the probability of a loss is 1 / 1.52, which is a very high probability. In the case of FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, since the winning probability and the number of payouts of the small roles that can be expected for paying out the game media are not different from the normal time, the payout rate in “MB general medium” is low at least not exceeding 1. Suppressed to a standard.

  “Type 2 BB (JAC) inside” is a gaming state that may be shifted to “MB type in general” by winning “Type 2 BB (JAC)”, but the winning probability is 1/65536. 49, when using the lottery table of FIG. 49, it is extremely rare to shift to “inside the two-type BB (JAC)” in the MB game, and most of the MB games stay in the MB general. proceed.

  However, if “Two BB (JAC)” can be won by overcoming the extremely low winning probability mentioned above, “Two BB (JAC) inside” means that BB1 and BB2 games have “One BB (JAC) inside” As in the case of the control of “medium”, the payout in the case of winning “Bell + 1 winning combination” (winning probability 1 / 113.11) and “Bell + 2 winning combination” (winning probability 1 / 1131.07) is 13 Since it increases to the number of sheets, it is possible to temporarily increase the payout rate. As a result, in an MB game in which the overall payout rate does not exceed 1, it is expected that the MB game end condition will be reached early, which gives the player the opportunity to shorten the disadvantageous MB game stay period. It is done.

  In the case of “inside the two types BB (JAC)”, the probability of winning out of winning is high (winning probability 1 / 1.52). At this time, the symbol combination corresponding to the two types BB (according to FIG. 51). When “red 7”-“BAR”-“red 7” symbol alignment) is displayed, it becomes “JAC IN” and shifts to “during type 2 BB” where the payout rate does not exceed 1. In this embodiment, winning of “Type 2 BB (JAC)” can also be treated as an extremely rare premiere. In such a case, “Inside Type 2 BB (JAC)” to “In Type 2 BB” The player may be taught a special game method for suppressing the transition to the game. That is, when the internal lottery of “2nd class BB (JAC) inside” is lost, the symbol combination corresponding to 2nd class BB (“red 7”-“BAR”-“red 7” according to FIG. 51). The player may be instructed to stop the reel at a stop timing such that the symbols are not retracted. Specifically, for example, the right reel 301c is taught to stop at a stop timing that avoids “red 7 symbol (sequence number 20)”.

  In “Type 2 BB”, as shown in FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, only “SB” that is a single bonus combination or “All types (in CT)” that is exclusive type 2 BB bonus is an internal lottery. It is a role that can be won and there is no loss. Among these, “SB” will be described later, and “all roles (during CT)” is a small role that always wins even if the reel 301 is stopped at any stop timing. When the lottery table of FIG. 49 is used, the number of game media payouts associated with the winning of “all roles (during CT)” is 2, so it is less than 3 of the input numbers and the payout rate does not exceed 1. . However, the number of payouts is an example, and may be less than 2 (1) or more than 2 (for example, 13).

  In this way, in the MB game shown in FIG. 49, most of the stay game is “MB general” and the appearance rate of “MB general” does not exceed at least 1. As a result, the game disadvantageous for the player is continued until the “MB game end condition” is satisfied. In other words, the MB game in the present embodiment is a bonus game that is controlled so that it is difficult to acquire more game media than the number of bonus games of the MB game. That is, when the winning combination is selected in the internal lottery according to the lottery probability shown in FIG. 50, the player's hand medal is controlled so as not to increase before and after the MB game. Note that such features of the MB game are the same in other embodiments.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state controlled during the game period from the time of winning the MB until the end of the MB game is set to include a game state in which the payout rate does not exceed 1. This realizes a game period that suppresses the payout rate through all game states. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary that the payout rate is suppressed to a low level (for example, not exceeding 1) in “MB general medium” and the whole MB game. JAC) “inside” and “in type 2 BB” may be at a high level (for example, 1 or more).

[10-1-3-4. SB]
The winning combination “SB” shown in FIG. 49 is a bonus combination related to a normal combination. When the bonus combination is selected as a winning combination, the corresponding condition device (SB) is activated, a reel stop process is performed, and a privilege is granted based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, a bonus game (SB game) based on the SB is executed by displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device “SB” (according to FIG. 51, the symbol combination of “BAR”). In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the symbol combination corresponding to “SB” is always displayed in the game won in the winning combination “SB”. In order to realize such display, for example, a symbol combination corresponding to “SB” is prepared in addition to the symbol combination illustrated in FIG. 51 (a symbol set of “BAR”) (for example, “BAR” − “ BAR "-" Bom "may be aligned).

  This SB game is a bonus game that is performed while being controlled to the “SB in progress” gaming state for only one game, and is controlled to the “normal” gaming state after the SB game is over. Therefore, when “SB” is won during the above-mentioned MB game (assuming that the symbol combination of “SB” is displayed in the same game), the MB game will be ended when the “SB game” is activated. Therefore, the situation is advantageous to the player in that it is possible to escape from the MB game positioned as a disadvantageous game period. According to FIG. 49, the “SB” lottery table is also assigned to the “SB” lottery table. However, if “SB” is won during the SB game, the SB game is also played in the next game. Executed.

[10-1-4. Re-playing role (replay)]
Next, replay which is a regame player will be described. The winning combination “replay” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination of replay (replaying combination). At the time of winning the replay role, a replay condition device (replay) is activated, and a stop display of a symbol combination corresponding to the replay role is allowed on any of the active lines 623. Based on this, a reel stop process (described later) Step S5) of FIG. 52 is performed. In the slot machine 1, when the replay is won, it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is always displayed on the active line, so that it is determined that the symbol combination of the replay is complete. Then, in the next game, a bet is made again without inserting a medal or a betting operation (an operation for inserting a stored medal), and a replay in which a game similar to the previous game is executed again is possible. Even if the replay symbol combination is displayed on the active line, a medal as a prize is not paid out.

  A feature of the game privilege of this replay game is that it is not necessary to spend a new medal (add a new medal) in the next game instead of not paying out a medal. In addition, since replay is a winning combination that does not involve paying out medals, even if the winning frequency is increased by increasing the winning probability, for example, there is little penalty for the hole. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state, the probability of winning about 1 in 7 times is assumed. As a result, the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) can be kept within a certain range to some extent. In other words, the winning role of replay can be given a role of suppressing excessive medal consumption in the game progression.

  In addition, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are uniformly arranged on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c (for example, the symbols constituting the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay combination are also used for the replay combination. By changing the number of other symbols (the symbols not constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role) arranged between the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to one to a maximum of four), It is possible to make it possible to align the pattern combination corresponding to the replay combination without the need for pressing. In such a case, if the priority order of the winning combination displayed is “replay (replay role)> small role> bonus”, the replay role condition device and other roles (small role and bonus role) Even if the condition device is activated at the same time, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is always stopped and displayed, and the symbol combinations corresponding to other combinations are not stopped and displayed.

[10-1-5. Small role]
Next, the small role will be described in detail. When a small combination is selected as a winning combination by internal lottery, the corresponding condition device is allowed to operate. When the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed by the reel 301 stop process, it is determined that the small combination is “winned”, and a predetermined number of game media are provided as a bonus by the winning. Paid out. Because of these characteristics, the small combination is also called a winning combination. Below, each small part is demonstrated individually.

[10-1-5-1. Bell role]
The winning combination “BELL” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals when winning. When “BELL” is selected as the winning combination, the corresponding condition device (BELL) is activated, a reel stop process is performed, and a privilege is granted based on the displayed symbol combination. Specifically, by displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device “bell” (according to FIG. 51, “bell” symbol alignment), it is determined that the winning of the bell role is won, and 13 game media are paid out. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the bell role as a single role, the bell role included in the simultaneous winning roles such as “bell + 1 sheet role”, “bell + 2 sheet role”, and “bell + 1 sheet role + 2 sheet role”. Is also available. When these simultaneous winning combinations are selected, the operation of the condition device corresponding to each winning combination is controlled based on a predetermined priority order, and the bonus is based on the symbol combination displayed through the reel stop process. Is granted. For example, in the case of “bell + 1 sheet combination”, in principle, the condition device of 1 sheet combination is preferentially operated so that the symbol combination of 1 sheet combination is stopped, and 1 game medium is paid out. The However, when it is controlled to “inside BB (JAC) inside” and “inside BB (JAC)”, the bell combination condition device is activated by preferentially operating the conditional device of the bell role. Stops and 13 game media are paid out. The same applies to the case of “Bell + 2 sheets”. Further, in the case of “Bell + 1 combination + 2 combination”, the condition device for the bell combination is always operated with priority, so that it is possible to expect 13 payouts associated with winning the bell combination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the above-described bell role is prepared. However, when the slot machine 1 is provided with a function such as AT or ART, the payout is made according to the pushing order or pushing position of the reel 301. A bell combination may be used as a push order small combination / push position small combination whose number can be changed. The push order small combination and the push position small combination are not limited to the bell combination but may be other small combinations. Details will be omitted, but in such a case, by preparing multiple types of condition devices that change the priority control of the display of the symbol combination depending on the pressing order and pressing position, display after reel stop processing depending on the pressing order and pressing position The number of game media to be paid out can be changed by changing the combination of symbols to be played. In the case of a push order small combination, a specific push order that can be expected for paying out the maximum number of game media is referred to as an “appropriate push order”, and a push order that is not so is called an “unsuitable push order”.

[10-1-5-2. Cherry role]
The winning combination “Cherry” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (two) when winning. In the present embodiment, “MB + Cherry” as a simultaneous winning combination is prepared in addition to “Cherry” as a single combination. As described above in “MB”, when “MB + cherry” is won, the operation of the conditional device “cherry” is prioritized over the conditional device “MB”.

  However, referring to the symbol combination in FIG. 51, the symbol combination indicating the winning of the “cherry” role is a pattern of “cherry”-“arbitrary”-“arbitrary” in which the “cherry” symbol stops on the left reel 301a. Referring to the arrangement of FIG. 46, only two cherry symbols are arranged on the left reel 301a, and depending on the stop timing of the left reel 301a, it may not be drawn on the active line. Therefore, even if “Cherry” is selected as a winning combination, two game media are not necessarily paid out due to winning the “Cherry” role, and the zero of Cherry is displayed and the game is displayed. In some cases, the media is not paid out.

[10-1-5-3. Watermelon role]
The winning combination “Watermelon” shown in FIG. 49 is a winning combination that can be expected to pay out medals (four) at the time of winning. In the present embodiment, “watermelon” is a single role, and when a symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is displayed (according to FIG. 51, the pattern of “watermelon”), it is determined that the watermelon role has been won and four pieces are received. Game media is paid out. Referring to the arrangement of FIG. 46, the “watermelon” symbol is not arranged so that it can always be drawn on the effective line in any of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c. Therefore, even if “watermelon” is selected as the winning combination, depending on the stop timing of the reel 301, the “watermelon” symbol may not be drawn and may be eliminated.

[10-1-5-4. Other small roles]
As shown in FIG. 49, in the present embodiment, “1 sheet combination”, “2 sheet combination”, “all combinations (for CT)” and the like are prepared as other small combinations. Like the winning combination, the operation of the condition device corresponding to the winning is permitted, and the game medium is paid out based on the symbol combination displayed through the reel stop process, and detailed description thereof is omitted. The symbol combinations corresponding to each small role are as illustrated in FIG.

[10-1-6. Summary of winning roles]
The above is a combination mode of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and a symbol corresponding to each winning combination. Note that these are merely examples, and winning combinations and condition devices not shown in FIG. 49 may be prepared, and the types of winning combinations can be further increased or decreased. The same applies to symbols, and various symbols and symbol combinations can be set. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not necessarily provided all, and a necessary type of winning combination may be selected as appropriate.

  For example, a duplicate winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination (or replay combination) may be set. Which combination of symbols is preferentially displayed on the active line when such a winning combination is won is controlled by a reel stop process.

  Also, for example, for rare roles (cherry, watermelon, etc.) with a relatively low winning probability, you can prepare multiple types of small roles such as “strong” and “weak” with different benefits at the time of winning, Prepare a small role with a different payout number depending on the pressing position, or a special replay role that changes the game state (RT state) when winning or when a specific symbol combination based on the winning is displayed Or you may.

  Further, a push position small combination may be prepared instead of a push order small combination prepared for an AT game or the like. Although a detailed description is omitted, the push position small combination means when the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed at an appropriate stop timing (press position) and when it is performed at an inappropriate stop timing. It is a small role that shows different winning modes. When such a push position small role is installed, in the AT game or the like, the winning position of the push position small role is won by making a teaching or announcement so that the player can easily recognize the proper push position. Sometimes, a player can easily win a winning combination, and many medals can be obtained.

  In addition, the player of the slot machine 1 cannot know the winning combination selected by the internal lottery based on the lottery probability of the winning combination, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination and the number of payouts, and the arrangement of the symbols. In some cases, it is possible to find a gaming method in which the maximum payout can be expected. Hereinafter, such a game method is temporarily referred to as “maximum efficiency hitting method”. When playing a game with maximum efficiency, depending on the stop position of the reel, it is difficult to draw the combination of symbols with the most payouts corresponding to the winning combination on the effective line (watermelon role, cherry role) , Chances of winning, etc.) were stopped by pressing one of the reel stop buttons 211 at a specific timing so as to achieve the maximum payout in consideration of the winning probability and the number of payouts. By pressing the remaining reel stop button 211 at an appropriate timing according to the symbol form, a symbol combination corresponding to a plurality of types of winning combinations can be drawn and a large number of payouts are obtained. In other words, the maximum-efficiency hitting method can be said to be a gaming method that suppresses the missed winning combination as much as possible.

[11. Game processing]
Next, the flow of game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with a processing procedure on a control program executed on the main board 409 (mainly CPU 1110 or the like).

  FIG. 52 shows one processing procedure for one basic game in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, initial setting for preparing for the game start is executed. Especially when starting up the power supply, etc., check the connection and operation status of the various devices described above, check the existence of backup data, and if backup data exists, restore the state before the power was turned off. Execute. When backup data does not exist, a predetermined process such as setting a predetermined initial value is executed.

  In the next step S2, the number of bets is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or the single insertion button 205). Thus, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the number of bets for one game is determined and the BET process is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. Note that when the slot machine 1 is a three-sheet dedicated machine that can execute a game by inserting three medals, the one-sheet insertion button 205 may not be provided.

  In step S3, the game is started by operating the start lever 210 which has been in an operation waiting state in step S2, and an internal lottery process is performed to determine whether or not any winning combination is a result of the internal lottery. Run. This internal lottery process is either in the stage before all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c that start rotating in the subsequent step S4 are in a stopped state (stopped by a player's stop operation). This is executed to determine whether the winning combination is to be the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the active line. It is allowed to stop.

  Next, in step S31, an instruction function process is performed as a process related to an “instruction function” that teaches a predetermined operation method to the player by controlling display contents on the special display LED 612. In the instruction function processing of this example, the main board 409 manages all the central control related to the display of the instruction function. On the other hand, auxiliary control related to instruction function processing (such as navigation display on the image display body 500) may be managed by the sub-board 510. Even in such a case, the sub-board 510 may be managed by the image display body 500 or the like. The display content of the navigation display to be displayed on is limited to that according to the determination result of the instruction function by the main board 409 (content not different from the instruction function display). In the slot machine 1, the instruction content by the instruction function (which may be read as the display contents of the instruction function display) is determined by the main board 409 based on the winning combination in the game. Further, the display contents of the instruction function display controlled by the main board 409 and displayed on the special display LED 612 and the display contents of the navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 and displayed on the image display body 500 and the like are a pair. It is not limited to one correspondence relationship, and may be a one-to-n correspondence relationship (plural patterns). That is, when some instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612 by the main board 409, the sub board 510 performs navigation display in a display mode corresponding to the instruction function display for the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like. The specific display mode of the navigation display need not be limited to one type, and the navigation display may be performed in any one of a plurality of display modes corresponding to the instruction function display. Good. In such a case, the sub-board 510 may determine which display mode is used for navigation display, or the main board 409 may specify. Further, the slot machine 1 is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the main board 409 may perform all processing related to instruction function processing.

  In this example, the contents of the instruction function process in step S31 are determined based on the result of the internal lottery process in step S3, but the process ends before the reel rotation process in step S4 is started. It is preferable to do.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process for starting rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is executed with the end of the internal lottery process in step S3. In this reel rotation process, when all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, the depressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are validated. An operation valid lamp (not shown) for notifying that is turned on, and a timer count is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation valid lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c.

  In step S5, a reel stop process in which the player presses the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, the operation valid lamps are turned off in the order of acceptance, and rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is stopped. Execute.

  In the next step S6, when it is determined in step S5 that all the lines 301a to 301c are in a stopped state, the winning combination symbols are aligned on the “active line” (the symbol corresponding to any winning combination). Based on whether the combination mode is displayed), a determination process for determining the winning combination is executed. Specifically, by collating “display content displayed on the effective line (pattern combination mode)” and “symbol combination allowed to stop on the effective line corresponding to the winning combination” Judge the winning role. In addition, the determination process in step S6 may be determined based only on “display contents displayed on the effective line (design combination)”. As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the five effective lines 623a to 623e are the effective lines (see FIG. 47).

  In step S7, a medal payout process based on the content of the gaming privilege corresponding to the winning combination determined in step 6 is executed. If the winning combination determined in step S6 is a winning combination that involves a change in the gaming state such as BB1 or BB2, etc., the game state is changed (the gaming state is changed as shown in FIG. 49) or replayed. Giving various game benefits by games or the like.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process) to step S4 (reel rotation process) are internal processes triggered by a series of external operations (starting operations) performed by the player. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S31, step S4) are collectively referred to as a start process. Hereinafter, this starting process will be described in detail.

[11-1. Start processing]
FIG. 53 specifically shows each process performed in the starting process.

  In the starting process, first, in step S101, the operation of the medal insertion or one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or a medal insertion, the determination at step S101 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S102. This determination is made by inserting medals corresponding to a MAX bet (that is, three or more medals are inserted in the case of a specified number of three games, and two or more medals are inserted in the case of a two specified number of games). It is assumed that it is satisfied only when there is an operation of the one-sheet insertion button 205 or the MAX insertion button 206 that becomes a MAX bet.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined and the effective line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, for example, when three medals are inserted when the specified number is 3, five lines (middle line 623a, upper line 623b, The lower line 623c, the right rising line 623d, and the right lowering line 623e) become effective lines, and the effective line lamps indicating these are turned on.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in that case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  Further, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied and the process proceeds to step S104 as long as the player does not perform a bet operation or medal insertion in step S101 or does not result in a MAX bet. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied, the process returns to step S101, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  In the replay game, no new medal bet is required. This is automatically set to the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. Thereby, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started, and a random number is extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After the random number is extracted, the process proceeds to the next step S107. Note that the timing for extracting the random number at this time may be performed immediately after the start lever 210 is operated, or may be performed after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds), for example, in the programming process. Appropriate extraction timing can be set.

  In step S107, a winning determination (matching of the random number value) of which winning combination corresponds to the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as the extracted random number value) is performed. In this hit determination, the extracted random number values are collated in a hit value determination table described later. The collation of the random number performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches or matches) to a predetermined winning combination random number value. At this time, if it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any winning combination, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON (= 1). Note that the winning probability for each winning combination in the winning determination performed by comparing the extracted random number value with the winning determination table is as shown in FIG.

  Then, in the flag process, when determining the winning value determination table as a determination reference when collating the extracted random number value in the game, refer to a game state flag such as a BB game flag to be described later. A winning value determination table (lottery table) in the game is determined. That is, a winning value determination table corresponding to a game state flag (game state flag) that is ON (= 1) in the game is set, and the extracted random number value is collated. Assume that the game state flags are prepared according to the game state, for example, a normal state flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. If both the bonus internal flag and the bonus flag are OFF (= 0), the normal flag is always ON (= 1).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any winning combination, it becomes “losing” that does not correspond to any winning combination, and neither condition device is operated. Here, when any of the condition devices is ON (actuated / established), it is possible to arrange the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition devices. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices is established, the symbol combinations corresponding to any winning combination cannot be aligned on the effective line. Steps S106 and S107 described above are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. Note that the process from extraction of the random number to flag processing corresponds to internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 52 described above).

  As described above with reference to FIG. 52, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function process shown in step S31 is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 53, this instruction function process may be executed as part of the flag process in step S107 in FIG. 53, or after the flag process in step S107 is completed, step S108 is performed. The wait timer time-up may be executed until time-out.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a group of condition devices that are allowed to operate based on the winning combination at the predetermined timing when the flag process or the instruction function process is executed, the instruction contents of the instruction function to be generated, etc. At least a part of the information determined on the main board 409 side is notified from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) by command communication (corresponding to “instruction information command” described later). It should be noted that the command for notifying these pieces of information may be a command compiled as appropriate.

  Further, a command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) as a result of performing the instruction function process in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can adopt the following command mode. . In other words, the winning roles are grouped based on their type (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.) and push order (forward press, middle press, push order unquestioned, etc.), and the winning role selected by internal lottery On the other hand, a command can be transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) in a form in which the group including the winning combination can be identified. Note that the classification criteria for grouping the winning combinations is not limited to the above example, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the presence / absence of the pressing order among the small types of the same type may be added to the classification criteria, or all winning combinations may be grouped based only on the presence / absence of the pressing order. Further, instead of grouping the winning combination, condition devices based on the winning combination may be grouped. Hereinafter, a command for notifying such a grouped winning combination will be described in more detail.

  First, for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, when the instruction function display is executed, the command that can understand all the breakdowns of the grouped winning combination (a command capable of so-called “complete navigation”). May be transmitted. At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize information such as what type of winning combination is selected and what pressing order, the reel stop method is advantageous for the player. Navigation display (so-called “complete navigation”) can be displayed.

  In addition, when the instruction function display is executed for the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, a command that can partially understand the breakdown of the grouped winning combination (for example, only the first stop can be taught). "Partial navigation") may be transmitted. At this time, since the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize a part of information regarding the selected winning combination, a navigation display (for example, only the first stop) that can partially teach a reel stop method advantageous to the player. So-called “partial navigation” can be displayed.

  In addition, regarding the command transmission for notifying the grouped winning combination, if the instruction function display is not executed, a command that does not know the breakdown of the grouped winning combination may be transmitted. At this time, the sub-board 510 that has received the command can recognize, based on the group indicated by the command, that the selected winning combination is a winning combination included in the group and whether or not the instruction function display can be executed. , I can not recognize any more information. For example, although it can be recognized that the winning combination is one of the push order bells, it can be recognized to the extent that the proper pushing order and the specific breakdown of the winning combination are not known.

  Furthermore, when the instruction function display is executed, the winning combinations to be grouped do not need to be limited to a specific small role, but include other roles (for example, push order bell and push order replay). You may make it do. In other words, in this case, even if the push order bell is selected as the winning combination or the push order replay is selected, if the proper push order is the same, a command indicating the same group is transmitted. Means. Further, even when the instruction function display is not executed, it is not necessary to limit the small roles to be grouped to the push order bell, and to include other roles (for example, push order bell and push order replay) to group them. However, in such a case, the type of winning combination (whether replay or bell) cannot be determined on the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) that has received the command, and the indication function display is Since the winning combination cannot be taught in an unrelated state (for example, when the instruction function is not executed, the replay navigation indicating that the replay is won cannot be displayed on the image display body 500), the push order bell It is desirable to send a command by grouping for each type of push order small role, such as separate and push order replay.

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can reduce the capacity consumed by the main board 409 by transmitting a command notifying the grouped winning combinations in this way, and the peripheral board side can independently determine the winning combination and its winning combination. Judgment of the pressing order can be suppressed.

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether or not the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game) has expired (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called a wait timer measures the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from the start of reel rotation in the game to the start of reel rotation in the next game. Is. Here, if the wait timer is timed up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S109. This determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the rotation speeds of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c become constant, the operation enable lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reel that has started to rotate continues to maintain the rotation at the above-described constant speed until a stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) by the player is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start process, and the start process ends.

[11-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collating the extracted random number value) is allowed as a winning combination corresponding to the game (hereinafter referred to as a corresponding winning combination). If the winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and the information of the activated condition device is processed as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery (reel stop processing, Determination processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a random value range (this is called an extraction range) for random number extraction is determined in advance. This extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 2 14 = 16384 random numbers). In the first embodiment, the random number value in the extraction range is set to 0 to 65535 for convenience, but it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this. If this random number extraction range is expanded, the range of random value values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) increases, so that a phenomenon in which specific random number values are biased and extracted is less likely to occur.

  Within the above extraction range, random numbers corresponding to each winning combination are assigned in advance. For example, if the random value in the extraction range (from “0” to “65535” in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning combination “BB1” is “1”, the extraction is performed. When the random number value is “1”, the result of the internal lottery is “BB1 is won”, and the condition device of BB1 is processed as an information command in the game. Further, if this is used, the winning probability of BB1 (probability that BB1 is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the lottery probability) can be calculated from the extraction range and the random value corresponding to BB1. In the example of FIG. 49, since the winning probability of BB1 in the normal state is [total number of random values corresponding to BB1 / total number of random values in the extraction range] is 4800/65536, The probability is 1 / 13.65 (see FIG. 50).

  In this way, random numbers corresponding to all winning combinations are determined, and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (BB1), the random value “1” in the extraction range is a hit value corresponding to BB1. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, for example, if the winning value of a predetermined role is set to consecutive random values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, The range of values is a random value “1” to “4”. When it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any one of the random number values “1” to “4” (verified), the result of the internal lottery is “winning a predetermined role”. In the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, a single combination (for example, BB1, cherry, replay, etc.) for winning only one winning combination is prepared. A simultaneous winning combination (including a bonus combination + a “duplicate combination” in which a small combination is simultaneously selected) is prepared. The same setting is made for the winning value of such a simultaneous winning combination.

  From this, the range of winning values for all winning combinations is determined, and it is determined whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any winning combination by internal lottery. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it is lost. In other words, the range of the winning value of the lost game is other than the range of the winning value of all winning combinations. Note that the winning value may be referred to as a winning allowable value.

  By the way, the single winning combination corresponds to one winning combination for one extracted random value, and the simultaneous winning combination is a plurality (for example, two) winning combinations for one extracted random value. Corresponds. In other words, if the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value of the simultaneous winning combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. At this time, condition devices corresponding to each of the winning combinations of a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously established (operation is allowed). However, even if a plurality of condition devices corresponding to each winning combination are established at the same time, since the priority of the condition device for the simultaneous winning combination is set, in fact, all the symbol combinations corresponding to the established condition device are all It is not always possible to stop on the active line. For example, if a replay combination and a bonus combination are won at the same time, and if the replay combination is prioritized, the reel stop process in step S5 is performed so that the replay combination is prioritized. Since the corresponding symbol combination can always be stopped on the active line regardless of the pressing order or pressing timing, as a result, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be stopped on the effective line and is always replayed. The symbol combination is stopped.

[11-3. Game state control processing]
Hereinafter, the gaming state control process performed in the slot machine 1 will be described.

[11-3-1. Game state transition control process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a gaming state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main board 409. FIG. 54 shows a game state transition control process when a plurality of types of bonus games installed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment are viewed together. The transition (transition) of the game state considering each bonus game will be described later with reference to FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not a bonus game is in progress (step S151). If it is determined that a bonus game is in progress (YES in step S151), it is confirmed whether or not the bonus game end condition is satisfied. (Step S152). If the bonus game end condition is not satisfied (NO in step S152), the process returns while the gaming state during the bonus is maintained.

  If the bonus game end condition is satisfied in step S152 (YES in step S152), the bonus game is ended and the state is changed to the normal state (general state) (step S153). In the normal state, when a game is executed over a certain period, the number of medals betted by the player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within the certain period. That is, the normal state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game is not being played (NO in step S151), it is determined whether or not the bonus is being played (bonus internal state) (step S154). That is, when a bonus combination is won in the internal lottery, a condition device corresponding to the bonus combination is activated, but in the condition device corresponding to this bonus combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is effective in the game won in the internal lottery. Even if it is not displayed on the line, it continues to operate until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line even after the next game.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the bonus is in the internal state, then it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (step S155). If it is determined in step S155 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line (YES in step S155), the gaming state shifts to the bonus (bonus state) (step S156), and the bonus game is executed. The If a negative result is obtained in step S155 (NO in step S155), the process returns while the gaming state inside the bonus is maintained.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S154 that the bonus internal state is not established, it is determined whether or not a bonus combination (which may be a duplicate combination including a bonus combination) is won in the internal lottery (step S157). If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination is won (YES in step S157), the gaming state shifts to the bonus internal state (step S158). If the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line in the game selected as the bonus combination, the game in the bonus internal state is not performed, and the game state is controlled to the bonus state and the bonus game is executed. The If it is determined in step S157 that the bonus combination has not been won (NO in step S157), the game state is returned to the normal state.

  In the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such transition of the gaming state is controlled by the main board 409. Although not particularly mentioned in the example of FIG. 49 and the like, it does not deny that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the AT function. However, even if the slot machine 1 has the AT function, the execution of the AT game is basically controlled by a system different from the above-described control of the gaming state. In other words, the AT game can be executed in any of the game states of the normal state and the bonus internal state. However, this is not the case when there is a conflict with rules and the like. For example, it is assumed that an AT game cannot be executed in a bonus state.

[11-3-1-1. Features related to game state transition]
The game state transition control when viewing the bonus games collectively is as described above, but here, all the game states including each bonus game will be described focusing on the mutual transition relationship.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the game state transition relationship in the first embodiment. The gaming state transition relationship shown in FIG. 55 is the same in the second and fourth embodiments described later. The details of each gaming state shown in FIG. 55 are as described mainly in relation to the bonus combination in [10-1-1] to [10-1-3-4].

  In FIG. 55, the BB1 game and the BB2 game are the same in that they are advantageous game periods in which the payout rate exceeds 1 although there is a difference in the prescribed upper limit number of game media payouts, which is a bonus game end condition. For this reason, they are collectively in the BB. In FIG. 55, the stop of the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not strictly a “winning” because it does not accompany the payout of the game medium, but is described in the word “winning” for convenience. Yes. The same applies to FIG. 118 described later.

  Also, in FIG. 55, when BB1, BB2, MB (the winning combination is “MB + Cherry”) is won by the internal lottery performed during SB, each bonus flag is established and the gaming state is shifted. Although the description of the points is omitted, in consideration of the winning probability of SB (1 / 289.94) and the winning probability of each bonus during SB (1 / 13.65 to 1 / 27.31), SB The probability of winning each bonus is rare (one-thousandth of a probability), so there is no significant impact.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the average number of staying games for each gaming state. FIG. 56 shows the average number of staying games for each characteristic gaming state in the slot machine 1. Pattern 1 is the case of the first embodiment, and patterns 2 and 3 are described later. This is the case of the second and third embodiments. As described above, each gaming state shown in FIG. 56 means a gaming state at the start of the game, and includes a case where the gaming state is changed during the game. The number of stay games shown in FIG. 56 is calculated based on specific numerical values (numbers and winning probabilities) shown in the lottery table of each embodiment (FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 in the first embodiment). However, description of the calculation process is omitted.

  In FIG. 56, “BB1” corresponds to a gaming state in which the entire BB1 game, that is, “BB1 in general”, “one kind of BB (JAC) inside”, and “one kind of BB” is combined, “BB2” It corresponds to a gaming state in which the whole BB2 game, that is, “BB2 is in general”, “one kind of BB (JAC) inside”, and “one kind of BB is in the middle”, “MB” is the whole MB game, that is, “MB in general” ”,“ Inside the two types of BB (JAC) ”, and“ in the two types of BB ”. In any of the patterns 1 to 3, “normal time”, “MB inside” and “MB” are set so that the payout rate does not exceed 1, and “BB1” and “BB2” are the payout rates. Is set to exceed 1. The number of stay games in “MB” in FIG. 56 does not take into account the shortening due to the MB game being interrupted when winning the SB role during MB, but the winning role of “MB” Since the rate is not so high (1 / 289.94 according to FIG. 50), it does not change the number of stay games for each gaming state shown in FIG. 56. Also, in any of the embodiments, the number of staying games “inside BB1” and “inside BB2” is a few games, and is not shown in FIG.

  With reference to FIG. 55, FIG. 56, etc., the characteristics regarding the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described.

  First, “BB” is a game period that is surely advantageous to the player because the BB1 game and the BB2 game are performed and the payout rate exceeds 1, and the game state is controlled to “BB”. The more opportunities there are, the more game media a player can acquire. In order to shift to “in BB”, it is necessary to win “BB1” or “BB2” before winning “MB” in “normal time”. That is, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a feature that the winning situation in “normal time” is important for the player to acquire a lot of game media. Can greatly enhance the interest of the person.

  Here, the transition of the gaming state in “normal time” will be described with reference to specific numerical values. The average stay game at “normal time” is 6.3 games, and the winning probability of the MB role (actually “MB + cherry”) at “normal time” is 1 / 27.31, whereas “normal” The winning probability of the BB1 role or the BB2 role in “time” is 1 / 8.19 (combination probability), which is higher than the MB winning probability. In other words, in “normal time”, before winning the MB role (“MB + Cherry”) with a probability of 1 / 27.31, win 1 / 8.19 and win the BB1 role or the BB2 role. A game period left to the player's luck is created. Theoretically, it can be expected to loop about 4-5 times between “normal time” and “during BB”, and such “normal time” should be a game period in which the player's interest is the highest. it can.

  However, once the MB role is won in “normal time”, there is no chance of winning BB1 and BB2 in the slot machine 1 until it returns to “normal time” after the MB game. . In other words, this state corresponds to the creation of an advantageous non-lottery period in the gaming state. Here, according to FIG. 56, in the case of the present embodiment, the average stay game number in the MB is as short as 1.5 games, but the average stay game number in the subsequent MB is 247.4 games. It will be long-term. In the present embodiment, “inside MB” and “inside MB” are set so that the overall payout rate does not exceed 1, so that 250 until the MB game ends after winning the MB role. A game period that is disadvantageous to the player can be created over the vicinity of the game.

  As described above, in this embodiment, once the MB role has been won, the player's game over the long game period is fortunate unless the SB role is won and the MB game can be interrupted. Although hand-held medals will be reduced, this disadvantageous game period prolongs the realization of the effect of reducing the overall play rate throughout all gaming states.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to prolong the above-mentioned disadvantageous game period, for example, a game period controlled to “inside MB” or “in MB” (1.5 + 247 according to FIG. 56). .4 = 248.9 games) in the game period controlled to other gaming states (according to FIG. 56, “normal time” is 6.3 games, “BB1” is 141.8 games, “BB2” Is configured to be higher than 57.7 games).

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above disadvantageous game period is set by setting the number of places and the number of payouts so that the payout rate of 1 or less in “inside MB” or “in MB” is further reduced. Can be further prolonged.

  With the configuration as described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can suppress the payout rate by prolonging the disadvantageous game period from the MB winning combination to the end of the MB game. The game state in which the “normal time” can easily win the winning combination (BB1, BB2) of the BB game advantageous to the player can be achieved while suppressing / maintaining the amount of play. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can create a high expectation period in which the degree of expectation for an advantageous state is high and greatly enhances the interest of the player.

  Then, taking into account that the control is performed again at the normal time after the BB game is finished, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “normal time” can be easily won internally by the BB that is more advantageous than the disadvantaged MB. In addition to the “expected period”, the “high expectation period” can be repeatedly displayed with the execution of the BB game (a loop between the normal time and the BB game). Thus, by creating such a high expectation period with high loopability, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

[11-3-1-2. Features of First Embodiment]
To summarize what has been described above, it is shown that the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the following features.

  First, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a bonus game, a first bonus game (corresponding to a BB game (BB1 game, BB2 game)) controlled to facilitate an increase in game media, and a bonus game are provided. A second bonus game (corresponding to an MB game) controlled so as to make it difficult to acquire more game media than the number multiplied by is prepared. Furthermore, a third bonus game (SB game) different from both the first bonus game and the second bonus game is also prepared. Each bonus game is controlled by the main board 409.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state, the second bonus combination (MB combination) and a different combination (for example, the cherry combination) may be simultaneously selected. The display of the symbol combination related to the second bonus combination is prevented by executing the control that gives priority to the display of the symbol combination related to the "different combination" over the display of the symbol combination related to the second bonus combination. It is characterized by. Taking FIG. 49 as an example, the above simultaneous winning is equivalent to the winning of the double combination “MB + Cherry”. At this time, the display of the symbol combination of the cherry combination over the MB combination is as described in [10-1-3-3], and as a result, the combination of the MB combination may stop. It is suppressed. By having such a feature, when the MB role is won in a normal game state advantageous to the player, not only the transition to a game period (MB inside to MB game) disadvantageous to the player is performed. It is possible to pass through the game inside the MB, and the stay period of the disadvantageous game period can be extended by the number of games staying inside the MB. And according to such a feature, when an internal lottery result unfavorable for a player named MB combination is obtained, it is possible to suppress that the combination of symbols of MB combination is displayed immediately. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to perceive the timing of transition from an unfavorable game period to an unfavorable game period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player who has sensed a fall into an unfavorable game period gives up the continuation of the game, and can be expected to have an effect of continuing the game.

  Furthermore, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the normal gaming state in the internal lottery in the bonus internal state corresponding to the second bonus combination even if the priority control related to the display of the symbol combination related to “different combination” is performed. It is possible to display the symbol combination related to the second bonus combination earlier than the game corresponding to the reciprocal of the probability of winning the second bonus combination in the internal lottery. For example, referring to FIG. 50, since the probability of winning the second bonus combination (MB combination) in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state (normal time) is 1 / 27.31, 27-28 games. On the other hand, the symbol combination related to the second bonus combination (the symbol combination of the MB combination) can be displayed by the internal lottery in the bonus internal state (inside the MB) corresponding to the second bonus combination. Is selected, the probability is 1 / 1.52. In other words, theoretically, a shift is selected in the internal lottery until one or two games have started in the MB, and this number of games is 27 to 28 games which are the above-mentioned “reciprocal games”. Is shown to be faster. By having such a feature, as explained in the previous paragraph, when the MB role is won, the number of staying games during the “unfavorable game period” is extended by always passing through the inside of the MB. Thus, since the number of staying games in the MB can be shifted to the next gaming state (more specifically, the MB general) without excessively extending the number of staying games, the player's interest is significantly impaired. The effect of suppressing this can be expected.

  Furthermore, in the second bonus game, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment reaches the specified maximum number of game media in the second bonus game or wins the third bonus combination. The second bonus game is ended. The end condition of the second bonus game is as shown in [10-1-3-3] as a specific example of the “end condition regarding the MB game”, and specifically, paid out during the MB game. This means that the total payout number (specified upper limit number) of game media reaches 253 or that SB is won by internal lottery (SB game is activated). By providing such a feature, the control that is continued as long as the bonus game, which is disadvantageous to the player as the second bonus game, does not satisfy the predetermined end condition is realized.

  Furthermore, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the first bonus combination over the second bonus combination when the second bonus game is ended because the above-described end condition regarding the second bonus game is satisfied. It is characterized by controlling to a normal gaming state with a high appearance ratio. Specifically, according to FIG. 49, in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state (normal time), the appearance ratio of the second bonus combination is 2400 out of the total number 65536 (in terms of winning probability, 1 /27.31). On the other hand, the appearance ratio of the first bonus combination is 8000 (BB1 is 4800, BB2 is 3200) out of the total number of 65536 (the combined winning probability is 1 / 8.19). From this, it is shown that it is higher than the appearance ratio of the second bonus combination. In the example of FIG. 49, the appearance ratio of each of the plurality of first bonus combinations BB1 and BB2 is higher than the appearance ratio of the second bonus combination. As a feature of the above, it is sufficient that at least the appearance ratio of the entire first bonus combination is higher than the appearance ratio of the second bonus combination in the normal gaming state.

  According to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, with such a feature, in the normal gaming state, a game period that is disadvantageous to the player is started with the appearance of the second bonus combination (MB combination). Rather than that, since the degree of expectation that a very advantageous game period in which the increase of game media is facilitated will be increased, the player is rewarded with an advantageous reward (game by the first bonus game). It is possible to make the game period easy to enjoy the payout of the medium. And when it is controlled to such a normal game state, the interest of the player can be greatly enhanced.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the SB may shorten the game period of the MB game which is disadvantageous for the player (the payout rate does not exceed 1) when winning during the MB game. It can be said that it is a bonus role that can be expected for game development advantageous to the player in terms of being able to do so. Also, even if the slot machine 1 of this embodiment and other embodiments does not have an SB, depending on the characteristics of the inside of the MB and the MB game described so far, from the MB winning to the end of the MB game. The disadvantageous game period can be made relatively long, and the normal time can be set as a game period in which it is easy to win an advantageous BB game with a high probability.

[11-3-2. Instruction function processing]
As described in step S31 of FIG. 52, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, after the main board 409 selects a winning combination by the internal lottery process in step S3 (see FIG. 49 for the lottery table). When main processing of the instruction function processing is performed by the main board 409 and the generation of an instruction is displayed by the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) has the same instruction function. Can be displayed on other displays or the like (navigation display, instruction generation effect). Note that the display mode of the instruction function display and the navigation display may be various, but both displays are required to be display contents in accordance with the instruction contents of the instruction function determined by the main board 409.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining a rough processing flow of the instruction function processing. In FIG. 57, regarding the instruction function processing performed in the slot machine 1, a series of processes executed on the main board 409 and a series of processes executed on the sub board 510 in response to a command from the main board 409 are shown. ing.

  Note that various flags are used in the following description of the instruction function process. These flags are used in the memory in the board that executes the instruction function process (for example, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 and the RAM 1122 of the sub board 510). This is an internal flag to be held, and the value is rewritten or read by the CPU or the like (for example, CPU 1110 or CPU 1118) of each board. In addition, when a flag with the same name is used between the main board 409 and the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510), it is basically assumed that these internal flags have a common data format. It is assumed that the value of the flag is synchronized by transmitting a command signal or the like.

  In addition to the internal flag, variable data may be used. These variable data are also stored in the board memory (for example, the RAM 1114 in the case of the main board 409 and the sub board 510). In this case, the value is stored in the RAM 1122), and the value is read or rewritten by a CPU or the like (for example, the CPU 1110 in the case of the main board 409 and the CPU 1118 in the case of the sub board 510).

  First, in step S61 of FIG. 57, the main board 409 executes processing (instruction function generation processing) regarding whether or not to generate an instruction function.

  If it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated as a result of the instruction function generation process, the main board 409 performs a process of causing the special display LED 612 to display an instruction function display based on the winning combination of the game (step S62). ). By this instruction function display, it is possible to indicate an appropriate stop order regarding the winning combination in a specific situation, or to indicate that a predetermined symbol should be arranged in a predetermined stop order.

  In the case of a game in which it is determined that the main board 409 does not need to perform the instruction function display in step S61, the specific instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is not performed in step S62.

  The main board 409 performs the instruction function display in step S62 based on the result of the instruction function generation process in step S61, while the same information as the display contents (instruction contents) in the instruction function display is transmitted to the peripheral board ( For example, it is transmitted to the sub-board 510) (instruction information command). When the instruction function display is not performed, the fact may be notified by an instruction information command, or the instruction information command may not be transmitted. However, if the instruction information command is not transmitted, it is necessary to determine whether the command has not been received after a predetermined time has elapsed on the receiving side. In this way, the peripheral board (sub-board 510) not only can recognize whether or not the instruction function display is performed in the game based on the reception of the instruction information command, but also can display the instruction function display. Display contents (instruction contents) can also be grasped.

  Then, the peripheral board (here, the sub board 510) that has received the instruction information command from the main board 409 performs the processing shown in steps S63 to S65 in FIG. 57 based on the information included in the instruction information command. In the instruction function process shown in FIG. 57, the instruction function generation process (step S61) is first executed by the main board 409, but the subsequent processes (specifically, the step by the main board 409 and the sub board 510). About the process of S62 and the process of step S63-S65, the execution timing of a mutual process is not restrict | limited.

  First, in step S63, it is determined whether or not the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510) performs (or has performed) the instruction function display in the game, and the instruction function display is (or has been performed). ) (YES in step S63), instruction generation effect processing is performed as processing in step S64. Further, when it is determined in step S63 that the instruction function display is not performed (or has not been performed) in the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510) (NO in step S63), the peripheral substrate (for example, the sub substrate 510) is instructed as processing in step S65. Perform function-related processing.

  The instruction generation effect process in step S64 is for displaying an “instruction generation effect” for teaching the player the stop order, stop position (target pattern), etc. of the reel 301 on the image display 500 or other display devices. It is processing. Note that the teaching content shown to the player by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display content displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display processing. For example, although the instruction content indicating “forward press” is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the instruction function display, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is not allowed to be “reverse press”. Even if the special display LED 612 displays the instruction content indicating “forward press” and indicates that “the left reel 301a should be stopped first” as the teaching by the instruction generation effect content, The case where the reel 301b to be stopped is not taught is also not allowed. In addition, the fact that the instruction content by the instruction generation effect is limited to the display contents displayed on the special display LED 612 is not limited to the above-described pressing order, but the indication function display indicates the pressing place. It is also applied when is determined. That is, for example, although the instruction content display indicates that the special display LED 612 indicates that “all seven reels should aim for the red 7 symbol”, the instruction content indicated by the instruction generation effect content is “BAR symbol. It is not allowed to be "aiming at a red 7 symbol" with only some reels.

  In addition, as for the specific effect form of the instruction generation effect, various effect forms are conventionally known, such as displaying the order of pushing and symbols on the liquid crystal screen, or lighting the LED associated with each of the reels 301a to 301c. Any one or combination thereof may be used.

  Although the instruction function related process in step S65 is a case where the instruction function display is not displayed on the special display LED 612, the sub board 510 displays a predetermined effect screen related to the instruction function (for example, an effect corresponding to some continuous effect). This is a process for performing (screen display) and the like.

  The instruction function process ends when the processes of steps S61 to S65 described above are performed. Below, each process (step S61-step S65) performed as an instruction | indication function process is demonstrated.

[11-3-3. Instruction function generation processing]
The instruction function generation process shown in step S61 of FIG. 57 is a process related to whether or not to generate an instruction function. The main board 409 instructs the special display LED 612 based on the winning combination of the internal lottery and the gaming state. Determine whether to display the function. For example, when a specific winning combination is won, the instruction function may be executed in a display mode that teaches a predetermined pressing order in order to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination. Further, when the slot machine 1 is provided with an AT function using a push order small combination, the instruction function is executed in a display mode that teaches “appropriate push order” regarding the push order small combination selected in the internal lottery. It is also possible.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not indispensable for the AT function as shown in FIG. 49 and the like, but the lottery table having the AT function is not illustrated. We do not deny that we have. In the following description, in order to facilitate understanding of the instruction function in general, a case where an AT function using a push order small combination is provided may be cited as an example. As for the AT function, it is possible to select a commonly used role composition, and when the AT game is started after winning the AT game, the “appropriate push order” is selected when the push order small role is won. By teaching, a payout advantageous to the player is realized. In addition, regarding the number of games in which AT games are played (the number of AT games), it is generally possible to extend (add) the number of AT games as a privilege given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. .

[11-3-4. Instruction function display processing]
In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main board 409 determines that the instruction function is to be generated as a result of the instruction function generation process, the instruction content based on the winning combination of the game (specifically, the reel 301a -301c is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display (indicating function display process). In the instruction function display process, the main board 409 selects a display form of the instruction function display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from a plurality of display forms prepared in advance (for example, display data is held in the ROM 1112 or the like). . Hereinafter, the instruction function display displayed using the special display LED 612 will be described in detail.

[11-3-4-1. Instruction function display (first example)]
First, a first example of instruction function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the first example, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 includes two 7-segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The indication function is displayed by displaying the letters and numbers.

  58 and 59 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the instruction function display of the first example. 58 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612a, and FIG. 59 shows a display mode of the special display LED 612b. In both FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, the “segment display” column shows the alphanumeric characters displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the “content” column shows the content that the displayed alphanumeric characters mean. Further, in FIG. 59, the “navi display” column shows an outline of display of the effect display (navigation display) on the image display body 500 or the like when the corresponding instruction function display is performed, and The scene and situation in which the display is used is shown. The navigation display controlled by the sub board 510 will be described later in [11-3-5].

In the instruction function display of the first example, it is assumed that the following rules are provided as an example of the rules regarding the instruction function display.
(1) An instruction function is displayed using two 7-segment LEDs (7-segment) (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). The special display LED 612a displays information indicating an indication of the pressing position, and the special display LED 612b displays information indicating the pressing order.
(2) During the period in which the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display is started at least before the reception of the pressing operation (reel stop operation) on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started, and the last reel 301 being rotated The display on the special display LED 612 is switched from the instruction function display to the payout number display at the timing when the player's hand is released from the reel stop button 211 for which the reel stop operation corresponding to has been performed. That is, the instruction function display period and the payout number display period do not overlap. If no game value (medal) is paid out as a result of the game, that is, if the payout number is “0”, the payout number display may not be performed. As a supplementary requirement, if the instruction function display is performed and the payout number display is not performed, the instruction function display is canceled (hidden) at the same timing as when the payout number display is performed. The instruction function display may be continued until the payout process is completed.
(3) In a game in which the instruction function display is performed by the special display LED 612, when any reel among the rotating reels 301a to 301c is first stopped, the stopped reel displays the instruction function display ( When the special display LED 612b) is not the reel indicated as the first reel to be stopped (that is, when a reel different from the instruction content is first stopped), or when the reel stop button 211 is pressed, the instruction function is displayed. Even when the timing does not correspond to the position indicated by the special display LED 612a as an indication of the pressing position (that is, when the reel is stopped at a position different from the instruction content), all The display mode on the special display LED 612 is not changed until the stop operation on the reel 301 is completed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the instruction function is to be generated, the main board 409 determines what instruction contents are displayed on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b as the instruction function display in the game. To be determined based on the winning role. First, instruction contents that can be determined by the main board 409 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59 (details will be described later).

  The main board 409 arbitrarily determines the instruction content within the range that does not deny the “appropriate pressing place” based on the winning combination of the game with respect to the instruction contents of the “approximate pressing place” displayed on the special display LED 612a. be able to. Specifically, for example, when “BB1 (red 7 symbol set)” is selected as the winning combination, the main board 409 determines an instruction content to display “2” (red 7 symbol) on the special display LED 612a. However, in addition to this, since the game method aiming at “Red 7 design” is not denied, the instruction content for displaying “0” (no designation) may be determined.

  In addition, the main board 409 has the “appropriate push order” based on the winning combination of the game, with respect to the “push order” instruction content displayed on the special display LED 612b, as well as the “push location guideline” instruction content. The content of the instruction can be arbitrarily determined within a range that does not negate the above. For example, it is assumed that an instruction function is generated in a game in which a small combination whose forward pressing is “appropriate pressing order” is selected as a winning combination. At this time, the main board 409 can determine the instruction content of “push order” to be “left / middle / right” (six choice push order), and according to the display example of FIG. 59 (details will be described later). “1” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, as the instruction content for clarifying only “left” of the first stop without clarifying the second stop and the third stop, “first left (2 choices)” may be used as the instruction content. According to the display example 59 (details will be described later), “A” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. In addition, from the condition that the “appropriate push order” is not denied, the instruction content of the push order only needs to include at least a game procedure based on the “proper push order”. That is, as the instruction content having the possibility of the first stop of the left reel 301a, “Left first or right first” (segment display “E” in FIG. 59) or “Left first or first in middle” (FIG. 59 may be the instruction content, or may be the instruction content for which the pressing order is unknown (segment display “0” in FIG. 59).

  Next, the display examples shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 will be specifically described. First, referring to FIG. 58, as a guide for the pressing place, there are four types of “0 (no designation)”, “1 (chance symbol)”, “2 (red 7 symbol)”, “3 (BAR symbol)”. Numbers are set for display. When “0” is displayed as a guide for the pressing position, it means that the guide for pressing is not specified, that is, the operation at a specific stop timing is not instructed in the game. Even if there is a pressing operation (unspecified stop operation) of the reel stop button 211 without being aware of the stop timing, the symbol combinations based on some winning combination are not necessarily aligned on the effective line. In other words, in the case where the symbol combination based on the winning combination is surely stopped in the game in which “not specified” is selected, the predetermined stop timing that can prevent the winning combination from being missed as in the above-described maximum efficiency method. It is required to perform a stop operation. Specifically, for example, when the push order bell is won during AT, the special display LED 612a displays “0”, but the push order bell is a stop timing as long as it is a stop operation based on an appropriate push order. Regardless of (not missed), you can align the symbol combination of the bell. On the other hand, for example, when “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a when the winning combination is a role that may be missed depending on the stop timing (for example, a watermelon role), the stop timing is not considered. If the reel stop button 211 is pressed, the watermelon role may be missed. To ensure that the watermelon role is won, when the symbols that make up the watermelon role combination are within the range that can be drawn The reel stop button 211 needs to be pressed at an appropriate timing.

  Here, it is preferable that the symbol used as a guide for the pressing position is a symbol that is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize while the reel 301 is rotating. Even if it does, it is not always necessary to stop the symbol on the active line.

  Also, for the symbols corresponding to “1” to “3” shown in FIG. 58, the corresponding symbols may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the “chance symbol” that is the target of “1” may be a “right” symbol, a “righteous” symbol, or may be applied to other symbols. Further, the symbol “2” may be the “blue 7” symbol instead of the red 7 symbol. Note that the segment display shown in FIG. 58 is merely an example, and the segment display pattern can be increased or decreased within a range that can be displayed by the special display LED 612a. For example, you may add a segment display about symbols (for example, watermelon symbol) other than those illustrated in FIG. In addition, the symbol set as a guide for the pressing location is not limited to one. For example, a segment display such as “either red 7 symbol or blue 7” is set as a guide for the pressing location. May be. 58 and 59, the correspondence between “content” and “seg display” does not have to be one-to-one, and a plurality of “seg display” indicating the same “content” is prepared. May be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 59, 16 display patterns are set for display, and alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” are assigned as display contents of the segment display. . Below, the content which each display pattern means is demonstrated in detail. In addition, when displaying in 7 segments, the capital letters “B” and “D” may be indistinguishable from the numbers “8” and “0”, respectively. It is decided to display with lowercase letters.

  The display “0” in the special display LED 612b is used when the pressing order is not limited (the pressing order is not asked). However, as described in the “Usage” column, it is not used only when the winning role is in any order, but when it is a winning role that can be won by alternative, the pushing order is taught. It can also be used when not. The winning combination of any push order includes not only push order bells and replays, but also low chances (rare roles) such as chance eyes, watermelons, and cherries. Therefore, when the instruction function display is performed when the rare role is won, the display on the special display LED 612b becomes “0”. At this time, the expected display such as “Chance!” And the rare role type display are displayed in the navigation display. You may make it perform. By performing such a display, it is possible to suggest or teach to the player that the game has a high degree of expectation different from normal. Also, in the latter case where the push order is not taught in the case of a winning combination that can be won by an alternative, the proper push order is not taught, so the navigation display example is "????" .

  The indications “1” to “6” on the special display LEDs 612b are used when the stop order of each of the three reels 301a to 301c is determined as an appropriate push order, and displays a so-called six-choice push order. Can do. When the 6-option push order is displayed on the instruction function display, at least the reel to be stopped first and the reel to be stopped second are taught in the navigation display. Thirdly, the reel to be stopped will be clear in the erasure law, but may be clearly indicated.

  In addition, the indications “7” to “9” on the special display LED 612b are used when it is determined as an appropriate pressing order which one of the three reels 301a to 301c should be stopped first. Thus, the so-called three-choice push order can be displayed. When the three-option push order is displayed on the instruction function display, the reel to be stopped first is taught on the navigation display.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49, etc., there are five choice push order bells. In such a case, in the three choice push order display, Since there are not enough display patterns, it is only necessary to use a 6-option push order display or only a part (only in the case of a middle push push order bell) to use a 3-select push order display.

  When the special display LED 612b displays the pressing order such as “1” to “9”, the largest payout occurs when the stop operation according to both the display on the special display LED 612a and the display on the special display LED 612b is performed. A game result that is advantageous to the player is provided, for example, a push order bell wins in a stop form corresponding to the number of sheets. As described above, in order to obtain a stop system with the largest number of payouts, it is necessary to perform a stop operation at an appropriate timing in the case of a winning combination that may be missed.

  Further, “providing a game result advantageous to the player” described in the previous paragraph includes “suppressing a game result that is disadvantageous to the player”. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described. For example, when a push order replay is prepared such that different symbol combinations are stopped depending on the push order, and when a stop operation based on a “specific push order” is performed when the push order replay is won, “BAR” − “BAR” Suppose that the symbol alignment of "-" Red 7 "can be stopped. This “BAR”-“BAR”-“Red 7” symbol set is added, for example, when the push order replay is won during AT and it is internally determined that the number of AT games will be added. Is used as one of the effects of teaching When the number of AT games is added at the time of winning of such push order replay, displaying the “specific push order” instruction function leads to the provision of “game results advantageous to the player”. On the other hand, if the “specific push order” is displayed as an instruction function when the number of AT games is not added while winning the push order replay, “BAR” − “BAR” − is displayed by the stop operation according to the instruction. Even if the symbol alignment of “Red 7” is stopped, the “game result advantageous to the player” that is the addition of the number of AT games is not provided, and therefore, “game result unfavorable to the player” is provided. In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, in order to suppress the provision of such “game result disadvantageous to the player”, when the number of AT games is not added at the time of the above-mentioned push order replay win, It is possible to display the instruction function so as to avoid the “order”. Since the game is played in accordance with such indication function display, the “BAR”-“BAR”-“Red 7” symbol alignment in which the number of AT games is not added will not appear. It is possible to “suppress a disadvantageous game result from being provided”, and as a result, “a game result advantageous to the player is provided”.

  On the other hand, the displays “A” to “F” on the special display LED 612b are different from the cases where “1” to “9” are displayed, and “part” of the push order that can lead to a game result advantageous to the player. Used when displaying. For example, the display “A” only indicates that the left reel 301a should be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped second. The player must select (2 alternatives) the reel to be stopped second. Also, for example, the display “d” indicates that the left reel 301a should not be stopped first, and does not indicate which of the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Even if an appropriate pushing order (for example, the middle reel 301b) is selected at the first stop, any of the remaining two reels 301 (in this case, the left reel 301a or the right reel 301c) is again rotated at the second stop. As a result, it is possible to select four options. If an appropriate push order is satisfied only by selection at the first stop, two alternatives can be made.

  As described above, when the order of pressing such as “A” to “F” is displayed on the special display LED 612b, even if the stop operation is performed according to the display content, the order of pressing is not necessarily the proper order. However, when an appropriate push order can be finally selected, a game result advantageous to the player is provided, for example, the push order bell wins in the stop form that has the largest payout number.

  The display examples on the special display LEDs 612a and 612b have been described above, but actually, the two-digit value obtained by combining these is displayed on the special display LED 612 to indicate the instruction content in the game. FIG. 67 described later shows a specific display example.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the first example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode in which the instruction contents can be easily grasped. An appropriate reel stop operation can be executed while viewing the display LEDs 612a and 612b, and a more advantageous game result can be expected than when the instruction function display is not performed. In addition, by making it easier for a player to attract attention to a display device that displays such an instruction function, it is possible to create gameability that is not found in conventional gaming machines.

  Further, the display examples as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59 do not necessarily require all the symbols and the pressing order as a guide for the pressing place, and the symbols and the pressing order are appropriately grouped. By adopting such a display example, it can be expected that the volume of data required for the main board 409 to display the instruction function is reduced.

[11-3-4-2. Instruction function display (second example)]
Next, a second example of instruction function display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the instruction function display of the second example, the slot machine 1 includes one dot-attached 7-segment LED (special display LED 612c shown in FIG. 63), and the special display LED 612c displays a predetermined pattern to indicate the instruction function. Display.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining a display device used in the indication function display of the second example. In the instruction function display of the second example, a 7-segment LED with dots (special display LED 612c) is used as a display for displaying the instruction function. As shown in FIG. 60, the special display LED 612c is configured by adding a dot LED to a so-called 7-segment LED, and has a total of 8 lightable portions. FIG. 60 shows an example of the lighting rule of the special display LED 612c. The eight lightable parts are represented by each digit bit of the data expressed in 8-bit binary number (in order from the lower order, 1 bit, 2 bits,. .., 8 bits). Therefore, by indicating the target data (instruction function display data) indicating the instruction content in 8-bit binary, the special function LED 612c can realize the instruction function display corresponding to the target data. Specifically, for example, when the second bit of the target data is set (the value of the second digit from the lower order is “1”), the lightable portion indicated by “2 bits” in FIG. Is done. Such a display rule is merely an example, and for example, a predetermined process may be performed so that the value of the target data cannot be easily read.

61 and 62 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the instruction function display of the second example. In the instruction function display of the second example, it is assumed that the following rules are provided as an example of the rules regarding the instruction function display.
(1) An instruction function is displayed using one 7-segment LED with a dot (special display LED 612c). The special display LED 612c is turned on in correspondence with each digit bit of “instruction function display data” expressed in 8-bit binary number. As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, in the “instruction function display data”, the upper 4 bits (5 bits to 8 bits) hold information indicating the approximate location of the press (FIG. 61). Information indicating the pressing order is held in 4 bits (1 bit to 4 bits) (FIG. 62).
(2) Same as rule (2) regarding the instruction function described in the first example.
(3) Same as rule (3) regarding the instruction function described in the first example.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that an instruction function is to be generated, what instruction content is displayed on the special display LED 612c as an instruction function display is the same as in the first example. The board 409 is determined based on the winning combination in the game. 61 and 62 correspond to the instruction contents illustrated in FIGS. 58 and 59, and thus the description thereof will not be repeated.

  First, the “segment display” shown in FIG. 61 will be described. FIG. 61 exemplifies a specific example of upper 4 bits indicating an indication of a pressing position in the instruction function display data. Specifically, “1” is set in the fifth bit when the standard of the pressing position is “not specified”, and “1” is set in the sixth bit when the standard of the pressing position is “chance symbol”. “1” is set in the 7th bit when the standard of the pressing position is “red 7 symbol”, and “1” is set in the 8th bit when the standard of the pressing location is “BAR symbol”. It is done. Then, in accordance with the lighting law shown in FIG. 60, “seg display” corresponding to each “content” is performed in the special display LED 612c.

  Next, the “segment display” shown in FIG. 62 will be described. FIG. 62 illustrates a specific example of lower 4 bits indicating the pressing order in the instruction function display data. Specifically, different instruction contents are set for each of 16 types of lower 4 bits “0000” to “1111”. Then, “seg display” corresponding to each digit bit is performed in the special display LED 612c.

  The upper 4 bits shown in “binary display” in FIG. 61 and the lower 4 bits shown in “binary display” in FIG. 62 are displayed in different digits. The data can be represented by binary 8-bit data combining the upper 4 bits (FIG. 61) indicating the push location and the lower 4 bits (FIG. 62) indicating the pressing order, and is indicated by the special display LED 612c. The function display can also display the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits simultaneously.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining a specific display example of the instruction function display of the second example. In FIG. 63, a display example of the instruction function display displayed on the special display LED 612c based on the examples of FIGS. 61 and 62, and a table of navigation displays displayed on the image display body 500 or the like corresponding to the instruction function display. An example is shown. Details of the navigation display will be described in detail in the following [11-3-5] as the specific example of the instruction function display of the first example with reference to FIG. The description is omitted here.

  According to FIG. 1 shows a display example when the indication content is “not specified” (No. 0 in FIG. 61) and the push order is “unquestioned” (No. 0 in FIG. 62). Yes. At this time, in the special display LED 612c, a lighting display corresponding to the instruction function display data of binary number 8 bits “00010000” including the upper 4 bits “0001” and the lower 4 bits “0000” is performed, More specifically, only the lightable part corresponding to 5 bits is lit.

  Next, in FIG. No. 2 is a display example when the indication content is “not specified” (No. 0 in FIG. 61) and the pressing order is “left / right / middle” (No. 2 in FIG. 62). It is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs lighting display corresponding to the instruction function display data of binary number 8 bits “00010010”, which is a combination of “0001” of the upper 4 bits and “0010” of the lower 4 bits, More specifically, the lightable part corresponding to 2 bits and 5 bits is turned on.

  Next, in FIG. 3, when the indication content is “red 7 symbol” (No. 2 in FIG. 61) and the pressing order is “first right (2 choices)” (No. 12 in FIG. 62). A display example of is shown. At this time, the special display LED 612c performs a lighting display corresponding to the instruction function display data of binary number 8 bits “01001100”, which is a combination of the upper 4 bits “0100” and the lower 4 bits “1100”. More specifically, the lightable part corresponding to 3 bits, 4 bits, and 7 bits is turned on.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the instruction function display of the second example is performed, the instruction function display is performed in a display mode that makes it difficult to grasp the instruction content at first glance. Even if the player notices that the instruction function display is performed on the display LED 612c, a new gameability is created that the instruction content cannot be immediately grasped. For example, it can be expected to have an effect of arousing curiosity for wanting to know the display rule of the indication function display in the special display LED 612c. Even if it is very difficult to grasp the instruction content from the display mode of the special display LED 612c, the player is instructed to perform a correct reel stop operation by performing the navigation display based on the instruction content. Thus, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can enhance the player's gaming interest when the instruction function display is performed.

  In addition, since the instruction function display as in the second example uses binary notation instruction function display data that is generally used in calculation processing, the main board 409 determines the instruction content of the instruction function, and the special function display data. It is possible to easily realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the content of the instruction while reducing the processing load when the display LED 612 performs the instruction function display. More specifically, it is assumed that the condition device number registered in the program (number assigned to the group when grouped) is expressed in 8-bit binary numbers, and such a condition device number is displayed as an instruction function as it is. By making it possible to output the data as instruction data with the instruction function display, it is possible to suppress unnecessary conversion processing and reduce the processing burden on the main board 409. In such a case, it is possible to realize a display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the content of the instruction without changing the condition device number to another number.

  As described above, as illustrated in the first example and the second example, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can realize the instruction function display by employing various display methods under the management of the main board 409.

[11-3-4-3. Change display mode]
Next, the change of the display mode in the display (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function display is performed will be described.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1, the instruction content based on the winning combination can be displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display. Here, since the instruction content indicated by the instruction function display is a game method (that is, an appropriate reel stop operation) that can bring a result advantageous to the player, a game timing at which the player can execute the reel stop operation. The indication function display needs to be displayed by the time. In other words, when the instruction function display is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “appropriate reel stop operation” to be executed next at a specific timing before the pressing operation on the reel stop button 211 becomes acceptable. The correct instruction content (for example, to which reel stop button 211a to 211c should be used for the stop operation) should be displayed on the special display LED 612. In the change of the display mode of the special display LED 612, “specific timing” described later has such a meaning.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a principle regarding the display timing of the instruction function display is applied to the special display LED 612, while the special display LED 612 is instructed as described in [9-3] and the like. Information other than the function display can also be displayed (for example, payout display, error display, other effects display, etc.).

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612, the display mode at the “specific timing” on the special display LED 612 is the “appropriate reel stop operation to be executed next”. As long as the instruction function display of the correct instruction content regarding “” is displayed, the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed to another display mode at a timing other than the above “specific timing”. Below, the change of the display mode in special display LED612 is demonstrated in detail.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 as described in detail below, the display mode is changed before and after the change so that the player can easily notice the change. However, other than that, it is also possible to suggest or teach the change by using a component other than the special display LED 612 so that the player can easily notice the change. Specifically, for example, a predetermined display (LED, lamp, etc.) is turned on or blinked, a specific sound is output from a speaker, or “Look at special display LED 612!” On the liquid crystal display surface of the image display body 500. An effect screen such as this may be displayed. Further, when a predetermined effect screen is displayed on the image display 500, if the progress of the effect screen that has been displayed so far is temporarily stopped, the player can be more surely aware of the display change. Can be made.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed in a manner that is easily noticed by the player in this way, the player can be sure that the display mode has been changed (or changed). Since it can be recognized, the player is given an impression that a special production different from normal is performed, and an effect of increasing the player's expectation with respect to granting a special privilege or the like is achieved. In addition, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the instruction content displayed after the change is an instruction content that can lead to a more advantageous game result.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode may be changed so as to be easily noticed by the player as described above. On the contrary, the display mode is changed in a mode that is not easily noticed by the player. May be. Specifically, it is possible to change the display on the special display LED 612 in a manner that is not easily noticed by the player, without performing an effect for making the player easily noticed. More specifically, for example, by changing the display of “8” to “0” in the special display LED 612, the difference between the lighting positions before and after the change is relatively reduced, or a dot segment with a narrow lighting area is lit (flashing). Or, it may be changed to turn off the light, or the brightness of the segment may be changed (including a change in luminance level by gradation control in addition to simple ON / OFF switching).

  The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can realize an effect as if the display mode has been changed before the player notices when the display mode is changed so that it is difficult for the player to notice. It is possible to give a big surprise to the player who notices the display change at any timing, and can enhance the game interest. Further, since it is possible to make the player aware of when the display mode is changed, the concentration on the game can be enhanced.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode is changed so that it is difficult for the player to notice when all the reels 301 are not stopped (all the reels 301 are rotating). However, it is desirable not to change the contents of the instruction regarding the first stop reel (the guide order of the reel 301 to be stopped first and the guide for the place to be pressed). When the display mode is changed in the special display LED 612, it is preferable not to change the instruction content related to the first stop reel in the instruction content by the navigation display on the image display body 500 or the like.

  In more detail, first, the reason why it is better not to change the instruction content of the pressing order is that if the instruction content related to the first stop reel is changed due to the change of the display mode, the player who does not notice the changed instruction content This is because the game is advanced in accordance with the instruction content before the change (game operation is performed in the push order contrary to the latest instruction content), which may be disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, by not changing the instruction content related to the first stop reel, it is possible to avoid the disadvantage of the player, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  In addition, the reason why it is better not to change the instruction content of the indication of the pressing place is, for example, the instruction content A as if the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol assortment is operating (for example, the pressing order is reversed, the pressing When the display mode is changed after the display mode of red 7 symbols is generated and the display mode of red 7 symbols is displayed when all reels are stopped, the reel stop button is used for the first stop. 211 (in this case, before the reel stop button 211c is pressed according to the reverse pressing), the instruction content B (for example, the instruction content) indicating that another condition device that is not aligned even when aiming at the red 7 symbol is operating. Display mode of the same stop operation as A (the instruction content indicates that red 7 symbols cannot be aligned when the third stop reel is stopped) When thus changed, because it is not aligned even aimed Red 7 symbols would be known in advance to the player, there is a possibility that the game excitement is reduced. Therefore, in such a case, the display mode after the change from the instruction content A is the instruction content C that does not contradict the instruction content A (at least, the pressing order is the first stop of the right reel, and the indication of the pressing position is red 7) By including a symbol and displaying the display content of the instruction content that does not deny the possibility of red 7 symbols being aligned when the reels are fully stopped, it is displayed before the change until the player at least stops the right reel 301c for the first stop. It is preferable to be able to expect a game result (a red 7 symbol set) along the designated instruction content A.

  In addition, as a specific example of the display mode based on the instruction content C, there may be mentioned, for example, “the pressing order is reverse pressing, and the standard of the pressing position is a red 7 symbol or a BAR symbol”. In the case of such an instruction content C, if there is no stop position at which both the red 7 symbol and the BAR symbol can be drawn in the reel band 321c (right reel 301c), when the right reel 301c is first stopped, The player can select (select) either the red 7 symbol or the BAR symbol to aim at as a guide for the pressing location. Then, when the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol alignment is operating internally, if the player performs a reel stop operation at a timing in which the player can draw the red 7 symbol in an appropriate push order, 7 Symbol alignment stops. In addition, if the condition device corresponding to the red 7 symbol alignment is not operated internally, or if the stop operation based on the proper pressing order and timing is not performed, the red 7 symbol alignment does not stop. It should be noted that the instruction content that allows the player to select the push location can be performed at the second stop and the third stop of the reel.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the instruction content (a guide to the pressing position) regarding the first stop reel is not limited to the above example (change from the instruction content A to the instruction content C). As another example, the instruction content C may be changed to the instruction content A. In such a case, while the special display LED 612 shows the display mode of the instruction content C, only the indefinite information that the red 7 symbol alignment may be stopped by reverse pressing is provided. Confirmation information that red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by reverse pressing by changing to the display mode based on instruction content A before the operation on the stop reel is performed (freeze processing may be performed in parallel). Before the reel 301 is stopped, the player can be expected to grant a privilege by red 7 assortment.

  In addition, regarding the change of the instruction content regarding the first stop reel (the standard of the pressing position), as another example, the instruction content B may be changed to the instruction content A. In such a case, while the special display LED 612 shows the display mode of the instruction content B, even when the red 7 symbol is aimed by reverse pressing, the irregular determination information that does not stop the red 7 symbol alignment is provided. By changing to the display mode based on the instruction content A before the operation on the first stop reel is performed, the confirmation information that the red 7 symbol alignment is stopped by reverse pressing is provided. Here, when the display mode change from the instruction content B to the instruction content A is performed in a manner that is easily noticed by the player, for example, by performing freeze control, the player's interest is enhanced before the reel 301 is stopped. Can be increased. On the other hand, regarding the change of the display mode from the instruction content B to the instruction content A, when the display mode is changed in a manner that is not easily noticed by the player, the player is unaware of the confirmation information of the instruction content A and the reel 301 Although it is assumed that the stop operation is performed, even in such a case, the red 7 symbols are aligned against the player's recognition that the red 7 symbols are not aligned after all the reels 301 are stopped. Can be surprised and delighted by the player, and can be expected to improve interest.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction content related to the first stop reel is intentionally changed in accordance with the change of the display mode, the stop operation for the reel stop button 211 is accepted by inserting the freeze control or the like. It is desirable to prevent the player from performing an incorrect game operation that does not conform to the changed instruction content by postponing the start time of accepting the stop button press to start the game.

  As an example of such a display mode change, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game is played in a game procedure that was not originally intended (for example, a pushing order error), the player notices it. The display mode can be changed (including erasure) in a difficult mode (details will be described later in [11-3-4-3-1]). According to such a slot machine 1, since it is possible to prevent the player from being confused about the subsequent game procedure, the game can be continued with peace of mind.

  In a conventional gaming machine, for example, when controlled to an advantageous gaming state such as an AT state, an appropriate stop operation is taught by the image display 500 or the like, but this is a monotonous one that only repeats a game according to the teaching. There was a problem of being apt to work. On the other hand, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment performs an instruction function display for instructing a stop operation on the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409, and also makes the player aware of the display mode on the special display LED 612. Since it can be changed in an easy mode or a mode that is difficult for the player to notice, diversity can be added to the game effects of the slot machine 1 unlike conventional game machines.

[11-3-4-3-1. Display change timing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function is displayed, any timing that satisfies the condition that the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is not accepted as an effective operation even if the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is performed ( The main board 409 can change the display mode of the special display LED 612 at a timing when the reel stop operation cannot be accepted. Below, the typical change timing of such a display change is given and the specific process example accompanying a display change is demonstrated.

(1) Start lever pressed to start accepting stop button press First, as a typical first change timing, when the start lever 210 is operated at the start of the game (start lever pressed), the reel stop button 211a to Examples include a period until reception of a pressing operation for 211c is started (stop button pressing reception is started). Strictly speaking, instead of changing the display mode immediately before the start of accepting the stop button press, so that the player can notice the change of the display mode before starting the stop operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, It is preferable to change the display mode at a timing at which a certain time is secured before the start of the stop button press reception.

  In the slot machine 1, when the start lever 210 is operated, an internal lottery regarding the winning combination is performed by the main board 409, and the instruction content of the instruction function display is determined based on the lottery result of the internal lottery. When the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at the first change timing described above, for example, the first display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612 at the timing after the start lever is pressed, and then the reel is stopped. Before the pressing operation on the button 211 can be accepted, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed to the second display mode.

  At this time, it is more preferable to add freeze control during rotation control of the reel 301 and change the display mode of the special display LED 612 to the second display mode during execution of the freeze control. Thus, by changing the display mode during the execution of the freeze control, the display mode can be reliably changed during the period when the reception of the pressing operation to the reel stop button 211 is not started, and some special feature is given to the player. It is also possible to realize an effect that makes it easy to notice that an effect (in this case, a change in display mode) is performed.

  In such a case, the second display mode is required to be the display mode of the instruction function display indicating the correct instruction content related to the reel 301 to be stopped, while the first display mode is correct. The display mode may be an instruction function display that is not an instruction content, or may be a display mode other than the instruction function display. A specific display mode example will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2]. Further, another display mode may be displayed between the first display mode and the second display mode.

  As described above, when the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at the first change timing, the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is changed at least once, so that a special effect is performed. Can make the player feel, and can enhance the gaming interest. In particular, when the display mode is changed during execution of freeze control, it is possible to further enhance the special feeling by sandwiching freeze control that is clearly different from normal reel control. In addition, if such a freeze control is performed when a lottery result with a high degree of rarity is obtained, the player's expectation can be significantly increased.

  Further, when the display mode is changed at the timing immediately before the first stop button press acceptance start in the first change timing, as described in [11-3-4-3], the first stop reel is used. It is desirable not to change the content of the instruction (firstly, the push order of the reel 301 to be stopped and the guide for the push position).

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the first change timing, the display mode is changed at an arbitrary timing within the period immediately after the start lever is pressed and immediately before the stop button press reception is started. be able to. In particular, when the display mode is changed at the “timing immediately before the start of first stop button press reception” in which it is difficult for the player to change the operation mode of the first stop button press, the instruction content regarding the first stop reel is maintained. However, a player's disadvantage can be avoided by changing a display mode. In addition, in the case where the display mode is changed at the “timing when a certain time is secured before the start of stop button press reception (including during freeze control)” in which the player can change the operation mode of pressing the first stop button, This change can increase the player's expectation.

(2) First stop button press to second stop button press acceptance start (or second stop button press to third stop button press acceptance start)
Next, as a representative second change timing, when one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed (for example, the first stop button is pressed), the reels corresponding to the remaining reels 301 that are rotating. Examples include a period until reception of the pressing operation of the stop button 211 is started (for example, reception of pressing of the second stop button is started). In the case of the second change timing, as in the case of the first change timing, if possible, a certain time is secured before the end of the period (for example, the start of accepting the second stop button press). It is preferable to change the display mode at the timing.

  When the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at the second change timing, for example, after the game is started and the reel 301 starts rotating, the first stop button is pressed (one of the reel stop buttons 211 is pressed first). The first display mode is displayed on the special display LED 612 until it is operated, and the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed until the pressing of the remaining stop button is started after the first stop button is pressed. Change to the second display mode.

  As a specific situation in which the display mode is changed at the second change timing, a display change originally intended and a display change not originally intended are assumed. Here, since the first display mode is displayed immediately before the first stop button is pressed, it is necessary to display an instruction function indicating “correct instruction content” at least for the first stop button. . On the other hand, as described in detail below, the second display mode can employ different types of display modes depending on whether the display change was originally intended or not intended. .

  First, the display change that was originally intended is that the display pattern on the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode in advance by the main board 409 as the game progresses ( It means a display change when it is determined (at least before the first stop button is pressed).

  In the case of such originally intended display change, a period during which the pressing operation of the second stop button (remaining reel stop button 211) cannot be accepted by executing freeze control after the first stop button is pressed. It is preferable to change the display from the first display mode to the second display mode during the freeze control. At this time, in the second display mode, an instruction function display indicating “correct instruction contents” regarding the second stop button is displayed.

  Note that when the display change is originally intended, the instruction content indicated by the first display mode does not have to be the same as the instruction content indicated by the second display mode, for example, the instruction indicated by the first display mode. The content may be “group display” regarding the first stop button, and the instruction content shown in the second display mode may be “segment display” that can specify the pressing order of all reels. “Group display” will be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

  When the instruction content indicated by the first display mode is the same as the instruction content indicated by the second display mode at the time of the display change that was originally intended, a different display mode indicating the same instruction content is used. The display may be changed. Different display modes indicating the same instruction content will also be described later in [11-3-4-3-2].

  Next, the display change that was not originally intended is performed by the main board 409 in advance (at least, the first stop button is pressed, for example, when it is performed in a game procedure in which the progress of the game is not assumed. It means that a display change that was not determined before) will be made. Specifically, when the reel stop button 211 corresponding to a reel different from the instruction content indicated by the instruction function display (in this case, the first display mode) is pressed when the first stop button is pressed, A so-called push order mistake can be considered.

  If a pressing order error occurs, for example, if a pressing order error occurs when the first stop button is pressed, the special indication LED 612 continues to display the instruction function until then for the remaining second stop button press and third stop button press. Even if it is displayed, there is a possibility that the gaming operation according to the instruction content cannot be performed. Specifically, for example, when the left reel 301a is stopped at the first stop even though the order of pressing “right, left, middle” is indicated as the instruction content, the instruction content is continued as it is. Then, the target reel to be stopped second becomes the left reel 301a that has already been stopped, which may confuse the player as to what kind of game should be performed. In such a case, the main board 409 of the slot machine 1 can be roughly divided into the following three types of control.

  The first control is control that continues to display the instruction function at this place even if a pressing order error occurs. In this case, it is not necessary to change the display from the first display mode to the second display mode. However, a second display mode with a special display mode that teaches that the pressing order is wrong is prepared, and when a pressing order error occurs, the display is changed to such a second display mode. May be. At this time, it is preferable that the image display body 500 or the like also notifies the player that a pressing order error has occurred. When such control is performed, even if the instruction content on the instruction function display is not changed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the push order has been mistaken, so that the instruction content on the instruction function display and the subsequent game Even if the procedure cannot be handled, the game can be proceeded with consent.

  The second control is a control for erasing the instruction function display that has been displayed so far when a push order error occurs. If such a control is also considered as one of the changes in the display mode, the change in the display mode eliminates the situation where the game operation according to the instruction contents cannot be performed, and prevents the player from being confused about the subsequent game procedure. can do. Further, after erasing the instruction function display in the first display form, the special display LED 612 may display a display form informing that the instruction function display is erased as the second display form. By changing the display mode in this way, the player can recognize the reason why the first display mode has disappeared, so that the continuation of the game can be promoted without causing concern about the subsequent game. Can do.

  In the third control, when a pressing order error occurs due to the pressing of the first stop button, the instruction function display is changed to the second display mode so that the instruction content indicating the operation procedure which is advantageous for the remaining stop operation is given. It is the control to change to.

  For example, in the case where the instruction function display is performed by winning the winning combination of the push order bell, where the number of medals to be paid out is 9, 2, or 1 depending on the push order, the original instruction content (first If the correct stop operation is performed in accordance with the display mode, it is possible to expect to win nine medals by winning the Bell role. However, if a push order error occurs and the reel stop button 211 different from the instruction content is firstly stopped, what happens to the subsequent two reel stop buttons 211 due to the priority operation of the condition device? Even if the stop operation is performed, it is not possible to expect 9 medals to be paid out. However, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, an operation procedure that can be expected to pay out two medals is renewed as the second display mode as an advantageous operation procedure. The instruction function can be displayed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a display change that is not originally intended is performed, the display mode is changed so that the instruction content is advantageous to the player even a little. It is possible to remedy a player who receives an unfavorable game result due to a push order mistake or the like. By providing a gaming machine capable of realizing such relief control, it can be expected to maintain the willingness to continue the game without excessively discouraging the player who has made a push order mistake.

  In the example of the push order bell described above, the maximum number of payouts (9) could not be expected when the push order was wrong with the first stop button, but in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the first Even if the order of pressing with the stop button is wrong, the remaining stop operation was performed aiming at a specific pattern and a specific pressing order in the form corresponding to each winning role of the pressing order small role as the pressing order of the rescue measure. In this case, a “relief push order” that can be expected for the maximum number of payouts may be prepared. If a push order error occurs, the player can change the display to the second display mode that uses such a relief push order as an instruction content, so that even if the push order is wrong, Since a medal acquisition opportunity can be provided, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming interests.

  Further, when the display on the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode by the third control described above, image output by the image display body 500, audio output by a speaker, etc. are used in combination. It is preferable to ensure that the player can detect the change.

  The above is the typical change timing when the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed when the instruction function display is performed, but the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is not limited to these change timings. As long as the operation of pressing the reel stop button 211 is not accepted, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed at other timings (for example, after all reels 301 are stopped or after the payout process is completed). Can do.

  In this way, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment changes the display mode of the special display LED 612 according to the progress of the game at a predetermined change timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 is not accepted even during the game. Can be changed. In particular, even when a game operation that is not originally intended, such as a push order error, is performed, by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 based on the game operation, appropriate instruction content for the next game operation Can be shown. As a result, even if an inappropriate game operation is performed in an unintentional manner such as a push order error, it is possible to provide relief for the game and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, in the conventional gaming machine, the player's line of sight tends to concentrate only on the reel and the effect display device (corresponding to the reel 301 and the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1), and the player's interest in the entire gaming machine. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode on the indicator (special display LED 612) in which the instruction function is displayed is changed at a timing when the reel stop operation by the player is not accepted. Therefore, the player's interest can be gathered for the display. As a result, it can be expected that the player's interest in the entire gaming machine is increased as compared with the conventional gaming machine by expanding the attention target by the player.

[11-3-4-3-2. Display change example]
Hereinafter, display change examples other than those described above will be given regarding the change in the display mode of the special display LED 612 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

(1) Display change between instruction function displays First, a display change example in which the display mode is changed between instruction function displays in the special display LED 612 will be described. As described above, in the instruction function display, one or a plurality of instruction function display modes may be set for one instruction content. Therefore, when the instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612, another display mode (for example, the above-described display mode) indicating the same instruction content as the display mode from the one display mode (for example, the above-described first display mode) is performed. The second display mode can be changed.

  64 and 65 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining display examples of instruction function display in which a plurality of display modes are set. “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” shown in FIG. 64 are examples of indication function display on the special display LED 612a, and “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” shown in FIG. 65 are special display LEDs 612b. It is an example of a display of the indication function display in. Note that “segment display 1” in FIGS. 64 and 65 is the same as the display example of “segment display” in FIGS.

  64 and 65, “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” are set as a plurality of display examples indicating the same instruction content in the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). Looking at the individual displays, the display examples “0” to “3” of “Seg display 1” in the special display LED 612a respectively correspond to “4” to “7” in the “Seg display 2” display example. 64 (FIG. 64), corresponding to display examples “0” to “F” of “Seg display 1” on the special display LED 612b, respectively, “F” to “0” are displayed in the display example of “Seg display 2”. They are set in the reverse order of the case of segment display 1 (FIG. 65).

  When comparing “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2”, the display on the special display LED 612 (the display combining the special display LEDs 612a and 612b) shows the instruction function display of the same instruction content. , The segment display will always be different. As a specific example, the display of “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” will be described when the indication of the pressing location is “Red 7 symbol” and the pressing order is “Right / Middle / Left”. First, in the case of “Seg display 1”, the special display LED 612a displays “2” corresponding to the guide position of the “red 7 symbol” and the special display LED 612b displays “right / middle / left”. “6” corresponding to the pressing order is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of “Seg display 2”, “6” corresponding to the guide position of “Red 7 design” is displayed on the special display LED 612a, and “Right, middle, “9” corresponding to the order of pressing “left” is displayed. That is, in the special display LED 612 as a whole, “26” is displayed in the case of “Seg display 1”, and “69” is displayed in the case of “Seg display 2”. Display.

  Then, “Seg display 1” and “Seg display 2” shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are set as the first display mode and the second display mode described in [11-3-4-3-1]. Thus, the display mode of the special display LED 612 (612a, 612b) can be changed while the instruction function display indicates the same instruction content. In the specific example described above, the display mode “26” can be changed to the display mode “69”. In this way, by changing the display between display modes that are easy to identify, in the slot machine 1, the game is as if the instruction content shown on the special display LED 612 is changed at first glance to the player. Even if it is possible to realize an effect, and even if the instruction content before and after the change of the display mode can be grasped, when the display mode is changed with the same instruction content, a special effect is performed An impression can be given and the expectation with respect to a game result can be heightened.

  As another example of the display change between the instruction function displays, as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, the instruction function display in the display mode (hereinafter also referred to as “clear display mode”) that is easy to identify, As shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the display function that is difficult to identify (hereinafter, also referred to as “unclear display mode”) is used as the instruction function display, and these are displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. As an alternative, the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed. 58 and 59 are different from each other in that two 7-segment LEDs without dots are used, and FIGS. 61 and 62 use one 7-segment LED with dots. If this is used, it is possible to display with a 7-segment LED without dots, so the influence of this difference is eliminated.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player changes the degree of clarity of the display mode in the special display LED 612 by changing the display between the “clear display mode” and the “unclear display mode”. This can increase the player's expectation for the game. In particular, when the display mode is changed from “unclear display mode” to “clear display mode”, clear information will be provided to the player, such as easier to grasp the contents of the instruction. , The player's expectation can be further increased.

  In addition, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform a display change that makes the display clarity of the special display LED 612 variable, so that the display change is performed in a manner that is easily noticed by the player. It is possible to give a strong impression to the player that various effects are occurring. Furthermore, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can make the player aware of the possibility that the display mode of the instruction function display may change for each game. There is an effect of increasing interest in the LED 612 and enhancing the entertainment interest of the game.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the display mode in the special display LED 612 is not limited to one change that changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. When a specific example is given with reference to FIG. 59, when a 6-selection push-order bell combination with an appropriate reverse press is selected as the winning combination, the first display mode in the special display LED 612b is “right first Assuming that “C” indicating the pressing order of “(2 options)” is displayed, “C” is then displayed in a period that satisfies the display change timing conditions as described in [11-3-4-3-1]. ”And“ 6 ”are alternately displayed at high speed, and“ 6 ”indicating the pressing order of“ right / middle / left ”is displayed as the final second display mode. Good. When such a display mode change is performed, even if “C” is displayed on the special display LED 612b until the first stop button is pressed, the reel stop button 211c should be first stopped. Since there is no change, the instruction function display of the correct instruction content is performed. This is the same even if “6” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. If the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to “6” before the second stop button is pressed, it becomes clear that the reel stop button 211b should be secondly operated. Stop operation can be performed in the proper pressing order. On the other hand, if the display mode of the special display LED 612b remains “C” until the second stop button is pressed, the player can select the reel stop button for the second stop operation from one of the reel stop buttons 211a and 211b. However, if the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed to “6” after that, an answer in an appropriate push order in the game is displayed (correct answer display).

  In addition, when the correct answer display regarding the stop operation is performed by changing the display mode in this way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the special display LED 612 is limited to an appropriate push order and the main correct answer display (for example, , Teaching whether or not the answer is correct) may be performed by a display (for example, the image display 500) managed by the sub-board 510. However, if the correct display is performed by changing the display mode of the special display LED 612 before all the reels 301 are stopped (before all the reels are stopped), the instruction content indicated as the correct stop operation in the changed display mode. However, there is a possibility of instructing a stop operation for a reel that has already been stopped. Therefore, it is desirable to change the display mode on the special display LED 612 after the reels are completely stopped to display an appropriate push order (correct push order), and to turn off the special display LED 612 after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is desirable to do. However, even if the reel 301 is stopped in a pressing order that is not correct, if there is a payout of medals (game value), the correct pressing order is not displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. It is desirable to make the special display LED 612 perform a payout display immediately after the reels are completely stopped. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by performing the correct answer display process as described above, it is possible to entertain the player through the unit game while preventing a decrease in interest due to the answer being understood during the game. .

  In addition, when the display mode is changed with the high-speed change as described above, the display mode indicating the correct instruction content is included in the display modes to be changed at high speed, and finally any one of the display modes is changed. It may be displayed, or after a high-speed change is made in a state where a display mode indicating correct instruction content is not included, a display mode indicating correct instruction content may be finally displayed. If a plurality of types of change patterns for high-speed change are prepared, the degree of expectation can be made different depending on the change pattern, so that gameability can be improved. It should be noted that such a display mode change pattern is not limited to the “high-speed” change, and may be any change pattern that allows the player to recognize that the display mode has changed. Specifically, for example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds. Also, for example, the display mode is changed to the shortest time from when the start lever 210 is pressed to when the stop button is pressed (the time required when the wait timer is up and there is no so-called wait). Also good. Further, for example, assuming that the reel 301 has the farthest index position, the display mode may be changed according to the time required for the reel 301 to go around.

  Further, as another example of the display change between the instruction function displays, there is an example in which the grouped instruction function display display mode is used. Here, the “display mode of grouped instruction function display” means a display mode (group display) that is set in correspondence with a group, in which a plurality of instruction contents are grouped according to a predetermined rule. For example, it is possible to group instruction contents having the same reel (reel stop button) to be stopped first.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of group display in the instruction function display. FIG. 66 shows a display example in the special display LED 612b, and descriptions other than the “group display” column are the same as those in FIG. According to FIG. 66, for the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 1, 2, 7, and 10) that the reel to be stopped first is the left reel 301a, a group display of “L” is performed. For the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 3, 4, 8, and 11) that the reel to be stopped is the middle reel 301b, the group display “c” is performed. With respect to the instruction content (specifically, Nos. 4, 5, 9, and 12) that is the right reel 301c, the group display “r” is performed.

  When the display mode of the special display LED 612b is changed using the “group display” shown in FIG. 66, as the first display mode, the “group display” of the correct instruction content relating to the reels to be stopped first is displayed as the special display LED 612b. As a second display mode, the special display LED 612b displays “seg display” of the correct instruction content regarding the reels to be stopped after the second. Specifically, for example, when a 6-selection push bell combination with an appropriate push order is selected as the winning combination, “r” is displayed as the first display mode, and then [11-3 “6” is displayed as the second display mode in the period that satisfies the condition of the timing of the display change as described in -4-3-1]. When such a display change is performed, while the first display mode is displayed, the player can obtain only information that the right reel 301c should be stopped first. Since the information on the reels to be stopped after the second time can be obtained at the time of the change, the display mode can be changed.

  It should be noted that the display change between the indication function displays as described above is particularly in a game period (for example, a chance zone) in which the degree of privilege grant is changed depending on whether or not the proper push order is correct. High effect can be brought about. That is, a player who is playing during such a game period is eager to change the display mode from the partial instruction content to the complete instruction content, and pay attention to the display trend on the special display LED 612. Therefore, not only can the gameability be improved, but also the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 can be increased.

(2) Display change between instruction function display and other than instruction function display As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is pressed against the reel stop button 211. Since it is only necessary to indicate the correct instruction content regarding the “appropriate reel stop operation” to be executed next at a specific timing when the operation can be accepted, for example, a game period before (or after) the specific timing The display mode other than the instruction function display may be displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, in the following, as a display change example between the instruction function display and other than the instruction function display, in the special display LED 612, a simple display change example from the display form other than the instruction function display to the display form of the instruction function display Show.

  For example, a 7-segment LED is used as the special display LED 612, and the display mode of the special display LED 612 is changed from the first display mode to the second at the first change timing described in [11-3-4-3-1]. Assume that the display mode is changed. A segment display of “0” to “3” is prepared as the first display mode. This first display mode is a display mode other than the instruction function display, that is, a display mode that is not included in the “segment display” used in the instruction function display, and the instruction content is not associated. On the other hand, segment displays “4” to “7” are prepared as the second display mode. The second display mode is a display mode used in the instruction function display, and the instruction content is associated with each.

  In such a case, first, after the start lever is pressed, “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612 as the first display mode, and the freeze control of the reel 301 is executed before the stop button press acceptance is started. Then, during the execution of the freeze control, the display mode of the special display LED 612 is sequentially changed to “1”, “2”, and “3”. “5” is displayed. Thereafter, the stop button press acceptance is started after the freeze control is ended, and the player performs a stop operation of the reel stop button 211 according to the instruction content indicated by the display mode of “5”. Here, “5” displayed in the second display mode is determined in advance based on the winning combination lottery result. By changing the display mode in this way, what was initially displayed as “0” is increased and displayed during freeze control. it can. And if a game result that is more advantageous as the final numerical value is higher can be obtained, the player can be greatly interested in the change result of the display mode.

  In the above simple example, the display mode other than the instruction function display uses a display similar to the display mode by the instruction function display (in this example, both are similar in terms of numbers), so that the display mode is changed. Can make the player feel continuity. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to use a similar display, and the display may be changed from a display that is clearly different from the display mode by the instruction function display. In such a case, when a different display is displayed on the special display LED 612, it is possible to make the player foresee that the display mode will be changed, and to increase the player's expectation.

(3) Other Display Modification Examples The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can realize the instruction function display by using various display methods under the control of the main board 409. The example of a display change in display LED612 is shown.

  As an example of such a display change, as a display (special display LED 612) that performs an instruction function display, display change may be performed using a different type of display from the segment LED that has been used so far. . Such another type of display corresponds to, for example, a segment LED (so-called full color LED display) capable of displaying a plurality of colors, a liquid crystal display, a dot display, a lamp, and the like.

  For example, when the special display LED 612 is a full-color LED display, the display color can be changed to red when the display mode is changed while the instruction function display is normally performed in green. In general, if the player is more likely to notice red than green, the player can easily notice the change in display mode by changing the display color and changing the display mode in this way. be able to. In addition, when the display colors of the normal time and the changed time are visually similar colors (for example, colors of warm colors such as red and orange, and colors of cold colors such as blue and purple). Can be added with a fine gameability that only a player who plays while carefully watching the display color in the special display LED 612 can quickly detect that the display mode is changed.

  Further, for example, when the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, the display color can be changed as well as the full color LED display, and the brightness of the display itself can be changed. That is, when the display mode is changed, if the display brightness of the special display LED 612 is set higher than usual, the player can feel that the display mode will be changed, and the effect of enhancing the gaming interest Can be expected. In addition, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case where the segment LED is used.

  Further, for example, when the special display LED 612 is a dot display, various display modes can be realized as compared with the case where the segment LED is used. Note that the dot display has advantages over the liquid crystal display in terms of suppression of power consumption and monotonous control signals, although the variety of display modes is inferior to the liquid crystal display. Further, even when the special display LED 612 is a liquid crystal display, a dot display, or the like as described above, the fact that these are managed by the main board 409 remains the same.

  As described above, as described in [11-3-4-3] and thereafter, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine that displays an instruction function display on the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409. The display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed during one game (unit game). Here, the basic flow of instruction function display in the slot machine 1 is determined based on the winning combination selected in the internal lottery (winning combination lottery) regarding the winning combination, and the instruction function instruction content is determined. An instruction function display showing the contents is performed. The winning combination lottery is performed only once in the unit game. Therefore, from the player's viewpoint, the instruction function display is shown in one display mode based on the winning combination. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, since the display mode of the special display LED 612 can be changed in the unit game, the special display is performed even though the winning combination does not change in the unit game. A plurality of types of display modes can be displayed by the LED 612. As a result, an impression can be given to the player as if the lottery result has changed in the unit game. Specifically, even if a display mode (for example, “00” in the instruction function display in the first example) indicating an instruction content with a high possibility of a low expectation role is shown, the possibility of a high expectation role is high. An effect that can be expected to change to a display mode indicating the content of the instruction (for example, “2C” in the instruction function display of the first example), and the effect of maintaining the player's gaming interest throughout the entire unit game Play.

  Further, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can increase the importance of the special display LED 612 in the entire slot machine 1 by making it possible to change the display mode of the special display LED 612 within the unit game as described above. It is possible to provide a gaming style in which the game is advanced while paying attention to the special display LED 612. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, compared to a conventional gaming machine that tends to place excessive emphasis on presentation display on a liquid crystal display (corresponding to the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1). By providing a novel gaming style, it is possible to enhance the gaming interest of the player.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a carry-over combination (for example, a bonus combination such as “BB1” shown in FIG. 49) that can carry over the winning flag after the next game is selected as the winning combination. When the instruction function display is performed, the instruction function display does not have to be completed in one game of the winning game, and the instruction function display is displayed over a plurality of games from the winning game or subsequent games. May be. Specifically, for example, when a winning combination winning combination BB (carry-over combination) and a watermelon combination (non-carry-over combination) are simultaneously selected, the winning game shows an instruction content for aligning the symbol combinations of the BB combination. Assume that the instruction function display is performed. However, in this winning game, if the symbol combination of the BB role does not stop on the active line and the BB role does not win, the instruction function display displayed in the winning game is continuously displayed until the next game. It may be. Further, even if the instruction function display is once turned off between the winning game and the next game, the instruction function display of the next game may be performed in such a display manner as to take over the instruction function display of the winning game. By doing in this way, the slot machine 1 of this embodiment enables instruction function display over a plurality of games, teaches an opportunity to obtain an advantageous result for the player beyond the unit game (one game), and Can greatly enhance the expectation of the person.

[11-3-5. Instruction generation effect processing]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main board 409 performs the instruction function display by the special display LED 612 based on the result of the instruction function generation process, while displaying the same information as the display contents (instruction contents) in the instruction function display. By transmitting the instruction information command, the instruction contents are notified to the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510). As described above with reference to FIG. 53, the instruction information command transmitted from the main board 409 to the peripheral board when the instruction function is generated can identify the group including the winning combination selected in the game. Sent in the form (command in which the winning combination is grouped).

  A specific example of such a command in which winning combinations are grouped will be described. First, for example, when a push order bell role (for convenience, “AT1”) with a proper push order is selected in the internal lottery and all proper push orders are displayed in the instruction function display, As a command in which the winning combination is grouped, information such as “winning the forward push order bell group” is notified. Here, in addition to “AT1”, assuming that a push order bell role “AT2 (name for convenience)” with a proper push order as a push order is also prepared, “AT2” is also a “forward push order group”. Are grouped together. Therefore, even when “AT2” is selected as the winning combination when all appropriate pressing orders are displayed in the instruction function display, the same command as in the case of “AT1” is notified. Also, for example, when “AT1” is selected as the winning combination and only the first stop reel is displayed in the proper push order in the instruction function display, “first stop is a command that groups the winning combinations” Information such as “I won the push order bell group which is the left reel” is notified. Further, if “AT3” and “AT4” are also prepared as other push order bell roles in which the first stop in the proper push order is the left reel, the winning roles “AT2” to “AT4” are “ The first stop is grouped into a “push order bell group that is the left reel”. Therefore, when only the first stop reel is displayed in the proper push order in the instruction function display, the case where any one of “AT2” to “AT4” is selected as the winning combination is the same as the case of “AT1”. The command will be notified. The sub-board 510 that has received such an instruction information command displays an instruction generation effect (so-called navigation display) in accordance with the display content of the instruction function display on the image display body 500 or the like (instruction generation effect processing).

  That is, when the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment generates the instruction function, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function while the navigation display having the same content as the instruction content in the instruction function is displayed on the image display body 500. Thus, the instruction content is notified in a manner that is more easily recognized by the player.

  52, the navigation display display mode controlled by the sub-board 510 has a one-to-one relationship with the instruction function display display mode controlled by the main board 409. There is no need, and if the display content does not violate the instruction content displayed by the instruction function display, the sub-board 501 may determine a display mode for navigation display from a plurality of display modes (one-to-n correspondence relationship) ).

  FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining a specific display example of the instruction function display of the first example. In FIG. 67, a display example of the navigation display is shown in a form corresponding to the display examples of the instruction function display exemplified in FIGS. According to FIG. 67, first, when the instruction function display is “00”, this is a case where “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a and “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. At this time, since there is no substantial instruction content, the player does not need to aim for a special symbol, and may select the pressing order arbitrarily. Such a display is performed when, for example, a replay of any order is selected during AT. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation display, “?” Is displayed on all reels.

  Next, when the instruction function display is “02”, this is a case where “0” is displayed on the special display LED 612a and “2” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. However, it is not necessary to aim for a special symbol, but it is required to stop the reel 301 in the stopping order of pinching push (left, right, middle). Such a display is performed when the “AT3” or “AT4” push order bell is won during AT. Therefore, as a display example of the navigation display, “1” is displayed at the corresponding position of the left reel 301a, “3” is displayed at the corresponding position of the middle reel 301b, and “2” is displayed at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c. The order of stopping right and middle pinching pushes is taught. In this navigation display, further, based on the content of the instruction information command that the push order bell is won, the display color of the image indicating the stop order is changed to yellow reminiscent of the bell, or the reel to be stopped next (for example, When all the reels 301 are rotating, the reels are stopped first. When two reels are rotating, the reels are stopped second). It may be highlighted.

  In the navigation display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction content displayed on the image display body 500 may be notified (or assisted) by voice output. Specifically, the reel to be stopped first. Is a left reel 301a, an example in which a sound such as “It's left!” Is output at the timing before the first stop of the reel is performed. When performing voice output, different voice outputs (for example, character, dialogue, etc.) based on the type of winning role (bell role, replay role, rare role, etc.), gaming status (high accuracy status, low accuracy status, etc.), etc. Different intonation etc.) can be used properly. By performing navigation display including voice output in this way, notification of instruction contents to the player can be made more reliable, and navigation display with changes depending on the game situation can be provided to enhance the player's interest Can be expected.

  Next, when the instruction function display is “2C”, this is a case where “2” is displayed on the special display LED 612a and “C” is displayed on the special display LED 612b. Is required to stop the right reel 301c first while aiming at the red 7 symbol, and then, for either the left reel 301a or the middle reel 301b, a selection to stop second while aiming at the red 7 symbol is required. It is done. Although not illustrated in FIG. 49, for example, when preparing a special replay combination having a different stop type depending on the pressing order, by displaying such an instruction function when the special replay combination is won, an appropriate pressing order is displayed. When the stop operation is performed, it is possible to realize a reel effect such that a specific symbol set stops. Accordingly, as a display example of the navigation, “1” is indicated at the corresponding position of the right reel 301c, and “?” Meaning the stop order is unknown at the corresponding positions of the other reels 301a and 301b. Teaches only the first stop of the right reel 301c. Furthermore, in order to teach the guide of the pressing place, an effect display “Aim for the red 7 symbol” is performed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the instruction function display and the navigation display can be displayed in parallel, so that the instruction content by the instruction function can be transmitted to the player more reliably.

  FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period by various displays and the like. In FIG. 68, various types of indicators and the like are described on the vertical axis, and display periods such as the timing of display and transmission in one game progress process shown in the horizontal axis direction are shown. .

  First, each item described on the vertical axis of FIG. 68 will be described. In the following description, other timing charts are used in the same format. However, since the timing charts are viewed in the same manner, description of items is omitted.

  The instruction information 801 corresponds to an instruction information command. When the instruction information 801 is ON, it means “transmission”, and the instruction information command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510. When the instruction information 801 is OFF, it means “standby”, and the instruction information command is not transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510.

  The instruction function 802 corresponds to an instruction function controlled by the main board 409. When the instruction function 802 is ON, it means “display” and the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function. When the instruction function 802 is OFF, it means “non-display” and the special function LED 612 does not display the instruction function.

  The payout number 803 corresponds to the number of game values to be paid out as a result of the game. When the payout number 803 is ON, it means “display”, and the special display LED 612 displays the payout number. When the payout number 803 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and the special display LED 612 does not display the payout number. Information regarding the number of payouts is stored in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409, and can be displayed again even after the power is turned off, depending on the storage location in the RAM 1114 and program processing.

  The seg error 804 corresponds to the details (for example, type and content) of the error being displayed on the segment LED when the error is detected. When the seg error 804 is ON, it means “display” and the special display LED 612. Details of the error are notified at (error display). When the segment error 804 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and no error display is performed on the special display LED 612.

  The liquid crystal navigation 805 corresponds to the navigation display of the instruction function controlled by the sub-board 510. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is ON, it means “display”, and the navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. When the liquid crystal navigation 805 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and no navigation display is performed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In the liquid crystal navigation 805, navigation display is performed with contents that do not contradict the display contents in the instruction function 802. Although detailed explanation is omitted, data related to the display by the sub board 510 such as the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 is stored in the RAM 1122 of the sub board 510, and the data can be read back as appropriate even when the power is cut off. And

  The liquid crystal error 806 is equivalent to displaying details (for example, type and content) of the error on the liquid crystal display when the error is detected, and means “display” when the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. The details of the error are reported on the liquid crystal screen of the display 500. When the liquid crystal error 806 is OFF, it means “non-display”, and details of the error are not notified on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500. In addition, in the liquid crystal error 806, an error is notified with a content that does not contradict the notification in the seg error 804.

  The error occurrence 807 indicates an error occurrence state, but in this figure, it may be read that the main board 409 detects the error. When the error occurrence 807 is ON, it means that an error has occurred at the timing when the error is turned ON (error has been detected). When the error occurrence 807 is OFF, no error has occurred (error has been detected) Does not mean). If the error occurrence 807 is turned off after being turned on, it means that the error has been resolved at the timing when the error occurrence 807 is turned off.

  The display and transmission from the instruction information 801 to the seg error 804 are managed by the main board 409, and the display of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and the liquid crystal error 806 is managed by the sub board 510.

  In FIG. 68 and other drawings, the “first stop button” is the reel stop button 211 that is first pressed among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c corresponding to the rotating reels 301a to 301c. Means that. Similarly, the “second stop button” means the reel stop button 211 in which the reel 301 is stopped second, and the “third stop button” is the third (ie, last) reel 301. Means that the reel stop button 211 has been operated.

  Next, a display period (including a transmission period) of each display shown in FIG. 68 will be described. The timing chart of FIG. 68 is shown in a situation where the game has progressed without an error in the game in which the instruction function is determined to be executed, and no payout has occurred in the game.

  In FIG. 68, according to the instruction information 801, the instruction information command is transmitted when the start lever 210 is pressed. Further, according to the instruction function 802, the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 ends the stop operation for all the reels 301 from the timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted (pressing the third stop button). Is displayed. Further, according to the liquid crystal navigation 805, the navigation display is started from the start of the rotation of the reel 301, and the display end timing is the same as the instruction function display. In the example of FIG. 68, the start of the navigation display is preceded by the start of the instruction function display, but the navigation display is displayed based on the contents of the instruction information command, and the contents of the instruction information command are the instructions. Since it is the same as the instruction content in the function display, the navigation display is still performed with the same content as the instruction function display. However, the display order is not necessarily limited to this.

  In the timing chart of FIG. 68, the “stop button press acceptance start” timing and the instruction function 802 turn on seem to be the same, but strictly speaking, after the reel stop button 211 press acceptance is started. The display of the instruction function is not started by the special display LED 612. That is, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the “display” of the instruction function 802 is performed prior to the timing of “stop button press acceptance start”, and in the processing on the program by the CPU 1118 of the main board 409. In addition, the instruction function display is executed prior to the timing when the acceptance of the stop button press is started. The timings for the “stop button press acceptance start” and “instruction function display” are the same in the timing charts shown in other examples.

  In FIG. 68, the start timing of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is set as the timing at which the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211 can be accepted, and the start timing of the navigation display on the image display body 500 is set at the start of the rotation of the reel 301. However, these are examples of display timing. That is, in the slot machine 1, the above-described display (instruction function display and display navigation) is performed at an arbitrary timing in a period from when the start lever 210 is pressed to when the reel stop button 211 is pressed. May be started.

  Next, an example of a display period in a situation different from that in FIG. 68 will be described. FIG. 69 is a timing chart showing another example of the display period by various displays and the like. The timing chart of FIG. 69 is the same as FIG. 68 in that the game has progressed without an error in the game in which the instruction function is determined to be executed, but shows the situation in which a payout has occurred in the game. Is different. In FIG. 69, in addition to the game progress shown on the horizontal axis of FIG. 68, after the reels are completely stopped, the payout of game value (medal) is started, and the payout is completed. And “medal insertion (BET possible)” for starting the next game are added.

  According to FIG. 69, when the game value is paid out, the special display LED 612 displays the payout number, and the special display LED 612 also displays the instruction function until “third stop button is pressed”. It can be seen that the display period does not overlap with the display. Also, in FIG. 69, the period during which the instruction function 802 is displayed is “until the third stop button is pressed”, but as another example, it may be displayed continuously until “payout start”. Even in such a case, the display period of the instruction function 802 does not overlap with the display period of the payout number 803.

[11-3-6. Instruction function related processing]
The instruction function related processing is a case where the instruction display is not displayed on the special display LED 612, but the sub board 510 displays a predetermined effect screen related to the instruction function (for example, an effect screen display corresponding to some continuous effect). It is a process for performing etc.

  When the execution is determined in the instruction function related process, the sub board 510 displays a predetermined effect screen using the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500 or the like. Note that the start timing of the instruction function-related process does not necessarily have to be after completion of the instruction function generation process (step S61 in FIG. 57). For example, it may be performed in parallel from the middle of the instruction function generation process. In such a case, the time required for the overall processing can be shortened, but it is preferable that the timing is at least after the timing at which the above-described instruction information command and conditional device command can be received.

[11-3-7. Expectation level display process]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described in [11-3-4] and after, the instruction content based on the winning combination is displayed on the special display LED 612 by the control process (instruction function display process) performed by the main board 409. (Instruction content regarding a predetermined game operation) can be displayed as an instruction function display. Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game is performed by playing the game on the display (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function is displayed by another control process (expected degree display process) performed by the main board 409. An expectation display (hereinafter referred to as “expectation display”) suggesting the degree of expectation for the privilege that can be performed can be displayed. Hereinafter, such “expected degree display” will be described in detail.

  Note that the expectation level display process by the main board 409 is an arbitrary process from the start of the internal lottery process (step S3) to the end of the unit game in the process procedure of one game (unit game) shown in FIG. The expectation level display on the special display LED 612 is performed at an appropriate timing according to various specific examples of the expectation level display described later. Further, the expectation level display need not always be displayed in a game in which the instruction function display is performed. For example, the expectation level display may be performed without displaying the instruction function display, or the expectation level display may not be performed. Only the instruction function display may be performed.

  In addition, the expectation level display is a display that suggests the degree of expectation for a privilege that can be given by playing a game. In this case, the “privilege” can include various benefits that are advantageous to the player. . Specifically, confirmation of advantageous games (bonus games, AT games, etc.), transition to advantageous AT lottery game conditions (highly accurate state, super-highly accurate state, etc.), advantageous game stock and extended period (AT stock, The addition of the number of AT games, etc.) and the payout of game value (medals) associated with winning a symbol combination based on the winning combination, etc., all correspond to “privileges”. In addition, when there is a special state (an example of a so-called chance zone) in which an advantageous game can be executed based on whether or not the correct push order is answered correctly, so-called stocking of the proper push order (so-called) , Navistock) can also be included in the “privilege”.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an expectation level indication indicating the degree of expectation can be performed for at least one of these benefits. Note that the “expectation degree” for the benefit may be an expectation degree (for example, a bonus or AT winning expectation degree) with respect to whether or not the above-mentioned privilege is given, or an expectation degree (AT game) with respect to the above-mentioned privilege grant amount. (Expectation of the number of extra games in the extra number). In the case of the degree of expectation with respect to whether or not a privilege is granted, any display method of percent display or level display described later may be used. Because of the difficulty, the level display is preferable to the percentage display. In addition, in the case of the degree of expectation for the amount of privilege granted, the amount of privilege that can be expected may be displayed in the expectation level display.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main board 409 manages the expectation display because the main board 409 manages all of the lottery, the instruction function display, and the above-mentioned privilege grant processing related to the winning combination. As a result, the reliability of the expectation level display can be increased. Note that the degree of expectation indicated by the degree of expectation display does not always need to be the actual degree of expectation related to the provision of benefits, and the main board 409 may determine and display the degree of expectation in effect. However, in the case of “determined display” or “premier display” described later, in order not to discourage the player, the display should be allowed only in situations where benefits are always granted based on actual expectations. Is preferred.

[11-3-7-1. Expectation display mode (first type)]
In the expectation level display process, the main board 409 selects a display mode of the expected level display to be displayed on the special display LED 612 from a plurality of display modes prepared in advance (for example, display data is stored in the ROM 1112 or the like). . Here, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the expectation level display can be performed by any one of a plurality of display modes that can be used for the instruction function display. Hereinafter, the expected level display according to such a display mode is referred to as “first type expected level display”. When performing the first type of expectation level display, it is not necessary to prepare a new display mode for displaying the expectation level. Therefore, display mode data (for example, stored in the ROM 1112 or the like) prepared in advance for displaying the instruction function is not necessary. It is possible to display the degree of expectation by diverting.

  In the following, the display mode in which the instruction function display and the expected level display are performed in the slot machine 1 in which the first type of expected level display is performed will be described with specific examples of patterns 1 and 2.

(1) Pattern 1
70 and 71 are diagrams (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the first type expectation level display (Pattern 1). FIG. 70 shows a display example of the instruction function display. 71 shows a display example of the expectation level display. In this pattern, it is assumed that special display LEDs 612a and 612b are used as an example of a display on which an instruction function display and an expectation level display are performed. At this time, the display mode of the instruction function display and the display mode of the expectation level display are displayed by a two-digit display combining the display of the two segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b).

  First, FIG. 70 (A) shows a display example of the special display LED 612a for displaying information indicating an indication of a pressing position in the instruction function display. FIG. 70 (B) shows a display example of the special display LED 612b that displays information indicating the pressing order in the instruction function display. The display example of FIG. 70B is the same as the display example of the special display LED 612b in the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIG. 59, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The display example of FIG. 70A is an extension based on the display example of the special display LED 612a in the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIG. More specifically, in FIG. 58, there are four types of segments in a one-to-one correspondence with the four types of instruction contents (“unspecified”, “chance symbol”, “red 7 symbol”, “BAR symbol”). Display patterns (“0” to “3”) have been prepared. In the case of FIG. 70A, 16 types of segment display patterns (“ 0 ”to“ 9 ”,“ A ”to“ F ”). For example, when “0”, “4”, “8”, and [C] are displayed on the special display LED 612a as the instruction function display, all indicate the instruction content “not specified”. It should be noted that which of the display modes having the same instruction content with respect to the push location guideline is selected (in the above example, “0”, “4”, “8”, or [C] is selected). It may be determined according to a predetermined processing procedure, or may be selected at random.

  70 (A) and 70 (B), the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) can display an instruction function consisting of two-digit characters or numbers. By the display, it is possible to indicate the instruction content based on a predetermined game operation (a guide to the pressing place and a pressing order) in the game. Specifically, for example, when “21”, “61”, “A1”, or “E1” is displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display, "Is the instruction content of the instruction function display.

  Next, FIG. 71A is a display example of the special display LED 612a in the expected level display, and FIG. 71B is a display example of the special display LED 612b in the expected level display. As shown in FIGS. 71A and 71B, the expectation level display by the special display LEDs 612a and 612b is performed by a segment display of “0” to “9” or “F”, respectively. 71A and 71B, the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) can display an expectation level consisting of two-digit characters or numbers. The expected level of privilege can be suggested by the display.

  Here, the expectation degree indicated by the above-described two-digit expectation degree display will be described with a specific example. Note that this expectation level display is the same in other expectation level displays (expectation level display by the first type pattern 2 and the second type patterns 1 and 2) described later.

  When a two-digit number from “00” to “99” is displayed on the special display LED 612, the percentage of the expected degree can be displayed. That is, in the case of the lowest value “00 (0%)”, the privilege cannot be expected, and in the case of the highest value “99 (99%)”, the privilege can be expected to be much.

  In addition, when the display of the upper digit in the expectation display by the special display LED 612 (that is, the segment display of the special display LED 612a) is “F”, the grant of the privilege is confirmed or the grant amount is greater than or equal to the predetermined amount. It shall indicate the “confirmation status” in which the grant of the privilege is confirmed. Accordingly, when “F” is displayed on the special display LED 612a, “determined display” is performed regardless of the segment display of the special display LED 612b.

  Further, when the segment display of both the special display LEDs 612a and 612b is “F” (that is, when the segment display of the special display LED 612 is “FF”), the special display is more special among the above-described final display. Display. When the premier display appears, the special control with high rarity is performed by performing freeze control of the reel 301 in parallel or executing a specific display effect on the image display body 500 controlled by the sub-board 510. It is preferable to emphasize that this is a situation. In addition, when the premier display appears, a larger privilege may be given than when other definitive displays appear.

  When the first type expectation level display (pattern 1) is performed in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the display mode (see FIGS. 71A and 71B) used in the expectation level display is as follows. This corresponds to one of a plurality of display modes (combination of the segment display shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B) used in the instruction function display. For example, the display of “91” in the special display LED 612 can indicate the instruction content “stop operation of forward pressing aiming at the“ chance pattern ”” in the case of the instruction function display, while “ 91% "can be expected.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is desirable to use the numerical information used for the instruction function display for the expectation display, assuming the case where the expectation is suggested as described above. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, for example, it is possible to use only the alphabet so that the expected degree is difficult to understand at first glance. In this case, even if the alphabet is displayed on the special display LED 612, it is difficult for the player to determine the degree of expectation in an instant. it can.

(2) Pattern 2
Next, a specific example of the pattern 2 when the first type expectation level display is performed will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the first type expectation level display (pattern 2), and shows a display example of the expectation level display. In the first type pattern 2, the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is used as the display example of the instruction function display.

  The expectation level display of the first type pattern 2 is displayed in two digits by the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). FIG. 72A shows an example of the segment display in the special display LED 612a. FIG. 72B shows a segment display example in the special display LED 612b.

  According to FIG. 72A, the special display LED 612a displays any one of “0” to “3” at the time of expectation display. The segment display shown in FIG. 72A can indicate, for example, the expected level of the degree of expectation, and the expected level increases in the order of “0 (level 0)” to “3 (level 3)”. Further, according to FIG. 72 (B), the special display LED 612b displays any one of “0” to “9” and “F” when the expectation level is displayed. The segment display shown in FIG. 72 (B) can be used to indicate the expectation level of the expectation level (the expectation degree from “0” to “9”) like the segment display shown in FIG. 72 (A). Becomes higher). At this time, the segment display of “F” means a confirmation display in which the provision of a privilege or the like is confirmed.

  The segment display shown in FIG. 72 (B) is based on the instruction content of the instruction function display when the instruction function display is performed in the same game, for example, in addition to the expectation level of the expectation degree. Seg display can be used. Specifically, in the instruction function display in the same game where the expectation level display is performed, when any of “0” to “9” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612b as information indicating the pressing order, the expectation level display Also, the same segment display may be performed on the special display LED 612b. By performing such a segment display, even if the player misunderstands the expectation level display as the instruction function display, it is possible to cause the player to perform a stop operation based on an appropriate push order, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the segment display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display is performed in the expectation level display, it is not necessary to perform the same segment display as the instruction function display as in the above example. Before the first stop, a segment display corresponding to the instruction content that can recognize the reel 301 to be stopped first may be displayed in an expectation display. Specifically, for example, when “right first (2 choices)” is determined as the instruction content of the pressing order, according to the display example of FIG. 59, “C” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612b as the instruction function display. Is done. At this time, the display mode of the special display LED 612b in the expectation level display may be “5 (middle right and left)”, “6 ( Either right middle left) ”or“ 9 (first right) ”may be displayed.

  When the first type expectation level display (pattern 2) is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display mode (see FIGS. 72A and 72B) used in the expectation level display is as follows. This corresponds to one of a plurality of display modes (combination of segment displays shown in FIGS. 58 and 59) used in the instruction function display. For example, the display of “11” in the special display LED 612 indicates the instruction content “stop operation of forward pressing aiming at the chance symbol” in the case of the instruction function display, but in the case of the expectation display, the expectation degree for the privilege is “ It can be shown as “Level 1”.

  In addition, when the first type expectation level display shown in the above pattern 1 and pattern 2 is performed, in what order and timing the indication function display and the expectation level display are displayed on the special display LED 612 Will be described in detail after [11-3-7-3]. In any case, by performing the first type expectation level display, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment can perform the expectation level display using the display mode of the instruction function display.

  And, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type expectation level display is performed, the display on the special display LED 612 is performed in a display mode that can be recognized as either the instruction function display or the expectation level display. It is possible to entertain the player which display is being performed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is progressed by a game operation (appropriate stop operation) based on the instruction content displayed in the instruction function display, an advantageous privilege advantageous to the player can be given. Specifically, for example, an instruction function display is performed by winning the push order bell combination, and an appropriate stop operation is performed according to the instruction content of the instruction function display, so that a plurality of ways corresponding to the push order bell combination are performed. The symbol combination with the largest number of payouts is stopped and the medal with the largest number of payouts is awarded. On the other hand, the expectation level display can suggest the degree of expectation of the benefit, but the benefit that the expectation level display suggests the expectation level can be a different benefit different from the advantageous benefit derived from the instruction function display. Specifically, the different privilege here corresponds to, for example, an expectation level regarding determination of a bonus game, an AT game, etc., an expectation level regarding addition of the number of AT games, and the like. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can display such indication function display and expectation degree display on a specific display (special display LED 612) using a common display mode, thereby displaying the display mode. In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation for different types of benefits (advantageous benefits and different benefits) at the same time, and can entertain the player whether the display mode is based on indication function display or expectation level display. For. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not get tired of the game and can suppress monotonization of the game.

  For example, regarding the display on the special display LED 612, if a reel stop operation is performed because it is considered as an instruction function display, the display remains until after the timing at which the instruction function display disappears after the stop operation is performed. Since it is understood that the indication is not the instruction function display but the expectation level display, the player can expect to give a privilege according to the expectation degree indicated by the display. Accordingly, the player proceeds with the game while praying that the indication function display is not displayed when any display appears on the special display LED 612. It is possible to make the player have an expectation for the granting.

  In the previous example, the case where the game is progressed while it is difficult to determine whether the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is based on the indication function display or the expectation level display has been described. The form is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, by blinking the display mode appearing on the special display LED 612 or changing the display color, the display mode is likely to be based on the expectation level display. Or, for example, by displaying in the same manner as the instruction function display at the beginning, but by performing the blinking display as described above, the display mode is based on the expectation level display. It is also possible that the possibility is high.

  In such an expectation display, the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 is determined by the main board 409 itself, who determines the winning combination by lottery, and determines the provision of benefits based on the lottery result of the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to assume that the degree of expectation of the privilege directly related to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is displayed, and to improve the reliability of the expectation degree display.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type expectation level display can be performed, even if the instruction function display is performed, the expectation level display is further performed, so that the benefit is granted. It can be expected that a winning combination with a high expectation level is selected (winning a highly expected role).

  More specifically, in the gaming state such as an AT game in which the instruction function display is frequently executed, the instruction function display is performed mainly at the time of winning such as a push order bell or replay. However, as described above in the explanation about the winning combination (for example, [10-1] etc.), the push order bell and the replay are high winning combinations that are relatively easy to win in the internal lottery and have a low expectation level regarding the advantageous game. “Low expectations”. On the other hand, the watermelon role, cherry role, chance role, etc., which have high expectations regarding advantageous games, are low-winning roles that are relatively difficult to win in internal lottery. Since the winning combination is an unquestionable pressing order in which the number of payouts does not change depending on the pressing order, the instruction function display is not necessarily required even during the AT game. In other words, in a gaming state such as an AT game, when the instruction function is displayed, there is a high possibility that a low-expected role has been won, and the degree of expectation regarding the provision of a privilege tends to be low. .

  In response to such a problem, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment displays an expectation level using the display mode of the instruction function display as the first type expectation level display. Even if the indication function display is performed on the display LED 612, it can be expected to be an expectation level display. And, if the display on the special display LED 612 is an expectation level display, it can be expected that the winning part is won, so even if the instruction function display is performed, the expectation to the highly expecting part is maintained. You can entertain the game.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display of the degree of expectation is more easily executed when the high expected role is selected in the winning combination lottery than when the low expected portion is selected in the winning combination lottery. It is desirable to do. Specifically, for example, when the winning combination is a push-bell combination (an example of a low-expected combination), the operation probability of the expectation display is set to 0.01 (1%), while the winning combination is a weak watermelon combination In the case of (an example of a highly expected role), if the operation probability of the expectation level display is 0.50 (50%), there is a possibility that when the expectation level display is performed, the highly expected role is won. Since it is high, the player's expectation with respect to the expectation level display can be effectively increased.

  Here, the setting method of the operation probability of the expectation display for increasing the possibility of winning the highly expected role when the expectation display is performed will be supplementarily described using the above example. For example, in the normal state or the bonus internal state, if the winning probability of the whole push order bell role is 3200/65536 and the winning probability of the weak watermelon role is 800/65536, the expected probability of each winning role By multiplying the display operating probability, it is possible to calculate the expected degree display appearance probability of the winning combination (that is, the probability that the winning combination is won and the expected degree display is performed). The expected degree display appearance probability of the push-bell combination is (32000/65536 × 0.01), and the expected degree display appearance probability of the weak watermelon combination is (800/65536 × 0.50). Then, by comparing the ratio of the expectation display appearance probability of the low expectation role and the expectation display appearance probability of the high expectation role, when the expectation display is performed, the ratio that the winning role is the high expectation role ( Alternatively, it is possible to calculate the ratio that the winning combination is a low expected combination). For example, when calculating the ratio of the probability display appearance probability between the push order bell role and the weak watermelon role, it can be seen that the weak watermelon role occupies 55.56%, and only when the push order bell role or the watermelon role is elected. If the expectation level display can be performed, the weak watermelon role (high expectation role) is won in more than half of the expected level display. If this concept is extended to all winning roles, the expected level display will be displayed if the expected level display appearance probability of the high expected role occupies at least 50% of the expected level display probability of all winning roles. It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the highly expected role when it is performed. In addition, if the operation probability at the time of winning the highly expected role is set too high, there is a risk that when the expectation level display is not performed, it is almost impossible to expect the winning of the highly expected role. Therefore, a reference value (for example, 70%) regarding the upper limit of the operation probability may be provided so that a degree of expectation can be obtained even when the expectation level is not displayed.

  Then, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the first type expectation level display is performed, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the highly expected role as described above. Even during an AT game that tends to be monotonous game characteristics that only repeat the game, the display of the special display LED 612 can be enjoyed by indicating whether it is an instruction function display or an expectation display, thereby realizing the effect of suppressing the monotony of the game can do.

  In the first type of expectation level display, not all display modes used for the instruction function display may be used as the display mode of the expectation level display. Further, for a small part of the display such as the premier display, a display mode unique to the expectation display that is not used for the instruction function display may be used.

  In addition, when the player displays the expectation level displayed on the special display LED 612 as an instruction function display when performing the first type expectation display, the instruction function display instruction content corresponding to the display is displayed. There is a possibility that the stop operation is performed according to the above. In such a case, if an unfavorable operation procedure is guided to the player as a result, the player's interest may be reduced. It is preferable to perform the expectation display while avoiding a display mode in which the operation procedure when the degree display is replaced with the instruction function display can be an unfavorable operation procedure.

  Performing the expectation display while avoiding the display mode in which the operation procedure when the expectation display is replaced with the instruction function display may be an unfavorable operation procedure is particularly performed by the reel stop operation for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. It should be considered before the expectation display is performed. Specifically, for example, when the instruction content to be indicated by the instruction function display is “reverse press”, the expectation display is performed with the segment display corresponding to the instruction content of “reverse press”, or at least the first It is preferable to display the degree of expectation using a display mode of an instruction function display in which the reel 301 to be stopped becomes the right reel 301c. Referring to the display example of FIG. 70, as the segment display in the special display LED 612b, the segment display of the instruction content for first stopping the right reel 301c is “5 (right middle left)”, “6 (right middle left) ) ”,“ 9 (first right) ”, and“ C (first right (2 choices)) ”. Therefore, in the case of performing the expected level display by the percentage display in such a case, the display of the lower digits of the special display LED 612 (that is, the display on the special display LED 612b) is any one of “5”, “6”, and “9”. Just do it. In consideration of up to the second reel to be stopped, since the segment display “6 (right middle left)” is a stop mode contrary to “reverse pressing”, the lower digit of the expectation display is preferably “5” or “9”. Is preferable.

[11-3-7-2. Expectation display mode (second type)]
In the first type expectation degree display, it has been described that the expectation degree display is performed by any one of a plurality of display forms that can be used in the instruction function display. Then, the expectation level display can be performed in a display mode different from any of a plurality of display modes that can be used in the instruction function display. Hereinafter, the expected level display according to such a display mode is referred to as “second type expected level display”. When the second type expectation level display is performed, it is necessary to prepare a display mode for the expectation level display separately from the display mode for the instruction function display. A plurality of display data is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like.

  Hereinafter, in the slot machine 1 in which the second type expectation level display is performed, the display mode of the instruction function display and the expectation level display will be described with specific examples of the patterns 1 and 2.

(1) Pattern 1
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the second type expectation level display (pattern 1), and shows a display example of the expectation level display. The expectation level display of the second type pattern 1 is displayed in two digits by the special display LED 612 (special display LEDs 612a and 612b). FIG. 73A shows an example of a segment display in the special display LED 612a. FIG. 73B shows a segment display example in the special display LED 612b. In the second type pattern 1, the instruction function display of the first example shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is used as the display example of the instruction function display. Therefore, when the instruction function is displayed, any one of “0” to “3” is displayed as a segment on the special display LED 612a, and “0” to “9” and “A” to “A” are displayed on the special display LED 612b. Any one of “F” is displayed as a segment.

  According to FIG. 73A, the special display LED 612a displays one of “L”, “H”, and “F” in a segment when displaying the expectation level. Here, the segment display of “L” in the special display LED 612a means that the degree of expectation is relatively low, and the segment display of “H” means that the degree of expectation is relatively high. Moreover, the segment display of “F” means that the grant of the privilege (or the grant of the privilege with the given amount or more) is confirmed (determined display). Further, according to FIG. 73 (B), the special display LED 612b displays any one of “0” to “9” and “F” in the segment display when the expectation degree is displayed. Here, the segment display of “0” to “9” in the special display LED 612b indicates the expectation level of the expectation degree, “0” being the expectation level having the lowest expectation degree and “9” having the most expectation degree. High expectation level. Further, the segment display of “F” in the special display LED 612b is used for a special premier display among the final display in which “F” is segmented by the special display LED 612a. Details of the premier display are the same as those described above with reference to FIG. When the premier display is performed in the expectation display of the second type pattern 1, “FF” is displayed on the special display LED 612.

  When the expectation level display of the second type pattern 1 is performed, the two-digit display mode by the special display LED 612 indicates a rough expectation degree in the upper digits (“L”, “H”, “F”). The lower-order digits (“0” to “9”, “A” to “F”) can indicate a more detailed expectation degree.

  In addition, the display mode of the two segment LEDs (special display LEDs 612a and 612b) is not captured separately, but as a special display LED 612 that displays in a 2-digit display mode. When the display mode is compared with the display mode of the instruction function display (see FIG. 58 and FIG. 59), the upper digit (“L”, “H”, “F”) of the expectation level display is included in the upper digit of the instruction function display. Since it is not displayed, it can be seen that the display mode of the expectation level display composed of two digits appears by a display mode different from the display mode of the instruction function display.

  That is, when the expectation level display of the second type pattern 1 is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any indication is displayed on the special display LED 612 without explicitly indicating whether the indication function display or the expectation level display is performed. Even if the mode appears, if the upper digit (special display LED 612a) of the display mode is any one of “L”, “H”, and “F”, the expected level is displayed, and “0” to “3” , It is possible to determine that the instruction function is displayed.

(2) Pattern 2
Next, a specific example of pattern 2 when the second type expectation level display is performed will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the second type expectation level display (pattern 2), and shows a display example of the expectation level display. In the second type pattern 2, the instruction function display of the second example shown in FIGS. 61 and 62 is used as the display example of the instruction function display. Therefore, in this case, the special display LED 612 on which the expectation level display and the instruction function display are displayed is more specifically a 7-segment LED with one dot (special display LED 612c).

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, in the indication function display using the special display LED 612c, binary data (8 bits in total, which indicates an indication of the pressing position with the upper 4 bits and the pressing order with the lower 4 bits ( By performing lighting control corresponding to each digit bit of the data based on the instruction function display data), the special display LED 612c can indicate both the indication of the pressing place and the pressing order.

  On the other hand, according to FIG. 74, in the expected level display of the second type pattern 2 using the special display LED 612c, the segment display of “0” to “9” is performed based on the level of the expected level. In the second type pattern 2 expectation level display, the segment display of “F” is a definite display. In FIG. 2 and No. 2 in FIG. In order to avoid duplication with the segment display (the number “3” is displayed) when the instruction function is displayed in combination with 15, the dot segment is lit when the segment “3” is displayed in the expectation display. I try to let them.

  When the expectation level display of the second type pattern 2 is performed, the display mode of the expectation level display is one of alphanumeric characters “0” to “9” and “F”. On the other hand, the display mode of the instruction function display is likely to be a symbolic display because the lighting control corresponds to each digit bit of 8-bit binary data (instruction function display data). When compared with a specific example in which the display examples of FIG.

  That is, when the expectation level display of the second type pattern 2 is performed in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 (special display) is displayed without explicitly indicating whether the indication function display or the expectation level display is performed. Even if any display mode appears on the LED 612c), it is an expectation level display if the display mode is any of “0” to “9” and “F”, and otherwise, an indication function display is performed. It can be determined that there is.

  In addition, when the second type expectation level display shown in the above pattern 1 and pattern 2 is performed, in what order and timing the instruction function display and the expectation level display are displayed on the special display LED 612 Will be described in detail after [11-3-7-3]. In any case, by performing the second type expectation level display, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment can display the expectation level in a display mode different from the display mode of the instruction function display. .

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second type expectation level display is performed, which of the indication function display and the expectation level display is displayed for the display mode displayed on the special display LED 612 is displayed. Since it is identifiable, it is possible to execute the expected effect by the expectation level display without causing the player to misidentify, and the display of the expectation level can enhance the game entertainment. In addition, since the instruction function display and the expectation level display are displayed by the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409, an effect on the image display body 500 managed by the sub board 510 (for example, a screen related to navigation display or expectation level) Regardless of the presence or absence of display), it is possible to realize the above-described improvement of the game entertainment.

  In such an expectation display, the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 is determined by the main board 409 itself, who determines the winning combination by lottery, and determines the provision of benefits based on the lottery result of the lottery. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to assume that the degree of expectation of the privilege directly related to the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is displayed, and to improve the reliability of the expectation degree display.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second type expectation level display can be performed, the expectation level display is performed when a display mode different from the instruction function display is displayed on the special display LED 612. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the privilege from the point in the middle of the game. In particular, as described in the type 1 expectation level display, when a highly anticipated role is selected in the winning role lottery, the expectation level display is easier to execute than when a low expected role is selected. (For example, as exemplified in the first type, when the winning combination is a push-bell combination, the operation probability of the expectation display is set to 0.01, while when the winning combination is a weak watermelon combination, an expectation display is performed. If the expectation level is displayed, it is possible that the player is likely to be elected as a highly anticipated role, so the player's expectation on the expectation level is effective. Can be enhanced.

  Further, in a gaming state in which instruction function display is frequently executed such as an AT game, the instruction function display is displayed at the time of winning such as a push order bell, and the monotonous operation is simply repeated in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function display. Although it tends to become game characteristics, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by displaying the second type expectation degree display, the expectation degree display in a display mode different from the instruction function display can be performed. The possibility of occurring can be created, and monotonization of games such as during an AT game can be suppressed.

  In addition, although the expectation degree display illustrated in FIGS. 70 to 74 suggests the expectation degree when at least some display form is displayed on the special display LED 612, the state where nothing is displayed on the special display LED 612. May also be regarded as one expectation level display (for example, the minimum expectation level).

[11-3-7-3. Priority display regarding expectation level display]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special display LED 612 managed by the main board 409 displays not only an instruction function display indicating an instruction content related to a predetermined game operation, but also an expectation display indicating an expectation degree of a privilege. Can do. The main board 409 can control to display the special display LED 612 with priority on either the expectation level display or the instruction function display during the unit game (one game) (priority display).

  Here, the above priority display in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes display control (priority display of timing) with priority on display timing and display with priority on the display layer from the viewpoint of priority control. It can be divided into control (priority display of layer). In addition, from the viewpoint of priority, the priority display described above is an expectation priority display for displaying the expectation level display in preference to the instruction function display, and an instruction function for displaying the instruction function display in preference to the expectation level display. It can be divided into priority display.

  Hereinafter, such various priority displays will be described in detail with specific examples.

[11-3-7-3-1. Timing priority display]
Here, timing priority display will be described. In the priority display of timing, by providing a difference in priority in display timing between the expectation display and the instruction function display, when displaying the expectation display and the instruction function display in the unit game, The display with the higher priority is displayed on the special display LED 612 before the display with the lower priority. As for the setting of the priority difference in display timing, information in which priority is set in advance may be stored in the ROM 1112, or the main board 409 for each unit game based on the gaming state, the lottery result of the winning combination lottery, or the like. May perform processing to set.

  In the priority display of the timing, the display with the low priority is not displayed on the special display LED 612 just by turning off the display with the high priority. After the display with a high priority is turned off, the display with a low priority is turned on separately to display the low priority. Both instruction function displays are displayed on the special display LED 612.

(1) Expectation degree priority display First, the expectation degree priority display in which a higher priority is given to the expectation degree display than the instruction function display will be described. It should be noted that the priority of the instruction function display is lower than the expectation level display, but the instruction function display may be explicitly given a low priority, and is handled in an initial state in which no priority is given. May be.

  Further, in the expectation priority display, when both the expectation display and the instruction function display are displayed in the unit game, the expectation display is displayed on the special display LED 612 before the instruction function display. Even in such a case, it is preferable to switch to the instruction function display by the display timing at which the instruction function display should be performed. Specifically, for example, in a game in which it is decided to display the instruction content related to the first stop reel by the instruction function display (more specifically, the first reel stop operation is performed). Expected degree displayed before the operation is in a state where the operation can be accepted and before a predetermined timing of “start of accepting stop button press” shown in FIG. The display is turned off and the instruction function display is turned on, so that the instruction function display for instructing the operation mode of the first reel stop operation is displayed on the special display LED 612 after the predetermined timing. It is preferable.

  Further, assuming that the instruction function display is performed after the expectation level display is performed in the unit game, after the game operation based on the instruction content of the instruction function display is completed (for example, after the third stop button is pressed). The expectation level display may be displayed again on the special display LED 612. Then, the display mode of the expected level display displayed again may be different from the display mode of the expected level display previously displayed. Specifically, for example, “30%” is displayed in the previous expected level display. The display mode indicating the degree of expectation of the game, and the display mode indicating the expectation level of “80%” in the display of the expected level displayed again, thereby changing (raising or lowering) the degree of expectation within the same unit game. May be.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining a display example when timing priority display (expectation priority display) is performed. FIG. 75A is a timing chart showing display periods of various displays, and FIG. 75B is a diagram showing transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

  Each item described on the horizontal axis of FIG. 75 (A) is a representative timing in the progress of the game, but the items other than the freeze start item and the freeze end item are the same as those described in FIG. Therefore, detailed description is omitted. “Freeze start” and “Freeze end” indicate the start timing and end timing when freeze control is performed during the rotation control of the reel 301. During the period in which this freeze control is being performed, the reel stop button Even if an operation on 211 is performed, the operation is not accepted and is invalid, and a stop operation for stopping the reel 301 cannot be performed on the reel stop button 211.

  On the vertical axis in FIG. 75A, an instruction function display 701, an expectation display 702, and a liquid crystal effect display 703 are described as various displays indicating the display period. The instruction function display 701 and the expectation level display 702 are both displayed on a special display LED 612 (more specifically, at least one of the special display LEDs 612a, 612b, and 612c). Means that the display is not performed. 75A shows a segment display example when the instruction function display 701 or the expectation degree display 702 is ON. This segment display example is an example of the instruction function display example of FIG. 70 and the expectation degree of FIG. A segment display example corresponding to the display example is used. However, such a segment display example is merely an example, and other instruction function display examples (see, for example, FIG. 58, FIG. 59, FIG. 61, FIG. 62, and FIGS. 64 to 66) and other expectations. It may be a segment display example corresponding to a display example (for example, see FIGS. 72 to 74).

  The liquid crystal effect display 703 in FIG. 75A corresponds to the effect display displayed on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510. When the display is ON, an expectation level display or instruction is displayed on the image display body 500. This means that the effect display related to the function display is performed, and when OFF, it means that the effect display related to the expectation level display or the instruction function display is not performed in the image display body 500. In general, in the image display 500, some kind of effect display is performed throughout the entire unit game. Even if the liquid crystal effect display 703 is OFF in FIG. 75A or a similar timing chart described later, the image display is performed. It does not mean that no effect is displayed on the body 500.

  FIG. 75B shows a screen example of the effect display related to the expectation level display or the instruction function display displayed on the image display body 500 when the liquid crystal effect display 703 in FIG. 75A is ON. ing. The screen example of FIG. 75 (B) is an example when a predetermined effect display is displayed on the image display body 500 based on the display mode of the expectation level display or the instruction function display on the special display LED 612. Thus, the effect display by the image display body 500 assists, so that the display mode of each display on the special display LED 612 can be more reliably transmitted to the player. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to perform such an effect display regarding the expectation level display or the instruction function display.

  The description given above for each item in FIGS. 75A and 75B is the same in the similar drawings (FIGS. 76 to 78) described later, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Referring to FIGS. 75A and 75B, the display change accompanying the progress of the game will be described. First, after the game starts, the expectation display 702 is turned ON during the period from the start of reel rotation to the start of freeze. Then, the expectation level display of the display mode “30” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 71, the expectation level display of the display mode “30” means that the expectation degree for the privilege is 30%. Note that the period during which the expectation level display is displayed is before the start of accepting the stop button press, so the player cannot perform a game operation for stopping the reel 301 (stop operation for the reel stop button 211). In addition, while the special display LED 612 is displaying the degree of expectation in the display mode “30”, the liquid crystal effect display 730 may display an effect display of “CHANCE?” (A), so that something can be expected from the game. It suggests to the player that it cannot. However, the expectation by the effect display of (a) does not give a stronger expectation than the effect display of (d) described later.

  Thereafter, when the freeze control is started, the expectation level display 702 is turned off. However, since the instruction function display 701 is not turned on yet at the timing immediately after the start of the freeze, nothing is displayed on the special display LED 612. The instruction function display 701 is turned ON when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the freeze, whereby the instruction function display of the display mode “31” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 70, the instruction function display of the display mode “31” means the instruction content “the guide of the pressing place is the BAR symbol and the pressing order is the forward pressing”. Such an instruction function display is continuously displayed until the stop operation for all the reels 301 is completed (the third stop button is pressed), and then turned OFF. In the liquid crystal effect display 703, first, a freeze-only effect screen is displayed while the freeze control is being executed (effect display of (b)). After the freeze is completed, while the instruction function display 701 is ON, a navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display of the display mode “31” is displayed (effect display of (c)). By performing the effect display of (b), the player is notified that freeze control has occurred, and by performing the effect display of (c), the instruction content display instruction instructions are assisted. The player can be encouraged to perform an appropriate game operation.

  After the third stop button is pressed, the instruction function display 701 is turned off and the expectation level display 702 is turned on again, and the special display LED 612 displays the expectation level. As shown in FIG. 75 (A), in the expectation level display 702 turned ON again, a display mode “80” different from the display mode “30” in the previous expectation level display is displayed. The expectation level increased to 80%. In addition, the display mode of the liquid crystal effect display 703 is changed with the expectation level display 702 being turned on again, and as shown in FIG. 75B, the effect display of “CHANCE !!” (d) is performed. By this, the expectation in the game can be made higher than the effect display in (a).

  Thereafter, when the game progresses, the unit game (one game) ends with the completion of the payout. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays the effect display (e) of “bonus confirmed!” To give a bonus bonus in the previous game that has ended. Teach that is confirmed. The effect display of (e) is turned OFF at the timing when the start lever is pressed so as not to disturb the effect display in the next game.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority that is given higher priority than the instruction function display by performing the priority display (expectation priority display) illustrated in FIG. 74 is performed. Since the display is first displayed on the special display LED 612 in the unit game, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the privilege from a relatively early stage in the unit game. In particular, when the game is in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, a display different from the instruction function display may occur suddenly, which makes each game and player have a sense of tension and expectation. You can make it.

  Also, in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, the expectation display is displayed first, so that the low-winning role of the push order unrecognized role in which the instruction function display is not performed (for details) , [11-3-7-1] etc.), and such a low winning combination is a high expectant with a relatively high degree of expectation for the benefits. It is possible to greatly improve the player's expectation for the provision of the privilege.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display (expectation priority display) of timing is performed, so that the instruction function display having a lower priority than the expectation display is also taught by the instruction function display. Since the instruction function display can be performed on the special display LED 612 at a timing at which the player can execute a predetermined game operation, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the predetermined game operation and suffering a disadvantage. it can. Furthermore, after the display period of the instruction function display is ended, the display mode is made variable so that the expectation display can be displayed again, so that even if the expectation degree in the previous expectation display is relatively low, It is possible to make the player have hope that the degree of expectation may increase with the expectation level display. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display of the timing (expected priority display) can be performed to maintain the player's interest in the game result throughout the entire unit game. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display contents of the expectation display and the instruction function display that the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is displayed by the special display LED 612. By assisting, it is possible to notify the player of information more reliably.

(2) Instruction function priority display Next, an instruction function priority display in which a higher priority is given to the instruction function display than the expectation level display will be described. The priority of the expectation display is lower than that of the instruction function display. However, a low priority may be explicitly given to the expectation display, and it is handled in an initial state in which no priority is given. May be.

  Further, in the instruction function priority display, when both the expectation level display and the instruction function display are displayed in the unit game, the expectation level display is displayed after the instruction function display is displayed in the special display LED 612. The expectation level display is displayed at a timing that avoids the period during which the instruction function display should be displayed.

  The specific “period for displaying the instruction function display” is at least the period from the start of accepting the stop button press (before a certain period of time) to the press of the third stop button. It is preferable that the expectation level display is displayed at any timing after the third stop button is pressed. However, if the instruction content displayed by the instruction function display is satisfied when the first reel stop operation is performed (for example, the instruction content indicating only the first stop reel), “display the instruction function display” The “power period” is not limited to the above. In such a case, without waiting for the completion of the stop operation (pressing the third stop button) for all the reels 301a to 301c, the timing before that (for example, the first period) The expectation may be displayed after the reel stop operation.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining a display example when timing priority display (instruction function priority display) is performed. FIG. 76A is a timing chart showing display periods of various displays, and FIG. 76B is a diagram showing transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

  76 (A) and 76 (B), the display change accompanying the progress of the game will be described. First, in the period from the start of the game until the first stop button is pressed through the freeze control through the freeze control. The instruction function display 701 is turned ON, and the instruction function display of the display mode “29” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 70, the instruction function display of the display mode “29” means the instruction content “the guide of the pressing place is red 7 symbols and the pressing order is the first stop right”. This instruction content corresponds to the instruction content instructing only the first stop reel since the stop order of the remaining reels 301a and 301b may be any if the reel 301c is stopped first. The indication function display of the mode “29” is turned OFF at the timing when the first stop button is pressed. During this period, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays a navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display of the display mode “29” (effect display of (a)).

  At the timing of pressing the first stop button, the indication function display 701 is turned off and the expectation display 702 is turned on, so that the expectation display of the display mode “F9” is performed by the special display LED 612. If FIG. 71 is referred, the expectation display of the display mode "F9" is a definite effect regarding provision of a privilege. The expectation level display is continuously displayed until the timing of the complete reel stop. In the liquid crystal effect display 703 during this period, an effect display ((b) effect display) suggesting that the degree of expectation for the privilege “Intense heat!” Is considerably high based on the expectation display. Can increase the expectation of the person.

  In FIG. 76A, the lower digit of the display mode of the expectation level display is “9” because the display mode “9” indicating the pressing order in the instruction function display is succeeded. In this way, even if the player does not notice that the display on the special display LED 612 has been changed from the instruction function display to the expectation display, the display mode indicating the pressing order is not changed, so that the game operation can be performed. You can avoid feeling anxious.

  According to FIG. 76 (A), after the expectation level display 702 is turned off at the timing of all reels being stopped, both the instruction function display 701 and the expectation level display 702 are in an off state until the unit game ends. . At this time, in the liquid crystal effect display 703, an effect display of (c) “Bonus confirmed!” Is displayed, thereby instructing that the provision of the bonus bonus in the game has been confirmed.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the priority display (instruction function priority display) of the timing illustrated in FIG. 75 is performed, so that the instruction function with higher priority than the expectation display is given. Since the display is first displayed in the special display LED 612 in the unit game, the expectation display may be displayed in the subsequent unit game even if the instruction function display is displayed. This gives the player a sense of expectation that it will appear, and has the effect of maintaining the gaming interest throughout the entire unit game. In particular, when an instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, even if the instruction function display is displayed, if the expectation level display is subsequently displayed, Since it can be expected to grant, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the timing priority display (instruction function priority display) is performed, the special display LED 612 can display the instruction function early in the unit game. An appropriate game operation based on the function display can be surely taught to the player, and the risk of the player performing an unfavorable game operation by overlooking the instruction function display can be avoided. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the lowering of the player's gaming interests due to adverse gaming operations and gives the player a sense of security. Can do.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display contents of the expectation display and the instruction function display that the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is displayed by the special display LED 612. By assisting, it is possible to notify the player of information more reliably.

[11-3-7-3-2. Layer priority display]
Here, priority display of layers will be described. In the priority display of layers, a difference in priority in display control is provided between the display layer for displaying the expectation level and the display layer for displaying the instruction function. Even when the instruction function display is output in parallel to the display (for example, the special display LED 612), the display layer (upper display layer) with a higher priority is preferentially displayed on the special display LED 612. The For setting the priority difference in display control, information in which priority is set in advance may be stored in the ROM 1112, or the main board 409 for each unit game based on the gaming state, the lottery result of the winning combination lottery, or the like. May perform processing to set.

  In the priority display of the layer, the output of the display layer (upper display layer) with a higher priority is output from the situation where the expectation display and the instruction function display are output in parallel (both ON states). When turned off, the display on the special display LED 612 is switched to the display of the display layer (lower display layer) with a low priority.

  In addition, regarding the priority display of the layer layer, when the display device that is the output destination of the display layer is a segment LED such as the special display LED 612, only the display layer having a higher priority is displayed among the display layers output in parallel. For example, when a display capable of superimposed display, such as a liquid crystal display, is selected as the output destination, the output display layer is superimposed and displayed at the same time. Alternatively, highlighting may be performed by providing a difference in color, brightness, display cycle, or the like. However, when performing such superposition display, for example, when the display layer of the instruction function display is highlighted, the image display 500 performs effect display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display. It is preferable that auxiliary control is performed so that the player can recognize the displayed display layer.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by performing such priority display of the layer layers, mutual display such as no display period blank between the respective displays (expectation display and instruction function display) is performed. Even if the output timing is not adjusted in consideration of typical display timing, priority display of the upper display layer and switching of the display layer can be realized only by outputting at each output timing, so display control by the main board 409 is possible. The above load can be reduced, and as a result, the program capacity of the main board 409 can be reduced.

  In the following, regarding the priority display of layers, the expectation priority display and the instruction function priority display will be described respectively. However, regardless of what priority display is performed, the display mode of the instruction function display at the display timing at which the instruction function display should be performed Is displayed on the special display LED 612 as in the case of the priority display at the timing described above.

(1) Expectation priority display First, of the layer priority display, explanation is given on the expectation priority display realized by setting the display layer of the expectation display as the upper display layer and the display layer of the instruction function display as the lower display layer. To do.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining a display example when layer priority display (expected priority display) is performed. FIG. 77A is a timing chart showing display periods of various displays, and FIG. 77B is a diagram showing transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example.

  The display example shown in FIG. 77 is a winning pattern that is not illustrated in FIG. 49, but a bonus combination (for example, “BB1”) and a highly expected combination (for example, “strong watermelon combination”) are simultaneously performed by a winning combination lottery. It is a display example when winning.

  Referring to FIGS. 77 (A) and 77 (B), the change in display as the game progresses will be described. First, after the game is started, the upper display layer starts from the reel rotation start to the predetermined timing after the freeze start. A certain degree of expectation display 702 is output (ON), and the expectation degree display of the display mode “90” is performed by the special display LED 612. Referring to FIG. 71, the display of the expectation level of the display mode “90” means a considerably high expectation degree that the degree of expectation for the privilege is 90%. Note that the period during which the expectation level display is displayed is before the start of accepting the stop button press, so the player cannot perform a game operation for stopping the reel 301 (stop operation for the reel stop button 211).

  On the other hand, the instruction function display 701 which is the lower display layer is turned on for a while after starting the reel rotation, but is not displayed on the special display LED 612 during the period in which the expectation display 702 is turned on (FIG. 77 ( Corresponding to the broken line part in A). If the expectation level display 702 is turned off before the freeze control ends, the output of the upper display layer disappears, and the display of the special display LED 612 is switched from the expectation level display 702 to the instruction function display 701. The instruction function display of the mode “26” is performed. Referring to FIG. 70, the instruction function display of the display mode “26” means the instruction content “the guide of the pressing place is red 7 symbols and the pressing order is reverse pressing”. Thereafter, the ON state of the instruction function display 701 continues until the third stop button is pressed, but the expectation display 702 which is the upper display layer does not enter the ON state during this time, so the instruction function display is continuously displayed on the special display LED 612. Is done.

  In addition, in the liquid crystal effect display 703, during the period from the start of reel rotation to the end of the freeze, the effect of (a) that indicates “high heat!” Is suggested as an effect display based on the display content of the expectation display 702. By performing the display, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game has a very high degree of expectation regarding the benefits. Thereafter, after the freeze control is finished, the special display is performed by performing the effect display of (b) as a navigation display based on the instruction content of the instruction function display 701 so that the red 7 symbol is aimed by reverse pressing. Since not only the LED 612 but also the image display body 500 can teach the player an appropriate game operation, it is possible to prevent the player from performing an inappropriate game operation.

  Thereafter, when the game progresses, the unit game (one game) ends with the completion of the payout. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, the effect display of (c) “Bonus confirmed!” Is performed, and it can be taught that the provision of the bonus privilege is confirmed in the previous game that has been completed. .

  Note that the sub-board 510 may change the display timing of the bonus confirmed effect in (c) based on the stop position of the reel 301, the operation mode by the player, and the like. Specifically, for example, when all the reels are stopped by reverse pressing according to the instruction content of the instruction function display 701, but the stop timing is shifted and the red 7 symbol alignment does not stop, When the symbol combination is stopped, display in the next game as shown in FIG. 77 (A) is performed. On the other hand, as a result of the appropriate stop operation being performed in accordance with the instruction content of the instruction function display 701, when the red 7 symbol assemblage stops, the bonus finalization effect (c) is displayed at the timing of all reels stopping. You can do it. In this way, the sub-board 510 adjusts the display timing of the liquid crystal effect display based on the stop position of the reel 301 and the like, thereby enabling the effect display with little deviation from the game situation and having a sense of incongruity in the progress of the game. You can avoid it.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority display (expected priority display) of the layers illustrated in FIG. 77 is performed, so that the special display LED 612 displays the expected display and an appropriate display. Since it is possible to tell the player the appropriate game operation by switching to the instruction function display at the timing, the expectation for winning the highly expected role by the expectation level display and the expectation for the game result by performing the appropriate game operation Both feeling and can be enhanced. In particular, when a high expectation level display appears as shown in FIG. 77, a game indicated by a subsequent indication function display so as not to lose a privilege granting opportunity due to an inappropriate game operation. Can be careful with the operation.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a situation where it is particularly important for the player to perform an appropriate stop operation, such as when a special replay combination having a different stop type is won depending on the pressing order, priority display of layers ( By performing the expectation priority display), it is possible to greatly expect a deterrent effect that prevents the player from performing an unfavorable game operation.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the priority level display (expected priority level display) is performed, so that the expected level display is preferentially displayed in a gaming state in which the instruction function display is frequently displayed such as during an AT game. It is possible to foresee that the player has won the low winning combination of the push order unrecognized combination in which the instruction function is not displayed (refer to the description of [11-3-7-1] for details). Since the low winning combination is a high expectation role with a relatively high expectation degree for the privilege, the player's expectation for the provision of the privilege can be greatly improved.

(2) Instruction function priority display Next, among the layer priority displays, the instruction function priority display realized by setting the display layer of the instruction function display as the upper display layer and the display layer of the expectation level display as the lower display layer. explain.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining a display example when layer priority display (instruction function priority display) is performed. FIG. 78A is a timing chart showing display periods of various displays, and FIG. 78B is a diagram showing transition of the liquid crystal screen example of the image display body 500 in the display example. The display example shown in FIG. 78 is a display example when the weak cherry combination is won by the winning combination lottery.

  78A and 78B, description will be given of changes in display as the game progresses. First, after the game is started, the display of expectation, which is a lower display layer, from the start of reel rotation to the start of payout is described. 702 is output in a display mode of “76” (ON). Referring to FIG. 71, the expectation level display of the display mode “76” means that the degree of expectation for the privilege is 76%. However, as indicated by the broken line in FIG. 78 (A), the instruction function display 701 which is the upper display layer is output (ON) from the predetermined timing after the freeze starts until the third stop button is pressed. The special display LED 612 does not display the degree of expectation. Therefore, the period during which the expectation level display of the display mode “76” is displayed by the special display LED 612 is the “prior display period” from the reel rotation start to the predetermined timing after the freeze start, and from the third stop button press to the payout start. This is the “post-display period”.

  Then, the special display LED 612 displays the display mode “36” as the instruction function display from the “prior display period” to the “post-display period”. Referring to FIG. 70, the instruction function display of the display mode “36” means the instruction content “the guide of the pressing place is the BAR symbol and the pressing order is the reverse pressing”. Since the winning combination in the game is a weak cherry, it is originally an unquestionable combination, but when a stop operation is performed by reverse pressing aiming at the BAR symbol, the accessory 19 (weak) shown in FIG. Since the symbol combination of the cherry-compatible condition device) is drawn on the effective line, even if the game operation is performed with the instruction content, the game result is not disadvantageous for the player.

  Summarizing the change of the display mode in the special display LED 612 shown in FIG. 78A, the expectation level display of the display mode “76” is performed from the start of reel rotation to the predetermined timing after the start of freeze. Until the third stop button is pressed, the indication function display of the display mode “36” is switched, and from the third stop button press to the start of payout, the display is switched again to the expectation level display of the display mode “76”.

  Looking at the transition of the liquid crystal display example of the liquid crystal effect display 703, something may happen in the game because the effect display of “!” Is performed from the start of reel rotation to the end of freeze. It suggests to the player that there is no. In addition, since this display period is before the start of accepting the stop button press, even if the meaning of the effect display in (a) is not understood, there is no influence that causes the player to be confused about the subsequent game operation.

  Next, during the period from the end of the freeze until the third stop button is pressed, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function of the display mode “36”. At this time, the liquid crystal effect display 703 displays the instruction function display 701. As the navigation display based on the instruction content, the effect display of (b) is performed in which the BAR symbol is aimed by reverse pressing. Since the effect display of (b) is performed, not only the special display LED 612 but also the image display body 500 can teach the player an appropriate game operation, so that the player can perform an inappropriate game operation. It can be suppressed not to do so.

  From the time the third stop button is pressed to the start of payout, the special display LED 612 displays the expected degree of the display mode “76”. At this time, the liquid crystal effect display 703 pays attention to the player's expected degree display. As an effect for making it happen, an effect display of (c) “Let's pay attention to Seg!” Is performed. By performing such an effect display of (c), even if there is a player who misses the expectation level display before the instruction function display is performed, the player is prompted to recognize the displayed expectation level display again. Therefore, it can be expected that the player can surely recognize that the expectation level is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the game progresses, the unit game (one game) ends with the completion of the payout. Then, when a medal is inserted for the next game, in order to teach that the privilege indicated by the expectation display is not given in the previous game, an effect display (d) “sorry! Is done. In addition, when the provision of the privilege suggested by the expectation level display is performed, an effect display that teaches the provision of the privilege such as “Successful addition!” May be performed. As for the timing at which the effect display of (d) is performed, the sub-board 510 may change the display timing as appropriate, similarly to the effect display of (c) in FIG. 77 (B).

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the instruction function display is displayed by performing the priority display (instruction function priority display) of the layers as illustrated in FIG. 78, the subsequent unit game There is a possibility that the expectation level display is displayed in the game, so that the player has a sense of expectation that the expectation level display appears, and the effect of maintaining the game interest throughout the entire unit game is achieved. In particular, when an instruction function display is frequently displayed, such as during an AT game, even if the instruction function display is displayed, if the expectation level display is subsequently displayed, Since it can be expected to grant, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since priority display of layers (instruction function priority display) is performed, as long as the display mode of instruction function display is output, the special display LED 612 is displayed with the highest priority. The instruction function display can be surely executed at an appropriate timing for teaching the player about an appropriate game operation. As a result, an appropriate gaming operation based on the instruction function display can be surely taught to the player, and the risk of the player performing an unfavorable gaming operation by overlooking the instruction function display is avoided. be able to. Thus, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the lowering of the player's gaming interests due to adverse gaming operations and gives the player a sense of security. Can do.

  In addition, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display contents of the expectation display and the instruction function display that the liquid crystal effect display on the image display body 500 managed by the sub-board 510 is displayed by the special display LED 612. By assisting, it is possible to notify the player of information more reliably. In particular, the importance of the special display LED 612 can be increased by performing an effect that draws attention to the special display LED 612 as in the effect display of (c) described in FIG.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a feature when performing the priority display of the layer, the special display LED 612 outputs another display layer below the upper display layer, thereby displaying the upper display. When the output of a layer is turned off, the next display mode can be displayed in an extremely short time because the lower display layer can be displayed without causing a time lag other than the time required for switching the display. It is possible to realize a display effect with a sense of urgency. Specifically, for example, the moment when the player presses the third stop button (or the third time), such as switching from the effect display of (b) to the effect display of (c) described in FIG. 78 (B). The moment that the hand is released from the stop button), the display mode of the instruction function display can be switched to the display mode of the expectation level display, so that the display mode of the special display LED 612 changes each time each game operation is performed. It can make a player expect.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display (special display LED 612) managed by the main board 409 that controls the progress of the game, regardless of whether the timing priority display or the layer priority display is performed. ), It is possible to display different types of indications such as an indication function display and an expectation level display, and an indication function display or an expectation in a situation where both an indication function display and an expectation level display can be displayed during a unit game Any one of the degree displays can be preferentially displayed. In a conventional general slot machine, a lot of information is given to the player by performing various effect displays on the effect display device managed by the sub-board (corresponding to the image display body 500 in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment). However, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, such a problem is solved, although it has been difficult to maintain the interest of the player by itself. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine to which a new game property that is not found in a conventional gaming machine is added.

[11-3-7-4. Other expectation display]
In the above [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3], the processing in the case of displaying the expectation level display on the display (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function display is performed has been described. However, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, other expectation levels can be displayed. In the following, other indications of expectation that can be executed in the slot machine of this embodiment will be listed and described. In addition, the expectation level display enumerated below can be utilized in combination with the expectation level display demonstrated in [11-3-7-1]-[11-3-7-3] suitably.

(1) Expectation level display based on change in display form of instruction function display In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display form of the instruction function display displayed by the special display LED 612 is changed to the display form while maintaining the display contents. It is possible to display the degree of expectation by changing.

  Specifically, for example, when the expected display is not performed, the display mode is changed to a low-speed flashing (flashing with a long cycle) when the segment display according to the instruction is only lit during normal times. In such a case, a low expectation display such as the segment display “L” in FIG. 73A is used, and when high-speed blinking (flashing in a short cycle) is performed, the segment of FIG. 73A is displayed. A high expectation level display such as the display “H” may be used. Although such a display form is only an example, by performing an expectation display with different expectation levels based on various display forms, as an expectation degree related to a privilege, for example, an expectation degree at which an AT game is added You can make a difference or suggest the number of games to be added.

(2) Expectation degree display as a notice display In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the instruction function display is performed on the special display LED 612, before the display mode showing the specific instruction content is displayed, the display is performed. A degree of expectation that the degree of expectation related to the privilege becomes higher when a predetermined display form (fake display similar to blinking display or instruction function display) different from the aspect can be displayed and the predetermined display form is displayed. Display may be performed.

  Specifically, for example, when the indication function display is to be performed in the display mode “13” on the special display LED 612, the segment blinks rapidly before the display mode “13” is completely displayed. An expectation level display indicating that the game has a high expectation level for the privilege may be performed. In addition, when such high-speed flashing occurs, the display mode “13” of the instruction function display is not displayed completely (the instruction function display is stopped), and the display mode is displayed in a predetermined expectation level display. Or an effect that suggests a sense of expectation for a privilege may be performed on the image display body 500. In addition, when the instruction function display is canceled, internally, it is not a game that is determined to display the instruction function when the push order small role is won. It is preferable that the game wins a role of watermelon or watermelon.

(3) Expectation degree display in which display mode can be changed in stages In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above in [11-3-7-1] to [11-3-7-3], special Expectation display that increases the degree of expectation as the display time and the number of times of display increase by displaying the display form of the expectation display in multiple stages when the display LED 612 can display a predetermined expectation display. May be performed.

  Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the display mode of “50” is finally displayed as the expectation level display, instead of displaying “50” once on the special display LED, “10”, It is possible to display such that “20” and “50” are divided into a plurality of stages and the degree of expectation is gradually increased. The specific display process of the stepwise expectation level display is not limited to the incremental display as in the above example. For example, the expectation level is lowered and then the high expectation level is displayed at the end. It is possible to display the final degree of expectation after displaying the degree of expectation several times.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the expectation level display is performed on the special display LED 612, the target function (target benefit) indicated by the expectation level display is displayed within the same unit game. It can also be suggested by the display. Specifically, in the special display LED 612, after the display mode of “10” and “20” is displayed as the expectation level and the display mode of “50” is finally displayed, the instruction “Aim for the red 7 pattern” is displayed. When the instruction function display of the content is displayed, the expectation degree of “50%” by the expectation display is the expectation degree for “red 7 symbol set” suggested by the instruction function display. That is, even if 100% expectation is indicated by the expectation level display, the target benefit varies depending on the instruction content of the instruction function display. In some cases, it may be a low privilege such as a bell pattern match. In this way, by associating the target of the expectation level by the expectation level display with the indication function display, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the expectation level suggested by the expectation level display but also the indication function indication is suggested. Since the target privilege can also be given meaning, the player's interest can be maintained through the unit game.

(4) Expectation level display that produces display possibility of specific mode indicating execution of lottery related to appearance, In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the specific mode is displayed on the indicator (special display LED 612) where the indication function is displayed. When a lottery related to the appearance of a ball is performed in the case where is displayed, an expectation that directs whether or not a specific mode is displayed in a stepwise manner by displaying a predetermined expectation level with the special display LED 612 A degree of production can be realized.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the expectation level display that produces the display availability of the specific mode. In FIG. 79, the display transition of the expectation level display in which the display mode changes stepwise in one segment LED (special display LED 612c) is shown. Here, when “3” is displayed in a segment, it is assumed that a “specific mode” is displayed, and a lottery (for example, adding the number of AT games) related to playing is performed. As shown in FIG. 79, in the special display LED 612c, first, the 7-segment portion includes “(a) upper stage lighting”, “(b) middle stage lighting”, “(c) lower stage lighting”, “(d) upper right stage lighting. It will be lit in the order of "". After that, if “(e) lower right stage lighting” is achieved after a certain waiting time, “3” of the specific mode is completed as the segment display, so that it is determined that the lottery related to the appearance is performed (expectation) Successful production results). On the other hand, when “(f) lower left lit” is displayed after (d), “2” is displayed as the segment display, which indicates that the lottery related to the appearance is not performed (expectation) Failure results). It should be noted that it is preferable that the result of the expectation effect is also clearly shown on the image display body 500.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, an expectation level display as illustrated in FIG. 79 is performed, so that an indicator (for example, special display LED 612c) for displaying an instruction function display is different from the instruction function display. Not only can the expectation level display be made possible, but also an expectation level effect that can be completed only by the display device. Thus, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine capable of executing an important effect on the display managed by the main board 409. Note that, in the case where an expectation effect is performed on the display managed by the main board 409 (for example, the special display LED 612), “7” is displayed on the display managed by the sub board 510 (for example, the image display body 500). It is preferable to display an alert such as “Look at the segment display” so as to attract the player's interest in the display where the expectation effect is performed.

  The above is the description of the gaming state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. However, the lottery table used in various internal lotteries for controlling the gaming state does not need to be one, for example, A plurality of setting values (for example, four stages from setting values 1 to 4) may be provided, and different lottery tables may be used for each setting value. Specifically, each setting value has a difference (step difference, extreme difference, etc.) in the internal lottery probability. The set value may be such that a lottery probability such as a bonus winning combination and an AT winning rate is more preferentially set as the set value becomes higher, such as set value 1 <set value 2 <set value 3 <set value 4. For example, compared to the set value 1, the set value 4 has a high probability of winning BB1, so the possibility of winning BB1 is high. By providing stepwise set values in this way, the slot machine 1 can be used as a clue when the player guesses the set value by giving a characteristic to each set value or according to the management of the hall or the like. Can be operated. The setting value is not limited to the above.

[11-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation for stopping a reel that continues to rotate at a constant speed (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is waited. FIG. 80 shows the contents of reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Hereinafter, the flow of the reel stop control process will be described.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, a reel stop control table is selected in accordance with a condition device that operates in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in the game. This reel stop control table is prepared in advance with patterns corresponding to all the condition devices in a one-to-one correspondence, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the conditional device established in step S201 described above, it enters a standby state until a pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is accepted (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether each of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF) It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is pressed. Until all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed, the determination in step S209 is not satisfied, and the processes in and after step S202 are repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are accepted (stop operation procedure) is “forward press”, “squeeze press”, “middle forward press”, “middle reverse” as described above. There are six types of “press”, “reverse pinch press”, and “reverse press”. In the following description regarding FIG. 80, these press orders are first focused on the reel stop button 211 on which the press operation has been performed. Then, sort them in the order of three pushes. That is, the case where the first stop reel is the left reel 301a is referred to as “forward pressing”, the case where it is the middle reel 301b is referred to as “middle pressing”, and the case where it is the right reel 301c is referred to as “reverse pressing”.

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag indicating that the left reel 301a has been stopped (the left reel stop flag LF) is OFF (LF = 0), and the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a has been accepted. To do. If it is assumed in step S201 that the left reel stop button 211a is first pressed (first) in accordance with the “forward press” stop operation procedure from the standby state of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202 is performed. The determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The “first reel” as used herein refers to a reel that receives a stop operation first or stops first. In this example (“forward press”), the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) because the stop operation of the left reel 301a is accepted first. Therefore, the determination at step S203 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, a first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

  In step S206, the reel stop control table for the remaining middle reel 301b and right reel 301c is determined. As described above, since the slot machine 1 has only two effective lines, a right-up line and a right-down line, there is only one stop control table for the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) at this time. Can be determined. That is, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this is referred to as a stop eye, the same applies hereinafter), the symbol at the upper or lower position can be the winning combination symbol. If the symbol has a characteristic, a reel stop control table is selected that can align the corresponding winning symbol of the remaining reels (the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the symbol. It will be.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to next step S208.

  Next, in step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped. In this example, the left reel stop flag LF has only been turned ON, and the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating. Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the processing returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the processing from step S202 is executed again, the left reel 301a is already in the stopped state, so the determination in step S202 is not satisfied, and the routine goes to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the flag indicating that the middle reel 301b has been stopped (the middle reel stop flag MF) is OFF (MF = 0) and that the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b has been accepted. To do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Therefore, the determination at step S210 is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203 described above. At this time, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1), this determination is not satisfied, and the routine goes to Step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning winning symbol based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above). Execute. At this time, the middle reel 301b becomes the second stopped reel (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216, where the middle reel stop flag MF is turned on (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are only stopped, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and is in a stopped state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Therefore, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processing is repeated.

  Further, in the processing after step S202 for the third time, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c is accepted. However, the subsequent processes in steps S218 and S220 are the same as the processes in steps S210 and subsequent steps (steps S211 and S213), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in a stopped state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process ends.

  In the case of the “middle press” stop operation procedure, the same description as above can be made, and the details are omitted. However, since the “reverse pressing” stop operation procedure is partially different from the above description, it will be described below.

  The “reverse push” stop operation procedure differs from the “forward push” or “middle push” stop operation procedure described above in step S221 (determination of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop process). is there. That is, in the “reverse push” stop operation procedure, only the right reel 301c is stopped, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stops of the right reel 301c, there are still two valid It is possible to arrange the winning symbols in any line. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols on any active line are prepared, and any one may be selected.

[11-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the reel stop process described above, reel stop control for drawing the winning symbol (corresponding winning symbol) corresponding to the establishment flag into the symbol display window 401 as much as possible (so-called pull-in control) is performed. Specifically, when a player's reel stop operation is accepted, a range that can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (a range in which the corresponding winning symbol can be drawn, for example, four symbols). Minutes) is determined in advance, and if the corresponding winning combination symbol is within the range, control is performed to pull the symbol into the symbol display window 401 and stop the reel. The “retractable range” here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the rotation direction of the reel from when the reel stop operation is accepted until the reel stops. Say. For example, if the pullable range is a maximum of 4 symbols, when a reel stop operation is accepted, the reel can be further rotated up to 4 symbols based on the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, even if there is no corresponding winning symbol in the symbol display window 401 at the time when the reel stop operation is received, the corresponding winning symbol is within the range that can be drawn. If there is, the winning winning symbol can be moved to the symbol display window 401 and stopped. In addition, by performing this pull-in control, even if the player is slightly ahead of the winning winning symbol, if the winning winning symbol is within the pullable range, the winning symbol is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress as much as possible the occurrence of losing (the winning bonus cannot be obtained and the gaming bonus corresponding to the winning bonus cannot be acquired and the gaming bonus disappears).

  In the slot machine 1, when a condition device corresponding to a replay combination or a small combination of any push order is activated, it is always possible to arrange the corresponding winning combination pattern without requiring the player to press. it can. This is because, for the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to each of the replay combination, the small combination, etc., the corresponding winning combination symbols are arranged every four symbols at the maximum (the above-described diagrams). 46). In the reel pull-in control, when the maximum number of pull-in is 4 (4 frames), the symbols arranged at intervals of 4 as described above are always valid regardless of the push timing (push position). It becomes possible to draw in the line. The symbol combination in such an arrangement state may be expressed as “retraction is 1”.

  Specifically, for example, when the replay symbols are arranged in the middle when a predetermined replay role is won, focusing on the replay symbols, the interval from the replay symbol to the replay symbol is within 4 frames on the left reel 301a. (See FIG. 46). As a result, in the left reel 301a, regardless of the position of the reel at which the stop operation is accepted, as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay function is operating, the replay symbol is always drawn into one of the active lines and stopped be able to.

  Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a double combination of a bonus combination and a small combination, the small combination is preferentially drawn over the bonus symbol. If a winning combination of a bonus combination and a small combination is won, even if a symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in the selected game, the established state of the bonus combination is maintained after the next game, and the next game In a game in which a subsequent small combination (or replay combination) is not established, a symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table method. In addition to this, there is a reel stop process by a control method, but since a known process can be applied to this, a specific description is omitted here. In the first embodiment, either the control method or the table method of reel stop processing may be executed, and which method is to be adopted may be determined as appropriate when the control program is constructed.

[11-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop process is completed, the main board 409 has a winning combination symbol on any active line in the symbol display window 401 (a combination mode of symbols corresponding to any winning combination is displayed). Whether or not) is determined. In FIG. 81, the content of this determination process is demonstrated concretely.

  When all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are stopped by the reel stop process, the winning combination symbols are aligned on any of the active lines from the stop eye form in the symbol display window 401 (corresponding to the winning combination) It is determined whether or not a combination mode of symbols to be displayed is displayed). In particular, the stop eye when all the reels 301 are stopped is referred to as a stop eye.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether a bonus game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of a predetermined game state flag (for example, a bonus game flag). If the bonus game flag is ON (= 1), the determination in step S301 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S302. If the bonus game flag is OFF (= 0), the determination in step S301 is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S312.

  In step S302, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the active line is a bonus symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus combination). The determination of the symbol combination will be described with a specific example. If the bonus is BB1 shown in FIG. 49 and the like, the symbol combination corresponding to BB1 is a symbol arrangement of “red 7” on the active line (see FIG. 51). ) When such a symbol arrangement is stopped on any diagonal line, it can be determined that the BB1 symbol (bonus symbol) has stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the symbol combination of the bonus symbols has stopped on the active line (YES in step S302), a bonus game start process relating to the start of the bonus game is performed (step S303), and then the process is terminated. To do. The bonus game start process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a bonus symbol (NO in step S302), the process proceeds to step S304.

  In step S304, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination stopped on the active line is a replay symbol (a symbol combination corresponding to a replay combination). If it is determined that the symbol combination is a replay symbol, a replay game process is executed ( Step S305). In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number (MAX bet in this example) as the bet number in the game. Based on this command, the next game can be started as a replay. After the process of step S305, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S306), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in step S304 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a replay symbol (NO in step S304), as the next determination process, the symbol combination is a small character symbol (a symbol combination indicating a small character winning). ) Is determined (step S308). If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol is a small role symbol, as a process in step S309, a prescribed number of medals are paid out according to the arranged small role symbols (a prescribed number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110). put out). Then, the medal payout number is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). Thereby, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small role has been paid out. And after the process of step S309 is complete | finished, the applicable small role winning flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S310), and a process is complete | finished.

  If it is determined in step S308 that the symbol combination stopped on the active line is not a small role symbol (NO in step S308), none of the above determinations in steps S302, S304, and S308 is satisfied, and any symbol on the active line There are no winning symbols. Note that the outcome at this time is also referred to as “losing eye (disjoint pattern combination mode)”. In such a case, a loss process is executed (step S311). In the losing process, when the winning flag that is ON (= 1) at this time is a winning flag other than the bonus, the winning flag is turned OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the loss flag is ON (= 1)), the loss flag is turned OFF (= 0). After the loss process in step S311, the determination process ends.

  The above-described processing from step S302 to step S311 is processing executed when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state or the bonus internal state. Next, the process after step S312 performed when determination of step S301 is not satisfy | filled is demonstrated. The process here is a process executed during a bonus game (BB game) in which the gaming state is controlled to the bonus state.

  In step S312, it is determined whether bonus game payout symbols are aligned on the active line. The “bonus game payout symbol” here means a collective name of symbol combinations in which medals are paid out by aligning during a bonus game. Specifically, in this example, a bonus game payout symbol (in this example, normal This is a symbol combination corresponding to a small combination whose payout is prescribed in the state or the internal state, but a special bonus exclusive combination may be prepared). If an affirmative determination is obtained in step S312, a prescribed number of medals are paid out according to the bonus game payout symbols that have been prepared (step S313). In the medal payout process, a predetermined number of medals are paid out from the medal releasing device 110 and the medal payout number is displayed on the payout number display LED 612. Through such medal payout processing, the player is notified (notified and displayed) that a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the bonus game payout has been paid out.

  Following step S313, in step S314, a bonus game end determination process for determining whether or not to end the bonus game is executed (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 83), and then the determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S312 that the bonus game payout symbol has not stopped (NO in step S312), the establishment flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S315), and the process ends. As a pattern that is NO in step S312, it is conceivable that a bonus game payout combination is won, but is eliminated, and a bonus game payout combination is not won. In the process of step S315, in the former case, the bonus game payout establishment flag is turned off, and in the latter case, the lose flag is turned off. If a bonus special combination that is always won during the bonus game is prepared, and the bonus special combination is won, the process of step S315 can be performed. May be omitted.

  The processing in steps S301 to S315 described above is the gaming state determination processing performed by the main board 409 (especially the CPU 1110). However, when the slot machine 1 has the AT function, in addition to this, determination processing related to the AT game (AT game determination processing) is performed.

  In the AT game determination process, a determination process (AT game determination process) relating to continuation and termination of the AT game, management of the number of games, and the like is performed for each game. Since the AT game determination process corresponds to a process of performance that affects the generation of an instruction, the main board 409 executes it.

  Note that the timing at which the AT game determination process is performed may be any suitable timing in the determination process shown in FIG. 81, but here, as an example, the processes of steps S306, S310, S311, S314, and S315 are performed. Assume that an AT game determination process is performed later. Details of the AT game determination process will be described in [11-5-3] with reference to FIG.

[11-5-1. Bonus game start processing]
If the determination in step S302 of FIG. 81 is satisfied, a bonus game start process is executed. This bonus game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether a bonus flag (for example, BB1 flag) is ON (= 1). When the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the bonus game flag is turned on (= 1) and the bonus flag is turned off (= 0). Next, in step S406, the cumulative payout number count in the bonus game is cleared. Thereby, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the bonus game is started with the specified number of bonus games (in this example, the specified number of BB1 games is three).

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 and error processing is executed. Such a case corresponds to a case where bonus symbols are aligned even though the bonus flag is OFF (= 0). In other words, this may occur when any illegal means (for example, goto action) is performed or when a failure occurs in the slot machine 1. Accordingly, in the error processing, the error lamp 604 is turned on, and other indications are made to notify the occurrence of an error to the above-described LED or the like.

[11-5-2. Bonus game end determination process]
Next, the bonus game end determination process in step S314 of FIG. 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S451, in response to the payout of medals in step S313 of FIG. 81 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the bonus game.

  Next, in step S452, it is determined whether or not the cumulative payout number has exceeded the total payout number specified for each bonus (for example, 280 in the case of BB1). If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454 to display the cumulative payout number in the bonus game (displayed on the payout number display LED 612, etc. The cumulative payout number is provided with a display LED or the like separately. It may be displayed on this).

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the bonus game flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S460), and the process ends.

[11-5-3. AT game determination process]
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the AT game determination process. As described above in [11-3-2] and the like, the AT game is a game that is executed on the basis of winning the AT in the AT lottery. When the winning combination (push order bell) is won, instruction information such as “appropriate push order” is displayed on the special display LED 612 (instruction function display), and a teaching effect (navigation display) along the instruction function display is displayed. It is displayed on the image display 500 or the like. The AT game determination process is a determination process related to the start, continuation, and end of such an AT game, and is executed by the main board 409 (particularly, the CPU 1110) that is an AT control entity. Hereinafter, an example of the AT game determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, an outline of the AT game will be described. The AT game is started when the AT game start condition is satisfied, and is continuously executed in the subsequent game period until the AT end condition is satisfied. [11-3-2] As described in the following instruction function process, when the AT game start condition is satisfied, a predetermined internal flag (AT flag) is turned ON (= 1) and the AT game is started. Is started, and the AT flag is turned OFF (= 0) at the end of the AT game. It should be noted that information such as an AT flag such as an AT flag and the number of AT games to be described later are held in a memory (eg, RAM 1114) in the main board 409 that controls the AT game. Similar information may be held in a memory (for example, the RAM 1122).

  The conditions for starting the AT game (conditions for turning on the AT flag) are as described in detail in [11-3-2] below. In simple terms, the state in which the AT is won in the AT lottery ( When the AT internal flag is ON), the start condition of the winning AT is satisfied. In addition, as described above, when the AT flag is turned ON and the AT game starts, the AT internal flag is turned OFF.

  In step S501 of FIG. 84, as the first process of the AT game determination process, the current AT flag is compared with the AT flag in the AT game determination process of the previous game, and whether or not the AT flag is ON (= 1). Determine. That is, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the AT flag is changed from OFF to ON from the previous game to the current game. It is assumed that the value of the AT flag in the AT game determination process of the previous game is stored separately. If it is determined that the AT flag is turned on (YES in step S501), the number of AT games at the start of AT is set (step S502), and the process is terminated. The number of AT games at the start of the AT (so-called initial game number) may be set in advance as a fixed game number, or may be determined by other methods when the AT is won. However, here, as an example, it is assumed that the initial number of games determined in the above-described instruction function processing is set as the number of AT games at the start of AT.

  By performing the process in step S502 as described above, the AT game is started from the next game. At the start of the AT game, an effect is given (for example, display of an AT start screen) in which the AT game is started and the number of AT games is clearly indicated to the player.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the AT flag is ON, that is, if the AT flag is OFF or the AT flag is ON from the previous game (NO in step S501), the AT flag is It is determined whether or not ON (= 1) (step S505). If it is determined that the AT flag is ON (YES in step S505), it means that one game in the AT game has been performed, and therefore, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the number of AT games is performed ( Step S506). If it is determined in step S505 that the AT flag is not ON (NO in step S505), the process is terminated as it is because the AT game is not in progress.

  Here, the slot machine 1 has an additional function for adding the number of AT games based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied during the AT game, apart from the number of games at the start time determined at the start of the AT game. If the number of AT games is added, a predetermined internal flag (addition flag) is turned ON (= 1), and the number of AT games to be added (addition number of games) is determined. The condition for determining the extra is not particularly limited, and may be a winning of a specific winning combination in the winning lottery, or may be determined based on some other lottery result. Further, the method for determining the number of added games is not limited to a special method. Then, the following processes in steps S507 to S509 are performed when the function for adding the number of AT games is provided.

  First, in step S507, it is determined whether or not the extra flag is ON (= 1). If the extra flag is ON (YES in step S507), a process of adding the extra game number to the current AT game number is performed (step S508), and the extra flag is turned OFF (= 0) (step S509). . As a result, the number of remaining AT games is increased by an additional amount, and the duration of the AT game advantageous to the player is extended.

  After the process of step S509 (if the add-on function is not provided, after the process of step S506), it is determined whether or not the current number of AT games is “0” (step S510). Since the AT game end condition is satisfied, the AT flag is set to OFF (= 0) (step S511), and the process ends. At this time, not only the end of the AT game is clearly indicated to the player, but also information related to a series of AT games (for example, the total number of payout medals and the number of AT games continued in the AT game) is clearly indicated to the player. You can do it.

  If it is determined in step S510 that the current number of AT games is not “0” (NO in step S510), the AT game end condition is not satisfied, and thus the process is ended without changing the AT flag. As a result, the AT game is continued in the subsequent games.

  Note that the AT game determination process described with reference to FIG. 84 is a processing example in a case where the game period (AT game period) controlled to the gaming state for the AT game is a system in which one count is subtracted for each game. When the AT game period is managed by another subtraction method (for example, a method in which the AT game period is determined by the number of appearances of AT navigation), it is desirable to perform an appropriate AT game determination process according to the subtraction method. .

  When the slot machine 1 has the AT function, an internal flag indicating the start of the AT game (for example, an AT start flag) may be prepared separately from the AT flag for the AT game determination process. The AT start flag is an internal flag that is turned on (= 1) when the AT initial lottery is won and the AT game start condition is satisfied. In such a case, in a series of processes by the AT game determination process, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the AT start flag is ON. If the AT start flag is ON, the initial game of the AT is determined in step S502. After the number is set, the AT flag is turned ON and the AT start flag is turned OFF. If the AT start flag is OFF in Step S501, the processing after Step S505 is executed. You can do it.

[11-6. Control of production operation]
The above is mainly an example of control by the main board 409, but in the slot machine 1, various presentation operations are controlled by the sub board 510 as the game progresses. This is executed by the sub board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118) based on various commands (information command, output signal) outputted from the main board 409. As described above, various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. Then, based on the command, an effect mode prepared in advance is selected and executed. Such effect modes are stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the production mode includes a game completed only by the game (hereinafter referred to as a single production mode), a game performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter referred to as a continuous production mode), and the like. Among these, the single-shot effect mode includes an effect that suggests the winning flag (suggestion effect, notification effect, details will be described later), an effect that informs the payout of medals (an appearance that pays out appearance, and may be an aspect that informs the number of payouts), etc. There is.

  The suggestion effect is different from the effect (notification effect) that directly informs the player of the winning flag, that is, an effect that indirectly informs the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag. In other words, a display that expresses a color or the like is performed. The suggestion effect is also performed when the winning flag is not present (that is, when the game is lost). In this case, it is set as an effect of content that is difficult to notice that it is lost (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). Thereby, it can be made difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

  For example, in the case where the winning flag is a bonus combination or when an AT lottery is won in the AT lottery, the notice effect is clearly informed to the player of the game-related results such as “Bonus confirmed!” And “AT winning!” It is something that can be done. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination that is particularly pleasing to the player, such as a bonus or AT (because a large amount of medals can be obtained). That is, when a player wins an AT or the like, it is possible to give a meaning to congratulate the player.

  In addition, as a continuous production mode, there are those corresponding to game states such as a normal state, a bonus internal state, and a bonus state. These are clarifications about the game state, and the player performs these effects (continuous effects) to determine whether the current game state is, for example, a normal state or not inside the bonus. It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is a state or not.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, not only the continuous effect mode corresponding to the game state (normal state, bonus internal state, bonus state) as described above, but also a game such as AT sign effect, etc. A continuous effect may be executed in a manner that suggests or teaches whether or not to shift to a special game (for example, an AT game) advantageous to the user. Further, such a continuous effect is not limited to the control by the peripheral board (for example, the sub board 510), and may be controlled by the main board 409. Furthermore, although such a continuous effect may be completed in one game, it is continuously executed in a manner in which related effect contents are displayed over a plurality of games, and finally the result is displayed. It is common. For example, in the indication effect that tells the result of whether or not the winning state is won, the title display of one game is first performed, and then the “continuous effect” from one game to a plurality of games is performed. A series of these productions can be said to be a continuous production as a whole. And when the result of such a continuous effect (for example, a predecessor effect) is displayed, the player can recognize whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game is performed in a subsequent game.

  The various effects described above can be executed as image display by the image display body 500, generation of sound effects by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such a production mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression when the player continues the game for a long time. The production mode is not limited to being executed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, or the like. For example, instead of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, dolls imitating characters, movable models, etc., and side reels (for example, they are placed at different positions from each reel, and can be started and stopped regardless of player operations as part of the production. It is also possible to provide various effects by providing illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating lamp). By adopting such a method, it is possible to sufficiently entertain the player without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

[11-6-1. Announcement about bonus]
As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various presentation operations can be executed. Among these presentation operations, “a plurality of types of bonus combinations (BB1, BB2, MB, SB) are provided, By paying attention to the feature of the present embodiment that “the game state is changed by winning each bonus combination and the bonus game is executed”, it is possible to execute a characteristic notification effect regarding the bonus.

  First, regarding “BB1” and “BB2” by the continuous action device related to the first type special bonus, an announcement is made to notify the establishment of the bonus flag based on the winning of each bonus role “BB1” or “BB2”. Production can be performed. This notification effect may be an effect mode in which any bonus (or specific bonus) winning is determined when the effect is executed, or may be an effect mode including a notification result of bonus non-winning (out). . The execution timing of the notification effect may be “immediate notification” that is notified in the game won for each bonus combination “BB1” or “BB2”, and the bonus game is not activated after the winning game ( That is, “post-notification” for notifying the establishment of the bonus flag while several games have passed (in a state controlled to the bonus internal state) may be used.

  In particular, when performing a notification effect by “post-notification”, it is possible to adopt a “continuous effect mode” in which continuous effect contents are displayed over several games and then a bonus flag that has been established is notified. . In this embodiment, even if “BB1” or “BB2” is won in the internal lottery, the symbol combination corresponding to each bonus combination is not always displayed immediately, but the bonus internal state (inside BB1, inside BB2) There may be a controlled game period. Therefore, in such a game period, post-notification by the above-described continuous effect mode can be performed.

  As more specific production contents, for example, there can be considered an production mode in which whether or not a BB bonus has been won, or a production mode in which of BB1 or BB2 is won. In this embodiment, since any bonus game of BB1 and BB2 is a game period that is advantageous to the player, the roaring effect as to whether or not the BB bonus is won is effective in increasing the interest of the player. It is done. Further, since the BB1 game is more advantageous to the player than the BB2 game (the total number of payouts in the bonus game is larger), the roaring effect between BB1 and BB2 also has an effect of increasing the interest of the player.

  In the present embodiment, even if an MB is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the MB is not always displayed in the winning game (the MB may be moved into the MB after winning). In addition, as another production content, not only BB1 and BB2 are beaten but also BB and MB are beaten. Here, since the MB bonus in the present embodiment is a “game period unfavorable for the player” controlled so that the payout rate does not exceed 1, the result of the roaring effect between the BB and the MB Is directly linked to the advantages / disadvantages experienced by the player, and therefore can be expected to greatly increase the player's throbbing feeling.

  In addition, when it is controlled so that the establishment of the bonus is always notified by “immediate notification” or “post-notification” before the predetermined number of games elapses after the winning game, such notification effects are summarized. This is called “complete notification”. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “complete notification” may be performed, or a notification effect by “immediate notification” or “post notification” may be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the case of performing “complete notification”, it is possible to give the player a sense of security by making sure that the bonus flag is established during at least several games after winning the bonus combination. In addition, when a notification effect is performed when a predetermined condition is established, there is a possibility that a bonus flag is established even if the notification effect is not performed, so that the player is always expected to have a bonus. be able to.

  In addition, these notification effects in the present embodiment may be executed on the liquid crystal screen of the image display body 500 controlled by the sub board 510, or may be pushed by the special display LED 612 by an instruction function controlled by the main board 409. The order and the push position may be taught. At this time, if the arrangement of FIG. 46 is used, it is possible to produce a more entertaining game for the player. Specifically, an instruction for targeting the “red 7” symbol of array number 10 on the left reel 301a and the “red 7” symbol of array number 20 on the middle reel 301b is displayed. At this time, if the “red 7” symbol is stopped at the lower stage of each of the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b, the lower line 623b has a pattern of “red 7”-“red 7” and a right-down line 623e. Is a sequence of “Replay”-“Replay”. This situation becomes a reach situation of symbol combinations corresponding to three types of bonus combinations (so-called triple reach). More specifically, referring to the symbol combination of FIG. 51, the symbol combination of BB1 when the “Red 7” symbol stops, BB2 when the “BAR” symbol stops, and MB symbol combination when the “Bom” symbol stops at the bottom of the right reel 301c. Will be complete. Therefore, when such an instruction effect is performed, the array element No. 18 (“Bom” symbol) to the array element No. 20 (“Red 7” symbol) should be aimed at the lower stage of the last right reel 301c. Thus, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player until the last reel is stopped by delighting which symbol stops.

[11-6-2. Production in a specific zone]
Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the specific game period can be a period in which the player is highly interested, so that the player's attention is drawn in the specific game period (specific zone). An effect may be executed. Hereinafter, the specific zone and the turn effect will be described in more detail.

  In the present embodiment, the normal time (normal state) is set to be able to win “BB1” and “BB2” with a very high probability compared to the conventional gaming machine, so that the BB1 game or the BB2 game can be won. It is in a gaming state where transition can be expected. Further, after the BB1 game or the BB2 game is finished, the gaming state is controlled again at the normal time, so that the BB1 game or the BB2 game continuously operates during a relatively short game period, and a collective amount of games is played. It can be expected to develop a game in which a medium is obtained (in the example of this embodiment, the total number of payouts per BB1 game exceeds 280, and the total number of payouts per BB2 game exceeds 110).

  Therefore, the normal state in this embodiment is a gaming state that can be expected to develop advantageous for the player, and further, the games after the end of various bonus games (BB1, BB2, MB, SB games). Since the state is controlled at the normal time, it is possible to execute the roaring effect as a “specific zone” in which a predetermined game period after the end of the bonus game can be expected to win an advantageous bonus combination (BB1, BB2). Video (image display body 500), sound (speaker 512), light (lighting device 502, special LED display 612, etc.), and the like can be used for the turning effect. For example, during a specific zone, output may be performed with an audio pattern or LED display pattern that is different from other game periods, or a flashy output mode that attracts the player's interest may be performed. By performing such a roaring effect, it is possible to entertain the game while clearly indicating a “specific zone” as a so-called “renso zone”.

  As an example of setting the “specific zone”, for example, it is conceivable to set the “specific zone” until a predetermined number of games elapse (for example, 32 games) after the end of each bonus game. In such a case, after the bonus game is over, the player can feel that it is a chance period during which it is easy to shift to an advantageous bonus game until the predetermined number of games is consumed, and the game entertainment can be enhanced. .

  As another setting example of the “specific zone”, a bonus combination “MB” (in this embodiment, “MB + Cherry”) is won by an internal lottery after the end of each bonus game, instead of a specific number of games. It is also conceivable to set the “specific zone” until the symbol combination corresponding to “MB” is displayed (in other words, immediately before being controlled to “MB general”). According to FIG. 51, since the symbol combination corresponding to “MB” (“Replay”-“Replay”-“Bom”) is easy for the player to identify, the symbol combination corresponding to “MB” is displayed. It is easy for the player to detect that a game period (MB game) that is disadvantageous to the player is started. Therefore, it is considered that it is not in accordance with the player's feelings to execute the roaring effect until after such a symbol combination is displayed. In addition, by performing the hit effect in such a “specific zone”, the hit effect is given to the player in a chance period in which not only the appearance but also the internal state easily shifts to an advantageous bonus game. This makes it possible to gain the player's trust and enhance the gaming interest.

[11-7. Processing when an abnormal condition occurs]
Processing performed when an abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  In the slot machine 1, when an abnormal state occurs during the game, an error notification is made according to the type of error detected. In particular, in the case of an error that can be detected by the main board 409, the error lamp 604 is turned on (or flashes), and an error display indicating the type of the error can be performed by the special display LED 612. The special display LED 612 normally displays an instruction function display and a payout number display. In addition, an error may not be detected, but a sudden power interruption is also included in the abnormal state.

  When an abnormal state as described above occurs, it is necessary to cancel the error in order to return to the normal game state (in the case of a power interruption, it is sufficient that an error display does not remain after the power is restored). Although the error canceling method varies depending on the error that has occurred, there are many cases in which it is necessary to turn off the power (OFF / ON).

[11-7-1. RAM clear]
Here, clearing of data values (RAM clear) in the RAM 1114 mounted on the main board 409 will be described.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific operation such as setting change or power OFF / ON is performed, the value of data held in the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is erased or initialized in an address range corresponding to each operation. A clear process (RAM clear) for rewriting the value is performed. Therefore, even when the error cancellation processing is performed, there is a possibility that a part of the data held in the RAM 1114 is cleared when the power is turned OFF / ON.

  However, when the error canceling process is performed while the instruction function is displayed or the power is cut off while the medal is paid out, the data used for the instruction function display and the payout number display is cleared by clearing the RAM. A case that hinders the continuation of the game is assumed. In the slot machine 1, in consideration of such a problem, the RAM clear target range in the RAM 1114 is determined in advance.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining a data block of the RAM. FIG. 85 shows an internal image of the RAM 1114, where the upper end is the beginning of the memory address and the lower end is the end of the memory address. For example, the unused area 1114z is a data area where data is not read and written (in other words, a data area other than the used area), and is grouped on the end side of the memory address. As shown in FIG. 85, in the RAM 1114, a plurality of “areas” are determined in advance according to the type of data to be stored. In addition, five types of “clear range 0” to “clear range 4” are defined as the RAM clear target ranges. Each clear range may include an unused area 1114z.

  First, the clear range of RAM clear will be described. “Clear range 0” means a target range that is basically not executed and corresponds to all erasure. That is, the RAM clear in the clear range 0 is not performed in normal maintenance or error processing. From another viewpoint, the data value is not cleared in the set value data area 1114a except when the RAM is cleared in the clear range 0. This means that the set value data area 1114a is not basically cleared.

  “Clear range 1” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the start of a setting change performed by operating the setting key switch 1112t. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 85, all data areas below the door flag area 1114b are targeted, and the set value data area 1114a is not cleared.

  “Clear range 2” means a target range in which RAM clear is performed at the time of reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. Specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 85, the data area below the lamp ON data area 1114d is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the door monitoring timer area 1114c are not cleared.

  “Clear range 3” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the end of the bonus. Clearing RAM from clear range 0 to clear range 2 requires work by hall clerk as an opportunity to execute each RAM clear, but RAM clearing at the end of the bonus is automatically performed by internal processing after the bonus ends Is executed automatically. In the RAM clear at the end of the bonus, specifically, among the data areas in the used area shown in FIG. 85, the data area below the replay insertion number area 1114j is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the instruction function display area. 1114i is not cleared.

  The “clear range 3” is also a target range in which the RAM is cleared when the power is simply turned OFF / ON. That is, when the power is turned OFF / ON without changing the setting or resetting, the data area that is the target range in “clear range 3” is cleared. Since the instruction function display area 1114i is not included in the “clear range 3”, the instruction content of the instruction function is not erased by turning the power OFF / ON.

  “Clear range 4” means a target range in which the RAM is cleared at the start of each game. The RAM clear at the start of each game is automatically executed, for example, by an internal process when the start lever 210 is operated in a state where the bet number of medals is determined. In the RAM clear at the start of each game, specifically, the data area within the display flag area 1114l among the used data areas shown in FIG. 85 is targeted, and the set value data area 1114a to the interrupt check The timer area 1114k is not cleared.

  Next, each data area shown in FIG. 85 will be briefly described. The setting value set in the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a.

  Information indicating the open / closed state of the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90) is stored in the door flag area 1114b, and the door-shaped front member 200 (or front opening / closing member 90) is stored in the door monitoring timer area 1114c. Time information for recognizing that it is open is stored.

  The lamp ON data area 1114d stores information related to lighting of lamps (for example, a display device 501 such as a replay lamp 606 or a start lamp 608). The credit number area 1114e stores information indicating the number of credits (medal storage number). In the credit display area 1114f, information for displaying the stored medal number on the stored number display LED 613 is stored. The payout number area 1114g stores information indicating the number of payouts (medal payout number) indicating how many game values have been paid out in the game. In the payout display area 1114h, information for displaying the medal payout number on the special display LED 612 is stored. In the instruction function display area 1114i, information corresponding to the instruction content by the instruction function for displaying the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is stored.

  In the replay insertion number area 1114j, the number of game values to be inserted at the time of the replay operation (the number of medals inserted at the time of replay) is stored. Timer information necessary for executing the interrupt process is stored in the interrupt check timer area 1114k.

  Information indicating the error display state displayed on the special display LED 612 is stored in the display flag area 1114l. In the medal payout number area 1114m, a payout number of game values to be paid out as a result of the game is stored. In the insertable number area 1114n, information indicating whether or not a game value can be input is stored. In the medal insertion number area 1114o, the number of game values inserted before the start of the game is stored. The random number storage area 1114p stores random numbers used in the condition device.

  As described above, the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 can be expected to realize efficient memory control by setting a range in which the RAM is cleared for each of various actions (setting change, power OFF / ON, etc.).

  Note that the RAM 1114 defines a range (capacity) that can be used as a storage area of the main board 409 in the gaming machine, and data such as programs must be stored within the defined range. However, in recent years, with regard to the processing related to the test signal and the processing related to fraud, data related to the program for the processing is stored in an unused area outside the specified range (for example, the unused area 1114z in FIG. 85). Is allowed. However, the use of such unused areas is limited to gaming machines having an instruction function.

  In the slot machine 1, whether or not to redisplay the data displayed before the RAM is cleared after the RAM is cleared after the power is turned off or the like is determined by the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 (or the CPU 1118 of the sub board 510). ) Can be determined for each type of data. That is, the CPU 1110 (or the CPU 1118) may redisplay the data as much as possible with reference to the data stored in the data area that has not been cleared of the RAM at the time of power recovery, or specific data (for example, The data relating to the payout number display, the data relating to the navigation display, etc. can be theoretically redisplayed, but may not be redisplayed by program control. At this time, referring to the data saved in the stack point of the RAM 1114 is also included.

[11-7-2. error indication]
Next, error display in the special display LED 612 will be described. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining error display by the special display LED. In the slot machine 1, when an error described in the “notification type” column in FIG. 86 (which will be described later, including some that are not errors) is detected, the special display LED 612 indicates the “SEG” column. By displaying such a predetermined segment, the type of the detected error is notified in an identifiable manner. Among the errors shown in the “notification type” column of FIG. 86, the errors other than the “communication abnormality (at the time of series code error)” detected by the sub circuit board 510 are each detected by the error detection signal. The substrate 409 is notified. The errors shown in FIG. 86 are a part of errors that can be detected by the slot machine 1, and there are errors that can be detected by the main board 409 or the sub board 510 in addition to the illustrated errors.

  The outline of each error shown in the “notification type” column of FIG. 86 will be described below.

  The “RAM error” is an error that is notified when the RAM 1114 of the main board 409 is broken. On the other hand, “communication abnormality (during series code error)” is detected when there is an abnormality in the series code transmitted from the main board 409 to the sub board 510, but is detected by the sub board 510, so that a special display is displayed. No error is displayed on the LED 612.

  Although “setting change” or “setting confirmation” is not an error, “setting value” is displayed (notified) on the special display LED 612 during the operation, and is described in FIG. The setting value of the slot machine 1 is stored in the setting value data area 1114a of the RAM 1114, for example. Note that the notification timing when “setting is being changed” is set at the start of a predetermined setting change operation, and the notification timing when “setting is being checked” is set at the start of a predetermined setting check operation.

  The “illegal payout error” is an error that is notified when there is an abnormal payout. Specifically, a payout count switch (not shown; a switch for counting the number of payout medals, for example) other than when a medal is paid out from the hopper 110b by the operation of a driving means (not shown) included in the medal discharge device 110. Detected when the medal releasing device 110) is turned on. In FIG. 86, the notification priority is set differently depending on whether the timing at which the error is detected is “when the main game is not stopped” or “when the main game is stopped”. The higher priority is detected when the main game is not stopped. However, regardless of the timing, the special display LED 612 displays the same “HF” segment.

  “Inserted medal passage time 1 error”, “inserted medal passage time 2 error”, “medal passage order 1 error”, “medal passage order 2 error”, “medal passage interval time error”, and “inserted medal reverse error” This error is notified when there is an abnormality in the process from when a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 203 until it reaches the hopper 1110b. The anomaly here includes an anomaly caused by the insertion of a foreign object other than a medal, in addition to an anomaly related to a medal passage route.

  In the slot machine 1, when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 is detected by the insertion sensor 207b (when the solenoid 207a is OFF), the lever sensor, the selector sensor, and the chute sensor are thereafter detected. The hopper 110b is reached while the passage is detected at. The lever sensor, selector sensor, and chute sensor are sensors provided in the medal selector 207, and detect the passage of medals at predetermined positions where they are provided (not shown). Further, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the path to the insertion sensor 207b is locked out, so that even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 203, the medal is passed through the medal selector 207 and the return bar 213. Returned to the tray 201. When the medal whose passage is detected by the insertion sensor 207b does not move through such a normal process (specified medal passage sequence), the main board 409 is based on the presence / absence of detection in each sensor, the detection time, and the like. Detect each of the above errors.

  An outline of each error will be explained. The “inserted medal passage time 1 error” is an error that is notified when a medal (including foreign objects other than medals) stays in the vicinity of the insertion sensor 207b. Specifically, the medal detection by the insertion sensor 207b is detected. It is detected when it continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). The “inserted medal passage time 2 error” is an error that is notified when a medal (including foreign objects other than medals) stays in the vicinity of the lever sensor. Specifically, the medal detection by the lever sensor is performed for a predetermined time. Detected when (for example, 500 ms) continues. The detection target period of “inserted medal passage time 2 error” is always set, but the notification timing of the error is at the start of medal acceptance (or at the end of the game such as after completion of the payout process).

  The “medal passing order 1 error” is an error that is notified when medal detection by the selector sensor is performed even though medal detection by the lever sensor is not detected (OFF). More specifically, the error is detected when a medal is not detected by the lever sensor in a predetermined period (for example, 300 ms) before the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor. The “medal passing order 2 error” is an error that is notified when the medal detection by the chute sensor is not performed after the medal detection by the selector sensor. More specifically, the error is detected when a medal is not detected by the chute sensor in a predetermined period (for example, 400 ms) after the medal passage is detected by the selector sensor.

  The “medal passage interval time error” is an error that is notified when a medal passes in a manner that is not expected during normal operation. Specifically, in each sensor provided in the medal selector 207, any object is detected with a passing interval shorter than the shortest medal passing interval assumed in normal time (that is, a passing interval when medals are continuously inserted). The error is detected when the state of passing is detected over a predetermined frequency (for example, five consecutive times).

  The “inserted medal retrograde error” is an error that is notified when the medal moves along a route other than the prescribed medal passage sequence, and particularly when a backward motion is detected. Specifically, it is detected based on the detection order of medal detection by each sensor (insertion sensor 207b, lever sensor, selector sensor, chute sensor, etc.) provided in the medal selector 207.

  The “payout medal jam error”, “payout medal empty error”, and “auxiliary storage full error” are errors that are notified when there is an abnormality related to medal payout or storage. The outline of each error will be described. First, the “payout medal jam error” is an error that is notified when a medal is jammed during the medal payout from the hopper 110b. Specifically, the error is detected when the payout count switch is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 200 ms) or longer. Further, the “payout medal empty error” is an error that is notified when the medal in the hopper 110b becomes empty. Specifically, when a medal from the hopper 110b is not normally paid out and a payout retry (payout retry) is performed, the payout count switch is turned on for a predetermined period (for example, 1500 ms) after the payout retry. If not, the error is detected. The “auxiliary storage full tank error” is an error that is notified when the medal auxiliary storage box 111 is full. Specifically, the error is detected when the medal full sensor 111a of the medal auxiliary storage box 111 detects the storage of medals exceeding a predetermined standard.

  The “priority” column in FIG. 86 indicates the priority of notification between errors. In this example, the priority means the priority when a plurality of errors are detected at the same time. Even if an error having a higher priority than that error is detected after one error is detected, The display contents are not changed. However, the priority of the error display in the slot machine 1 is not limited to this, and in the above example, it may be determined to switch to the display of an error with a high priority detected later. In the “SEG” column, a display example of the special display LED 612 is shown. In any case, in the slot machine 1, when a plurality of errors are detected, the game cannot be resumed (the next game is played) unless those errors are canceled.

  In the “notification method” column, when “video” is “◯”, an image for notifying an error is displayed on the image display 500, for example. However, the notification image by “video” is required to have display contents different from the error display on the special display LED 612. When “Sound” is “◯”, for example, a notification sound is output from the speaker 512. When the “lamp” is “◯”, for example, the error lamp 604 is turned on or blinks. In the notification by sound output, lamp output, etc., the notification mode may be changed according to the priority of the detected error. For example, when an error with a high priority is detected, an error with a low priority is detected. You may make it the alerting | reporting aspect which is emphasized compared.

  The “reset cancellation” column indicates whether or not the error can be canceled by a reset performed by operating the reset switch 112u. For errors that can be reset, the data area (see FIG. 85) of “clear range 2” in the data stored in the RAM 1114 is cleared when the error is canceled by reset.

  If “immediate” is written in the “responsiveness” column, it means that the error can be detected on the main board 409 side when the slot machine 1 is operating. For example, when an unauthorized payout error is detected, the main board 409 issues a command for notifying the detection immediately. That is, even if “immediately” is described, it is not always necessary to immediately display an error when the error is detected. For example, after a game result is obtained (after the payout process is completed or the payout process is completed) An error may be displayed before the start of the process. Note that the fraudulent payout error is a highly urgent error meaning that the gaming value has been illegally paid out.

[11-7-3. Processing when an error occurs]
In the following, a process when the error described in the previous chapter in the slot machine 1 occurs during the game (error occurrence process) will be described. The specific details of the processing at the time of error occurrence differ depending on what requirement definition the slot machine 1 has for the error. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 includes a requirement definition (first requirement definition) relating to an error as described below, and details of an error occurrence process performed in such a case will be described.
(1) Grouping (for example, strong error and weak error) based on importance is not performed for a plurality of errors.
(2) Even if an error is detected during the game, the game continues and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) Even if an error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is continuously displayed.

  87 and 88 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the first embodiment. 87 and 88 are combined into one flowchart. This flowchart is based on the overall processing procedure of one game based on the processing procedure shown in FIG. 52, and further shows the processing performed when an error occurs. Show. 87 and 88 show an example of a processing procedure when the game progresses when there is no power interruption (that is, the power is not turned off). On the other hand, FIG. 89 described later is a flowchart illustrating an example of a processing procedure of the power interruption recovery process in the first embodiment. In FIG. 89, the processing procedure is also applied when the power is turned OFF / ON in the processing of FIGS.

[11-7-3-1. Processing when an error occurs (non-power failure)]
With reference to FIG. 87 and FIG. 88, the processing procedure of one game including the processing at the time of error occurrence (at the time of non-power interruption) will be described. Note that since the overall processing flow overlaps with the series of processing shown in FIG. 52, detailed description of the processing that has already been described is omitted. Further, unless otherwise specified, the processes in FIGS. 87 and 88 are executed by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 1110). In addition, in order to make it easy to understand the situation in which each process is performed, correspondence with the “game machine state” shown in FIG. 68 is also shown.

  First, in FIG. 87, as described in the BET process of FIG. 52, after a specified number of game values (specifically, medals) are inserted, the player presses the start lever 210 to perform the game. The process is started (step S801). Such a game flow corresponds from “medal insertion” to “depression of start lever” shown in FIG.

  When the start lever 210 is pressed and the game is started, an internal lottery process is performed (step S802), and a conditional device that is allowed to operate based on the winning combination is acquired (step S803).

  Next, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the special display LED 612 is a section in which the instruction function display is possible. Here, the section in which the instruction function can be displayed means a game (for example, during an AT game) in which the instruction function display by the instruction function can be executed. Until now, the instruction function display has been mainly described during the AT game. However, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific game period other than the AT game (for example, the AT is relatively elected). The instruction function may be displayed even in a chance zone (CZ) that is easy to perform. In such a case, a positive determination is obtained in step S804 even in a game other than the AT game.

  If it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is possible (specifically, if it is determined that the main board 409 instructs by the instruction function) (YES in step S804), in step S803. Based on the acquired condition device, the instruction content by the instruction function is determined (step S805). Next, the instruction content determined in step S805 is stored in the instruction function display area 1114i of the RAM 1114 (step S806).

  Thereafter, the rotation of the reel 301 is started (step S807). The timing of step S807 corresponds to “reel rotation start” shown in FIG. Then, by transmitting an instruction information command to the sub-board 510, the instruction content by the instruction function is notified (step S808). As a result, the sub-board 510 can cause the image display body 500 or the like to perform navigation display at a predetermined display timing related to navigation display based on the received instruction information command. In the slot machine 1, the transmission of the instruction information command in step S808 may be performed at a timing before the start of rotation of the reel 301 (step S807).

  Thereafter, the instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 in step S806 is displayed on the special display LED 612 at a predetermined display timing related to the instruction display function (instruction function display) (step S809). Specific display examples of the instruction function display are as shown in FIGS. In addition, the predetermined display timing related to “navigation display” and “instruction function display” is as described above with reference to FIG. Then, after the instruction function is displayed in step S809, in step S810, acceptance of the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is started.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is not possible (specifically, when the main board 409 does not determine that the instruction function is instructed) (NO in step S804). The reel 301 starts rotating without performing the processing related to the instruction function as shown in steps S805, S806, S808, and S809 (step S811), and accepting the pressing operation of the reel stop button 211a is started (step S811). Step S812).

  Steps S810 and S812 correspond to “reel stop button press acceptable” shown in FIG. Then, after the process of step S810 or step S812 is performed, the process proceeds to step S813.

  In step S813, the player presses the first stop button (the first stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described in FIG. 80 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S813 corresponds to “first stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S813 and the subsequent pressing of the second stop button (step S814). If no error is detected in step S814 (NO in step S814), the process in step S815 is performed. If an error is detected in step S814 (YES in step S814), the process in step S819 is performed. FIG. 88 shows that when an error is detected in step S814, the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating. The processing in step S819 may be performed after a reel stop operation is performed on the remaining reels 301. The same applies to step S816. Such processing after error detection may be made different in priority (importance) depending on the type of error, and the processing may be used properly based on the priority. For example, an error that is unlikely to occur in a normal game situation such as “HF (illegal payout error)” should be a high priority error. If such a high priority error is detected, the process of step S819 should be performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button 211 corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating. preferable.

  In step S815, the player presses the second stop button (second stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described in FIG. 80 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S815 corresponds to “second stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the second stop button in step S815 and the subsequent pressing of the third stop button (step S816). If no error is detected in step S816 (NO in step S816), the process in step S817 is performed. If an error is detected in step S816 (YES in step S816), the process of step S819 is performed without waiting for the stop operation of the reel stop button corresponding to the remaining reel 301 that is rotating.

  In step S817, the player presses the third stop button (third stop operation among the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c). At this time, the reel stop process as described in FIG. 80 is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed. The timing of step S817 corresponds to “third stop button pressed” shown in FIG.

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether an error has been detected until a predetermined time elapses after the third stop button is pressed in step S817 (for example, until all reels 301 are stopped). (Step S818). Thereafter, the process of step S819 is performed regardless of whether or not an error is detected in step S818.

  In step S819, the instruction function display on special display LED 612 is terminated. However, if it is determined in step S804 that the instruction function display is not possible (NO in step S804), the instruction function display in step S809 is not performed, and special processing is required in step S819. There is no.

  Thereafter, in step S820, all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it becomes possible to determine a winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the active line. The timing of step S820 corresponds to “all reels stopped” shown in FIG.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 88, the processing in step S819 and step S820 is performed regardless of whether or not an error has been detected in the game so far, but the subsequent processing has been determined whether or not an error has been detected. It depends on what. Specifically, if no error has been detected during the previous game, the process from step S821 is performed. If an error has been detected during the previous game, the process from step S825 is performed. Is done.

  First, as a normal process in which no error has been detected during the game so far, in step S821, it is determined whether or not a game value has been paid out. In the game value payout, when it is confirmed that the winning combination is stopped based on the symbol combination stopped on the active line, the gaming value corresponding to the winning combination is paid out. If it is determined in step S821 that there is no payout (NO in step S821), no error is detected, and the game is ended. If it is determined in step S821 that there is a payout (YES in step S821), the payout number display on the special display LED 612 is started (step S822), and a game value (medal) payout process is performed (step S823). . Thereafter, since no error is detected, the game is terminated.

  On the other hand, as processing when an error has been detected during the game up to that point, it is first determined whether or not the gaming value has been paid out (step S824).

  The process of step S824 is the same as the process when no error is detected (step S821). When it is determined that there is a payout (YES in step S824), steps S822 (payout number display) and S823 are performed. The process of (dispensing process) is the same.

  However, if an error has been detected during the game up to that point, the processing of steps S826 and S827 is performed in order to cause the special display LED 612 to display an error. When the payout process is performed in step S823, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared after the payout process is completed (step S825), and then the processes after step S826 are performed. If it is determined in step S824 that there is no payout, processing in step S826 and subsequent steps is performed as it is.

  In step S826, the special display LED 612 displays the types of errors detected so far (error display). A display example of the error display is as shown in FIG. Thereafter, an error canceling process is performed according to the error notified by the error display by the hall clerk or the sales office (step S827), and the game is ended.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when an error is detected during the game, the special display LED 612 displays the instruction function display and the number of payouts. Without interrupting the display, it is possible to notify the player or hall clerk of the type of error detected by displaying an error.

  Below, when an error occurs while the game is proceeding based on the processing procedures shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 87 and 88, it will be described in detail what the display period of various indicators will be. Illustrate under typical circumstances.

  90 to 93 are timing charts showing display period examples (No. 1 to No. 4) when an error occurs in the first embodiment. 90 to 93 all assume that the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

  First, in the case of FIGS. 90 to 92, when an error occurs (when detected), the timing is set so that details of the error are immediately displayed on a display (for example, the image display 500) controlled by the sub-board 510. A chart is shown. That is, at the same time as the error occurrence 807 is turned on, the liquid crystal error 806 is also turned on. However, it is assumed that the liquid crystal navigation 805 cannot “display” while the liquid crystal error 806 is ON. Such a setting can be realized by, for example, transmitting a command of error detection information to the sub-board 510 at a timing when the main board 409 detects an error.

  In FIG. 90, in a game in which game value is not paid out, an error occurs at the timing of starting reel rotation. At this time, an error display (liquid crystal error 806) is simultaneously displayed on the image display body 500, while an error display (seg error 804) on the special display LED 612 is not performed until the reel is completely stopped.

  In FIG. 91, in the game in which the game value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of start of accepting the stop button press. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 is turned on (displayed) at the same time, and the navigation display 805 that was turned on (displayed) before the occurrence of the error is changed to OFF (non-displayed) as the liquid crystal error 806 is turned on. The The seg error 804 is turned on (displayed) only after the reels are completely stopped and the game value payout process is completed.

  In FIG. 92, in a game in which game value is not paid out, an error occurs at the timing of pressing the second stop button. At this time, the liquid crystal error 806 is simultaneously turned ON (displayed), and the navigation display 805 “displayed” before the occurrence of the error is changed to OFF (non-displayed) as the liquid crystal error 806 is turned ON. The seg error 804 is turned on (displayed) only after the reels are completely stopped.

  In this way, in the case of FIGS. 90 to 92, when an error occurs, the special display LED 612 displays an error after the game ends, whereas the image display 500 immediately displays the occurrence of the error. The occurrence of an error by a player or the like can be notified promptly. Further, the special display LED 612 can display the instruction function display, the payout number display, and the error display without overlapping the display periods. However, in the case of FIG. 90 to FIG. 92, although the game progress is not interrupted, the liquid crystal navigation 805 is “hidden” when the liquid crystal error 806 is “displayed”. There are cases where it is not possible to perform stop operations according to functions.

  On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 93, the detailed display of the error on the display (for example, the image display body 500) controlled by the sub board 510 is the timing of the error display controlled by the main board 409 (error display on the special display LED 612). The timing chart is shown with the setting of Align. That is, even if the error occurrence 807 is turned ON, the liquid crystal error 806 is not “displayed” until the segment error 804 becomes “display”. Such setting can be realized, for example, by the main board 409 not only transmitting error detection information to the sub-board 510 but also notifying the timing for displaying an error on the special display LED 612.

  In FIG. 93, in the game in which the game value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing when the first stop button is pressed. At this time, the display related to the instruction function (the instruction function 802 and the liquid crystal navigation 805) is continuously displayed until the third stop button is pressed, and proceeds normally until the subsequent payout process. When the payout is completed, the error display (seg error 804 and liquid crystal error 806) is performed on the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500. Thereafter, when the error is canceled according to the error and the error is eliminated, the seg error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 are turned off (not displayed), and the error occurrence 807 is also turned off.

  In this way, in the case of FIG. 93, even if an error occurs, the special display LED 612 and the image display body 500 are all in the game after the game is finished (strictly speaking, when the payout is completed when there is a payout or when there is no payout). When an error is displayed when the reels are stopped), it is possible to detect an error in the game without interfering with game progress and game operation (specifically, stop operation in accordance with an instruction function while viewing the navigation display). Can be reliably notified. That is, in the case of FIG. 93, the indication function display, the payout number display, and the error display in the special display LED 612 can secure a display period in which each display is meaningful (the display is effective), and each display The display periods can be prevented from overlapping.

[11-7-3-2. Power failure recovery process]
With reference to FIG. 89, the processing procedure of the power interruption return processing in the slot machine of the first embodiment will be described. The power failure recovery processing shown in FIG. 89 is performed when all power failures are recovered, such as power OFF / ON in error release processing, simple power OFF / ON when no error occurs, or recovery from a sudden power failure due to a power failure. Done in

  In FIG. 89, first, the power interruption process from all states is started. In step S901, it is determined whether any power supply voltage is equal to or lower than a predetermined threshold value. As a specific example of the predetermined threshold determination, when the power supply device 112 includes a 24V power supply and a + 12V power supply, the power supply voltage of the 24V power supply is 20.4V or less, or the power supply voltage of the + 12V power supply. Is 10.5V or less. If it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold (NO in step S901), the process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S901 that any one of the power supply voltages is equal to or lower than the predetermined threshold (YES in step S901), the RAM 1114 performs processing for storing the stack pointer in the save area (step S902). The processing in step S902 and the processing in step S907 described later are as described in the description of the data area of the RAM 1114 in [11-7-1] (see also FIG. 85).

  Thereafter, after data protection processing (RAM protection processing) is performed on the RAM 1114 (step S903), the slot machine 1 is turned off (step S904). Note that the above-described processing related to the RAM is not limited to the RAM 1114 on the main board 409, and the same processing may be performed on the RAM 1122 on the sub board 510.

  Then, when a power supply restoration operation is performed by a hall related person or automatic restart (step S905), it is first determined whether any one of the power supply voltages is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold (step S906). The predetermined threshold here may be the same threshold as exemplified in step S901. If it is determined that none of the power supply voltages is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold (NO in step S906), the process ends.

  If it is determined in step S906 that one of the power supply voltages is equal to or higher than the predetermined threshold (YES in step S906), the stack pointer stored in the save area of the RAM 1114 in step S902 is referred to and necessary data is read (step S906). S907).

  Then, a process for returning the stored number display LED 613 to a displayable state is performed (step S908), and a process for returning the special display LED 612 to a displayable state is performed (step S909).

  Next, it is determined whether or not any of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in a state immediately before the power is turned off in step S904 (state before power interruption) (step S910).

  If it is determined that any of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in the state before power interruption (YES in step S910), it means that the reel stop operation has not been completed. The instruction function instruction content stored in the RAM 1114 (more specifically, the instruction function display area 1114i shown in FIG. 85) is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S911). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916.

  If it is determined that none of the reels 301a to 301c is rotating in the state before power interruption (NO in step S910), whether or not the state before power interruption is the status of “all reels stopped” and “with payout”. Is determined (step S912). When it is determined that the situation is “all reels stopped” and “with payout” (YES in step S912), the payout number is displayed on the special display LED 612. The information regarding the number of payouts can be read by referring to the payout display area 1114h in addition to referring to the saved stack pointer in the RAM 1114, for example. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S912 that the situation is not “all reels stopped” or “no payout” (NO in step S912), it is determined whether an error is detected (step S914). ). If it is determined that an error has been detected (YES in step S914), information regarding the detected error is displayed on the special display LED 612 (step S915). At this time, the error lamp 604 may be turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S916. If a negative determination is obtained in step S914, the process proceeds directly to step S916.

  After each of the above steps S905 to S915 is performed, in step S916, other return processing (details are omitted) is performed, and the slot machine 1 is in the pre-power supply state before entering the power cut-off state in step S904. Return to.

  As described above, by performing the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 89, the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment can prevent data loss before the power interruption while preventing data loss even after the power interruption occurs. Appropriate restoration such as display can be realized.

  In the following, when the power interruption occurs during the progress of the game, the power interruption recovery process is performed based on the processing procedure shown in the flowchart of FIG. Or will be illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIGS. 94 to 96 are timing charts showing display period examples (1 to 3) (by various displays) when the power interruption recovery process shown in FIG. 89 is performed during the game. FIGS. 94 to 96 show the situation in which all the instruction functions occur (for example, during AT), and show examples of display periods using various types of display devices as in FIGS. 68 and 69 described above. Although not shown in FIGS. 94 to 96, the slot machine 1 automatically performs automatic operation after power is restored when at least one of the reels 301 a to 301 c is rotating before the power is turned off. The rotation of the reel 301 that has been rotated by the internal processing is resumed.

  In the case of FIG. 94, an error is not particularly detected, and the power is cut off between “start of accepting press of stop button” and “press of first stop button”. In FIG. 94, the power supply may be shut off at the same time as “stop button press acceptance start”. At this time, the instruction function 802 and the liquid crystal navigation device 805 that “displayed” the instruction content become “non-display” when the power is turned off, but when the power is restored after that, the display content before the power interruption is displayed again as “display”. (Corresponding to step S911 in FIG. 89). And after a power interruption return, a game progresses like usual. Further, since no error is detected through one game, the segment error 804 and the liquid crystal error 806 remain “non-display”.

  In the case of FIG. 95, in the game in which the game value is paid out, an error occurs at the timing of “start accepting stop button press”, and then the power is cut off before “first stop button press” . The interruption of the power supply here may be a power interruption due to an error that has occurred, or may be a power interruption due to another reason. In such a case, if the liquid crystal error 806 is immediately “displayed” with the occurrence of the error, the liquid crystal navigation 805 ends “display” until then and becomes “non-display”. After that, even if the power is turned off after the power is turned off, the error is not canceled. Therefore, in the image display 500, the liquid crystal navigation 805 is “not displayed” and the liquid crystal error 806 is “displayed”.

  On the other hand, in the case of FIG. 95, since the special display LED 612 does not immediately display an error, the instruction function 802 is “displayed” from the timing of start of the stop button press acceptance. Even after the power is restored after the power is turned off, the contents of “display” can be read again from the RAM 1114 (corresponding to step S911 in FIG. 89). The special display LED 612 “displays” the seg error 804 after the payout is completed.

  In the case of FIG. 96, in the game in which the game value is paid out, an error is not particularly detected, and the power is cut off during the payout process after the reels are completely stopped. At this time, until the start of payout, the game is not changed to a normal game, and the payout number 803 becomes “non-display” by shutting off the power, but is “displayed” again after power is restored (corresponding to step S913 in FIG. 89). ) So you can complete the payout.

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 94 to 96, in the slot machine 1, even if the power is shut off during the game, the power failure recovery process shown in FIG. The display status managed by can be restored before shutting down.

[11-7-4. Other error processing]
In the above [11-7-3], an example of processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1 has been described, but in the following, other processing examples of processing at the time of error occurrence will be described.

[11-7-4-1. Common points and differences in processing when errors occur]
In the following description regarding other error occurrence processing, an error will be described for each of cases where the slot machine 1 has second to sixth requirement definitions different from the first requirement definition described above as “requirement definition for error”. The occurrence process will be described. In order to avoid confusion in the description process, the slot machine 1 having the first requirement definition is referred to as a slot machine 1a, and the slot machines 1 having the second to sixth requirement definitions are respectively designated as the slot machine 1b to the slot machine. This is expressed as a machine 1f. Therefore, for example, “error occurrence processing in the first embodiment” described in the description of FIG. 87, FIG. 88, and the like is read as “error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1a having the first requirement definition”. be able to.

  When the slot machines 1b to 1f are compared with the slot machine 1a, since the requirement definition regarding the error occurrence processing is different, the processing procedure of the error occurrence processing based on the requirement definition is different. This is common with the slot machine 1 described so far. Therefore, the description of the common part is omitted, and the difference will be mainly described.

[11-7-4-2. Error handling based on the second requirement definition]
The slot machine 1b has the following requirements as the second requirement definition related to the processing at the time of error occurrence.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) If a weak error is detected during the game, the game continues and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) If a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is cleared.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is restored after the error is canceled.

  According to the second requirement definition, the processing required when only a weak error occurs is not different from the first requirement definition. Therefore, in the slot machine 1b, when only a weak error occurs, the display period examples (FIGS. 90 to 93) by various indicators shown in the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition It can be applied as an error occurrence process based on the requirement definition.

  Further, the slot machine 1b can also use the process of the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 89 for the return process at the time of occurrence of power interruption, and therefore the display period example at the time of power interruption shown in FIG. 94 to FIG. Can be applied to the slot machine 1b.

  The classification criteria for “strong error” and “weak error” are not particularly limited. For example, based on the “priority” of the error shown in FIG. You can do it. For example, all errors may be set to “strong error”.

  97 and 98 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1b. Hereinafter, the processing procedure of the error occurrence process based on the second requirement definition will be described focusing on the difference from the flowchart (FIGS. 87 and 88) of the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition.

  First, the processing from step S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 97 is the same as the processing from step S801 to S812 in FIG. 87, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, in FIG. 98, the player presses the first stop button, and a reel stop process is performed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 on which the stop operation has been performed (step S830).

  Next, the main board 409 determines whether or not an error has been detected between the pressing of the first stop button in step S830 and the subsequent pressing of the second stop button (step S831). If no error is detected in step S831 (NO in step S831), the process in step S833 is performed. If an error is detected in step S831 (YES in step S831), it is determined in step S832 whether the detected error is a strong error. If it is determined that the error is a strong error (YES in step S832), the process of step S839 is performed. If it is determined that the error is not a strong error, that is, a weak error (NO in step S832), step S833 is performed. Proceed to the process.

  In step S833, the second stop button is pressed. Thereafter, similarly to steps S831 to S832, whether or not an error is detected (step S834) and whether or not the detected error is a strong error. The determination (step S835) is performed. The same determination process (steps S837 and S838) is performed after the third stop button is pressed in step S836.

  As described above, when a strong error is detected as a result of determination of the error detection in steps S830 to S838, the progress of the game is stopped while maintaining the state immediately before the occurrence of the strong error as the process of step S839. . When the progress of the game is stopped, the player cannot stop the rotating reel 301. As a specific process for holding the state immediately before the occurrence of the strong error, it is assumed that various data are saved in the RAM 1114 or the like.

  Then, after the progress of the game is stopped in step S839, an error canceling process corresponding to the generated strong error is required. Therefore, in step S840, whether the error canceling process is performed and the strong error is cancelled is determined. Is determined. In step S840, the process does not proceed to the next process unless the cancellation of the strong error is confirmed. Then, when it is confirmed that the strong error is released (YES in step S840), the process is started again from the time of the error occurrence as a return of the process.

  On the other hand, if the strong error is not detected in any period as a result of the determination of the error detection in steps S830 to S838 (NO in step S837 or NO in step S838), the indication function display on special display LED 612 Is terminated (step S841). In addition, when the process of step S841 is performed, only the strong error is not detected, and the case where the weak error is detected is included.

  Thereafter, in step S842, all the reels 301 (reels 301a to 301c) are stopped, and it becomes possible to determine a winning based on the symbol combination stopped on the active line. In step S843, it is determined whether or not the game value has been paid out. If it is determined that there is a payout, the special display LED 612 displays the payout number (step S844) and executes a payout process (step S845).

  If it is determined in step S843 that there is no payout, or if it is determined that there is a payout and the process in step S845 ends, whether or not an error is detected is determined as the process in step S846. If it is determined in step S846 that there is no error (NO in step S846), the process ends as it is.

  If it is determined in step S846 that there is an error (YES in step S846), it means that a weak error has been detected between steps S830 to S838, and it is necessary to display an error for the weak error. There is. Therefore, the payout number display displayed on the special display LED 612 is cleared (step S847), and the details of the weak error are displayed on the special display LED 612 as an error (step S848). Thereafter, when the error cancellation processing for the error displayed in step S848 is performed (step S827), the series of processing ends.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIG. 97 and FIG. 98, in the slot machine 1b, when a weak error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued and the error display of the weak error is displayed after the game ends. On the other hand, if a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is immediately stopped and the execution of the error canceling process is required. Further, although the progress of the game is interrupted when a strong error occurs, the instruction function display is restored after the error release processing, so that the player can continue the game while confirming the instruction content.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1b, when an error occurs while the game is proceeding based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 97 and FIG. This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1b. FIG. 99 assumes a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

  In FIG. 99, a weak error occurs when the first stop button is pressed (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and a strong error occurs when the second stop button is pressed (strong error occurrence 807b is ON). ). In the slot machine 1b, even if a weak error occurs, the game is not interrupted, and the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is also maintained as “display”. In the example of FIG. 99, the image display 500 also does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when a weak error occurs.

  On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error instead of the instruction function display (“non-display” of the instruction function 802 and “display” of the seg error 804), and the image display 500 Then, the game is interrupted by displaying an error instead of the navigation display (“non-display” of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and “display” of the liquid crystal error 806). However, since the instruction function 802 and the navigation display 805 that have been “hidden” are subsequently “displayed” when the error release processing for the strong error is completed, the game is played from the situation before the occurrence of the strong error. You can resume.

[11-7-4-3. Processing when an error occurs based on the third requirement definition]
The slot machine 1c is provided with the following requirements as the third requirement definition regarding the error occurrence processing.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) If a weak error is detected during the game, the game continues and the error is displayed after the game ends.
(3) If a strong error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is stopped until the error is cleared.
(4) If a strong error is detected during the game, the instruction function display is stopped, and the error is not restored even after the error is cleared.

  The third requirement definitions (1) to (3) are the same as the second requirement definitions (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Accordingly, in the slot machine 1c, as in the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition, when only a weak error occurs, various indicators shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition The display period examples (FIGS. 90 to 93) can be applied. In addition, as for the return processing upon occurrence of power interruption, the processing of FIG. 89 shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition can be diverted. An example of a display period can be applied to the slot machine 1c.

  FIGS. 100 and 101 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1c. When the processes of FIGS. 100 and 101 are compared with the processes of FIGS. 97 and 98 used in the description of the slot machine 1b, only step S880 of FIG. 101 is different. That is, in FIG. 101, when it is determined in step S840 that the strong error has been released, as a process in step S880, the main board 409 clears the display content of the special display LED 612, and then the process from the time of the error occurrence is performed again. Is started.

  Then, by performing the process of step S880, the slot machine 1c can prevent the indication function display on the special display LED 612 from being restored after the error is released when a strong error occurs.

  According to such a slot machine 1c, when a “strong error” having a high impact on the game occurs, even if the strong error is canceled, the state before the occurrence of the strong error is completely restored. It is possible to suppress the return to the state. Specifically, by not displaying the instruction function after returning from the error, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game operation according to the instruction content of the instruction function in an abnormal game in which a strong error has occurred. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from being easily given a privilege when an illegal act that causes a strong error is performed.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1c, when an error occurs while a game is progressing based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 100 and 101, what will be the display period of various displays and the like? This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 102 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1c. FIG. 102 assumes that the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT).

  In FIG. 102, similarly to FIG. 99 used in the description of the slot machine 1b, a weak error occurs when the first stop button is pressed (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and further, when the second stop button is pressed. A strong error has occurred (strong error occurrence 807b is ON). However, in FIG. 102, according to the requirement definition (third requirement definition) of the slot machine 1c, even if a weak error occurs, the game is not interrupted, and the indication function display on the special display LED 612 is also maintained as “display”. In the example of FIG. 102, the image display 500 also does not “display” the liquid crystal error 806 when a weak error occurs.

  On the other hand, when a strong error occurs, the special display LED 612 immediately displays an error instead of the instruction function display (“non-display” of the instruction function 802 and “display” of the seg error 804), and the image display 500 Then, instead of the navigation display, an error is displayed (“non-display” of the liquid crystal navigation 805 and “display” of the liquid crystal error 806), and the game is interrupted. Even if error cancellation processing is performed thereafter, the display contents of the instruction function display are cleared as shown in step S880 in FIG. 101. Therefore, after the return, the instruction function display is displayed again on the special display LED 612. Do not show. In the example of FIG. 102, the liquid crystal navigation is similarly not displayed after the return. Therefore, in the slot machine 1c, after the strong error is released and returned, the player cannot recognize the instruction content of the instruction function, and advances the game while the instruction function does not occur.

[11-7-4-4. Error handling based on the fourth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1d has the following requirements as the fourth requirement definition regarding the error occurrence processing.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not stopped regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 transmits a predetermined command (for example, an outer end board communication command) to the external relay terminal board 131, so that the external relay terminal board 131 can be used. The error information is output to an external device (for example, a hall computer 1200 or a data display) that is connected.

  The fourth requirement definition in such a slot machine 1d is common only to the third requirement definition (1), but when considering other requirement definitions, the processing required when only a weak error occurs. Is similar to the error occurrence process based on the third requirement definition (that is, the error occurrence process based on the first or second requirement definition).

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1d, as in the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition and the slot machine 1c having the third requirement definition, when only a weak error occurs, the first requirement definition is set. Examples of display periods (FIGS. 90 to 93) by various displays shown in the processing at the time of error occurrence based on the above can be applied. In addition, as for the return processing upon occurrence of power interruption, the processing of FIG. 89 shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition can be diverted. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1d.

  In the error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1d, a predetermined error detection result is output to the outside via the external relay terminal board 131 (may be abbreviated as “outer end plate”). It is said. The slot machine 1d is connected to an external device (such as a hall computer 1200 or a data display) in the game hall via the external relay terminal plate 131 by providing the external relay terminal plate 131 on the main board 409. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to an external device.

  103 and 104 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the error occurrence processing in the slot machine 1d. In the following, an error occurs based on the fourth requirement definition, centering on differences from the flowchart (FIGS. 87, 88, 97, and 98) of the error occurrence processing based on the first or second requirement definition. A processing procedure of time processing will be described.

  First, the processing from step S801 to S812 shown in FIG. 103 is the same as the processing from step S801 to S812 in FIG.

  Next, in FIG. 104, similarly to the processing in steps S813 to S832 in FIG. 98, whether or not an error is detected after the first stop button is pressed in steps S850 to S852, and further, the error is a strong error. It is determined whether or not there is. However, in the case of FIG. 98, when the game is determined to be a strong error, the game is temporarily stopped (step S839 in FIG. 98), whereas in FIG. 104, the game is determined to be a strong error. The progress is continued, and instead, a command (outer end plate communication command) indicating the occurrence of a strong error is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 (step S853).

  In FIG. 104, in step S853, strong error occurrence information is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131, so that a strong error occurs in an external device (for example, hall computer 1200) connected via the external relay terminal board 131. Information can be output. During that time, the progress of the game in the slot machine 1d is not stopped, and the process proceeds to the next stop button pressing process (step S854).

  In FIG. 104, even when the second stop button is pressed (step S854) or the third stop button is pressed (step S858), the processing after the stop button is pressed as shown in steps S850 to S853 is repeated. The detailed description of is omitted.

  Summarizing the processing of steps S850 to S861, it is repeatedly determined whether an error has been detected between the time when the reel stop button 211 is pressed and the stop operation is performed on all the reels 301, and in particular, a strong error has been detected. When the determination is made, the occurrence of a strong error is immediately notified via the external relay terminal board 131.

  The processing in steps S862 to S870 shown in FIG. 104 is the same as the processing in steps S819 to S827 in FIG. 88, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. The outline of the processing in steps S862 to S870 shown in FIG. 104 is based on clearing the instruction function display when all the reels 301 have been stopped and performing all stop processing of the reels 301, and then based on the winning combination. If an error is detected during the game, an error is displayed on the special display LED 612 after the payout process is completed, and an error cancel process is awaited.

  Note that the error display shown in step S869 in FIG. 104 is the error display shown in step 826 in FIG. 88 (weak error error), even if the error detected during the game is a strong error. Display). That is, in FIG. 104, when a strong error is detected, the external device is notified of the occurrence of an error via the external relay terminal board 131, while the error display of the error is also performed by the slot machine 1d itself after the game ends. Therefore, the occurrence of a strong error can be notified more reliably.

  As described above, by performing the processing shown in FIGS. 103 and 104, in the slot machine 1d, even if any error is detected during the game, the progress of the game is continued, and the error display of the error is performed after the game ends. Is called. Further, when a strong error is detected during the game, the occurrence of the error is immediately notified to the external device via the external relay terminal board 131, so that the hall that manages the external device (for example, the hall computer 1200) is managed. It is easy for the parties concerned to notice the occurrence of an important error, and it is also possible to accurately manage the error occurrence status. Moreover, even if such a strong error occurs, the progress of the game is not interrupted, so that an effect of suppressing the burden on the player can be expected.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1d, when an error occurs while the game is proceeding based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 103 and 104, what will be the display period of various displays and the like? This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 105 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1d. FIG. 105 assumes that the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). Also, in FIG. 105, an outer end plate communication 808 is added to indicate the timing at which the main board 409 transmits information indicating strong error detection to the external relay terminal board 131. When the outer end plate communication 808 is ON, it means that the command is transmitted from the main board 409 to the external relay terminal board 131. When the outer end plate communication 808 is OFF, it means that the above command is not transmitted.

  In FIG. 105, similarly to FIG. 99 used in the description of the slot machine 1b and FIG. 102 used in the description of the slot machine 1c, a weak error occurs when the first stop button is pressed (weak error occurrence 807a is ON). Further, a strong error has occurred at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  However, in FIG. 105, in accordance with the requirement definition (fourth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1d, the game is not interrupted regardless of whether a strong or weak error occurs, and the error display is performed after the game ends. Therefore, the indication function display 802 and the “display” of the liquid crystal navigation 805 are not hindered by the occurrence of an error. However, when a strong error is detected, the main board 409 immediately sends a command to the external relay terminal board 131 with information indicating the strong error detection (the outer end board communication 808 is ON). The occurrence of a strong error can be notified to an external device connected via the network in almost real time.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 105, an error is displayed after the game is finished (more specifically, after the payout is completed (in the case of a game with no payout, after the reels are completely stopped)). Display "and" display "of the liquid crystal error 806), the error can be released before starting the next game.

[11-7-4-5. Error handling based on the fifth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1e has the following requirements as the fifth requirement definition related to the processing at the time of error occurrence.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not stopped regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the main board 409 transmits a predetermined command (for example, a display mode change command) to the display dedicated to the error, so that the display mode on the display unit becomes an error Change to a specific display for occurrence.

  The fifth requirement definition (1) to (3) in the slot machine 1e is the same as the fourth requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Accordingly, in the slot machine 1e, only a weak error is provided, similarly to the slot machine 1b having the second requirement definition, the slot machine 1c having the third requirement definition, and the slot machine 1d having the fourth requirement definition. When the error occurs, the display period examples (FIGS. 90 to 93) by various indicators shown in the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition can be applied. In addition, as for the return processing upon occurrence of power interruption, the processing of FIG. 89 shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition can be diverted. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1e.

  106 and 107 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1e. 106 and 107 are compared with the processing of FIGS. 103 and 104 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, only steps S881, S882, and S883 in FIG. 107 are different.

  In FIG. 107, when the first stop button is pressed (step S850), it is determined whether or not an error is detected (step S851). If it is determined that there is an error, whether the error is a strong error or not. Is determined (step S852). When it is determined in step S852 that a strong error has occurred (YES in step S852), as a process in step S881, the main board 409 transmits a “display mode change command” to the error-dedicated display device, and the display mode in the display device is displayed. Is changed to a specific display for when an error occurs.

  Here, the “display mode change command” is one of means for informing a specific display (for example, the error lamp 604 may also be used) that at least a strong error has occurred. As long as a specific display for notifying the occurrence of a strong error can be performed on a specific display, it may not be in the command format. Further, the “display mode change command” may not only notify the occurrence of a strong error, but may also notify details (types etc.) of the error that has occurred.

  Further, the processing in step S882 and step S883 is the same as that in step S881 in the error detection check after the second stop button is pressed (step S854) or the third stop button is pressed (step S858), respectively. Since it is performed, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1e, the processing in steps S881, S882, and S883 is performed, so that a strong error has occurred can be notified by a specific display. The slot machine 1e is provided with such a specific display device separately from the display device (special display LED 612) on which the instruction function display is performed, so that an indication function display ( Furthermore, it is possible to reliably notify the occurrence of the strong error while continuing the progress of the game without disturbing the navigation display).

  In the following, in the slot machine 1e, when an error occurs while the game is proceeding based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 108 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1e. FIG. 108 is a situation where an instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). In FIG. 108, a display mode change 809 is added to indicate the transmission timing of a “display mode change command” for changing the display mode for a specific display when the main board 409 detects a strong error. . When the display mode change 809 is ON, it means “send”, and the display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display. When the display mode change 809 is OFF, it means “standby”, and the display mode change command is not transmitted to a specific display. Further, FIG. 108 does not show the timing for changing the display mode in a specific display, but it is assumed that the display mode is changed immediately after the display mode change 809 becomes “ON (transmission)”.

  In FIG. 108, similarly to FIG. 105 and the like used in the description of the slot machine 1d, a weak error occurs when the first stop button is pressed (weak error occurrence 807a is ON), and the second stop button is pressed. A strong error has occurred (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  Here, as described above, in the requirement definition (fifth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1d, (1) to (3) are the same as the fourth requirement definition (1) to (3), and (4 Only) is different. Focusing on this point, comparing FIG. 108 with FIG. 105 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, in FIG. 105, a command is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 when a strong error is detected. In FIG. 108, the display mode change command is transmitted at the same timing, so that the display mode on a specific display device is changed. However, the display periods of the other displays are the same in FIGS. 105 and 108.

  Further, although not shown in FIG. 108, it is preferable that the change of the display mode on the specific display device is continued until the error of the strong error causing the change is canceled.

  In addition, as an example of the display mode of “specific display for occurrence of strong error” on a specific display, when the error lamp 604 that is normally used for notification of occurrence of an error is also used, it is lit when normal notification of error occurs. On the other hand, in the case of specific display based on strong error detection, the display mode may be changed such as blinking. In addition, when using a dedicated special display, more detailed error notification can be realized by changing the notification pattern (lighting pattern, display image, audio output pattern, volume, etc.) according to the type of strong error. Can do.

  According to the slot machine 1e, by enabling such “specific display for occurrence of a strong error”, it is possible to immediately and reliably notify the occurrence of an error when a strong error having a large influence on the game occurs. In addition, the special display LED 612 for displaying the instruction function and the payout number display and the image display body 500 for performing the navigation display can be smoothly advanced by preventing interference with the display contents. Can be expected.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 108, an error is displayed after the game is finished (more specifically, after the payout is completed (in the case of a game with no payout, after the reels are completely stopped)). Display "and" display "of the liquid crystal error 806), the error can be released before starting the next game.

[11-7-4-6. Error handling based on the sixth requirement definition]
The slot machine 1f has the following requirements as a sixth requirement definition related to the processing at the time of error occurrence.
(1) Grouping based on importance for a plurality of errors. Specifically, an error having a relatively high importance regarding the game progress is referred to as a “strong error”, and an error having a lower importance regarding the game progress than the “strong error” is referred to as a “weak error”.
(2) When an error is detected during the game, the game continues to progress regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(3) When an error is detected during the game, the indication function display is not stopped regardless of whether the error is a strong error or a weak error.
(4) When a strong error is detected during the game, the strong error is detected in the display mode of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 by changing the control pattern of the instruction function display by the main board 409. Change the display mode to understand.

  The sixth requirement definition (1) to (3) in the slot machine 1f is the same as the fourth or fifth requirement definition (1) to (3), and only (4) is different.

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1f, as in the slot machines 1b to 1e having the other requirement definitions described so far, when only a weak error occurs, when only a weak error occurs, Examples of display periods (FIGS. 90 to 93) using various indicators shown in the error occurrence processing based on the requirement definition 1 can be applied. In addition, as for the return processing upon occurrence of power interruption, the processing of FIG. 89 shown in the error occurrence processing based on the first requirement definition can be diverted. The display period example can be applied to the slot machine 1f.

  109 and 110 are flowcharts (No. 1 and No. 2) for explaining the processing at the time of error occurrence in the slot machine 1f. 109 and 110 are compared with the processes of FIGS. 103 and 104 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, and the processes of FIGS. 106 and 107 used in the description of the slot machine 1e, step S884 in FIG. Only S885 and S886 are different.

  That is, in the error occurrence process based on the sixth requirement definition, as shown in FIG. 110, a strong error is detected in the strong error determination (steps S852, S856, S860) in the error check after each stop button is pressed. If it is determined that the main board 409 transmits a command for displaying an instruction function when an error occurs (steps S884, S885, S886), the display mode of the instruction function display on the special display LED 612 is changed. Then, the display mode (instruction function display of pattern 1) for displaying only the instruction content is changed to the display mode (instruction function display of pattern 2) for displaying that the strong error is detected together with the instruction content.

  Here, an example of specific control for changing the display form of the instruction function display when the instruction function display is controlled by a command will be described. When a strong error is detected, the pattern 2 instruction function display is performed. By setting a predetermined bit that is not used in the command for pattern 1, it is possible to transmit the command together with the information indicating the instruction content and the information indicating the strong error. As an example of the display of the pattern 2 on the special display LED 612, it is possible to display blinking at the time of pattern 2, to display the error information and the instruction information alternately, or to turn on the bit segment. Good.

  Note that, as described for the “display mode change command” in the description of the slot machine 1e, in order to satisfy each requirement definition in the slot machines 1a to 1f, the information communication format does not necessarily have to be a command format. In the function display control, the input / output control may be performed in a format other than the command.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1f, the processing of steps S884, S885, and S886 is performed, so that the special display LED 612 can notify the occurrence of a strong error without interrupting the instruction function display.

  Therefore, according to the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs during the game, even if it is a strong error, the game opportunity by the player can be provided reliably by not interrupting the game progress. On the other hand, since the occurrence of a strong error can be promptly notified at a place (special display LED 612 on the display panel 501) that can be easily seen by a player or the like, safety against the slot machine 1f can be ensured. I can expect.

  In the following, in the slot machine 1f, when an error occurs while the game is progressing based on the processing procedure shown in the flowcharts of FIGS. 109 and 110, what will be the display period of various displays and the like? This is illustrated under specific circumstances.

  FIG. 111 is a timing chart showing an example of a display period when an error occurs in the slot machine 1f. FIG. 111 assumes that the instruction function occurs (for example, during AT). Further, in FIG. 111, when a strong error is detected, the display pattern of the instruction function display is changed from the normal pattern 1 to the pattern 2 at the time of error occurrence, so that the display period of the instruction function display in each pattern is shown. As an alternative, “instruction function (pattern 1) 802a” and “instruction function (pattern 1) 802a” are added in place of “instruction function 802” used in other figures.

  In FIG. 111, as in FIG. 105 used in the description of the slot machine 1d, FIG. 108 used in the description of the slot machine 1e, etc., a weak error occurs when the first stop button is pressed (the weak error occurrence 807a is ON) and a strong error has occurred at the timing of pressing the second stop button (strong error occurrence 807b is ON).

  Here, as described above, in the requirement definition (sixth requirement definition) of the slot machine 1f, (1) to (3) are the same as (1) to (3) of the fourth or fifth requirement definition. Only (4) is different. Focusing on this point, the display period (FIG. 111) in the slot machine 1f is compared with the slot machine 1d (FIG. 105) or the slot machine 1e (FIG. 108). In FIG. 108, a command is transmitted to the external relay terminal board 131 and a display mode change command is transmitted to a specific display in FIG. 108, whereas in FIG. 111, the display mode pattern of the instruction function display is displayed at the same timing. By changing, the special display LED 612 is different in that the indication function display of the pattern 2 is displayed. However, the display periods of the other displays are the same as those in FIGS. 105, 108, and 111.

  Further, according to FIG. 111, at the timing when the second stop button is pressed when the strong error occurs (when the strong error occurrence 807b is turned on), the “display” of the function display 802a is switched to “display” of the instruction function 802b. It is done. The indication function display of pattern 2 is continuously displayed until the timing of pressing the third stop button. That is, in the slot machine 1f, even if the indication function display is changed to the pattern 2 due to the detection of a strong error, the indication function display of the pattern 2 is continued until the original display period by the indication function display ends. It means that.

  According to such a slot machine 1f, the progress of the game is not interrupted by the occurrence of an error, and further, the instruction content of the instruction function is continuously displayed, while the instruction function is displayed when an important strong error occurs. Since it is possible to notify the occurrence of the error by changing the mode, it is possible to realize a gaming machine that achieves both smooth progress of the game and quick response to the abnormal state.

  Further, as shown in detail, the liquid crystal error 806 controlled by the sub-board 510 is also “displayed” at the same timing after the game as the seg error 804. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 111, an error is displayed after the game ends (more specifically, after the payout is completed (in the case of a game with no payout, after the reels are fully stopped)), the next game is displayed. You can let the error clear before you start.

  Note that the slot machine 1a to the slot machine 1f may be appropriately combined within a range in which the respective requirement definitions related to the error occurrence processing do not interfere with each other. For example, if the error occurrence process based on the first requirement definition is a limited process related to the weak error, it can be combined with the second to sixth requirement definitions. Further, for example, by combining the processing at the time of strong error detection in the fourth to sixth requirement definitions, wide notification can be realized at the time of strong error detection.

[12. Second Embodiment]
A slot machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The slot machine of the second embodiment is different in a symbol arrangement, a lottery table, and a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (for example, FIG. 112, FIG. 113, FIG. 114, FIG. 115). Except for the above, the same configuration and control as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment are provided (can be used), and the effects obtained by the common configuration and control are also the same. Therefore, regarding the slot machine of the second embodiment, differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described, and description of common configurations, controls, and effects will be omitted by diversion.

[12-1. Design column]
FIG. 112 is a development view in which the symbol array of the reel band is developed in a plane in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Compared to the symbol sequence (FIG. 46) illustrated in the first embodiment, in FIG. 112, there is no “bomb” symbol, but a new symbol is added. Specifically, a “white 7” symbol, a “blank 1” symbol, and a “blank 2” symbol are added, and the “bell” symbol is also divided into a “bell 1” symbol and a “bell 2” symbol.

  The “white 7” symbol is, for example, the symbol arranged at the array element number 18 in the reel band 321a, and the symbol indicating the numeral “7” in a framed manner. According to the arrangement of FIG. 112, only one “white 7” symbol is arranged on each reel band 321a to 321c, and therefore cannot be stopped on the active line unless the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing. It is a design. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 115, the “white 7” symbol is included in the symbol combination “BB2”.

  The “blank 1” symbol is, for example, a symbol arranged at the array element number 7 of the reel band 321a, and is included in the symbol combination “JAC in BB” (see FIG. 115). According to the arrangement of FIG. 112, the arrangement of the “blank 1” symbol is two arrangement numbers 7 and 8 in the reel band 321a, one arrangement number 13 in the reel band 321b, and arrangement number in the reel band 321c. Since the number is No. 4 or No. 5, it is a symbol that cannot be stopped on the active line unless a stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing.

  The “blank 2” symbol is, for example, a symbol arranged at the array element number 7 of the reel band 321b, and is included in the symbol combination “JAC in BB” (see FIG. 115). According to the arrangement of FIG. 112, the arrangement of the “blank 2” symbol is not in the reel band 321a, but in the reel band 321b, one of the arrangement numbers 7 and in the reel band 321c, the arrangement numbers 1 and 9 are two. Therefore, the symbol cannot be stopped on the active line unless the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing.

  Both the “Bell 1” symbol and the “Bell 2” symbol are symbols with a bell symbol, but the difference is whether the number of star symbols included in the symbol is one or two. Internally, the “Bell 1” symbol and the “Bell 2” symbol are treated as different symbols. The arrangement of the “Bell 1” symbol is three for the reel band 321a: array numbers 11, 16, 20; four for the reel band 321b: array numbers 1, 4, 9, 14; In 321c, there are five array numbers: No. 2, No. 6, No. 10, No. 15, and No. 19. Considering the arrangement interval of symbols, if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, it is stopped on the effective line. It is a design that cannot be done. In addition, the arrangement of the “bell 2” symbol is two for array number 2 and 6 for the reel band 321a, one for array number 17 for the reel band 321b, and one for array number 12 for the reel band 321c. It is a symbol that cannot be stopped on the active line unless the stop operation is performed at an appropriate timing.

  In FIG. 115 to be described later, the left reel (“Bell 1 / Bell 2”) in the symbol combination (“Bell 1 / Bell 2” − “Replay” − “Replay”) that corresponds to the “single combination”. In some cases, two types of symbols are displayed. This means that either the “Bell 1” symbol or the “Bell 2” symbol may be used, and the “Bell 1” symbol and the “Bell 2” symbol are both “Bell” symbols (of the bell mode). It can be said that the symbol combination corresponding to “one-piece combination” is a symbol alignment of “bell”-“replay”-“replay”. 112, when the “bell 1” symbol and the “bell 2” symbol are viewed together as the “bell” symbol, the arrangement of the “bell” symbol is arranged in any of the reel bands 321a to 321c. The interval is 4 frames at the maximum (the symbols other than the bell are only arranged continuously up to 4 frames), so the “bell” symbol can be either on the active line at any timing. It is a symbol that can be stopped.

  The above is an example of the symbol sequence in the slot machine of the second embodiment. However, in the second embodiment, it is not always necessary to use the symbol sequence illustrated in FIG. 112. As long as the above can be realized, the type and arrangement of symbols may be changed as appropriate. The same applies to the slot machines of the third and fourth embodiments described later.

[12-2. Lottery table]

  FIG. 113 is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery (internal lottery) for a winning combination in the slot machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 114 shows the winning probabilities for each winning combination in the lottery table shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating. FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining a symbol combination corresponding to the condition device (or winning combination) shown in FIG. 113. Note that the effective line in the slot machine of the second embodiment is, for example, one line of the middle stage line 623a (see FIG. 47).

  The lottery table of the slot machine of the second embodiment illustrated in FIG. 113 has the following differences as compared to the lottery table (FIG. 49) exemplified in the first embodiment. Of the condition devices and gaming states illustrated in FIG. 113, the same components as those illustrated in FIG. 49 in the first embodiment will not be described (the same applies to FIGS. 116 and 119). .

  First, in FIG. 113, compared to FIG. 49, the number of payouts associated with winning the winning combination of “Cherry” and “Watermelon” is changed to “1”, and the duplicate combination of “MB” is changed from “MB + Cherry”. It has been changed to “MB + 1 piece combination”. The winning combination at the same time as the MB is not limited to the small role “one role”, and any other small role or replay role can be used as long as the symbol combination can be drawn on the active line regardless of the stop timing. There may be. In the second embodiment, the winning combination relating to “MB” is set only as “MB + 1 double combination” (similar to the case where only “MB + Cherry” redundant combination is set in FIG. 113), and “ When a winning combination for “MB + 1” is selected, a condition device with a single drawing that can be always drawn in will operate preferentially, so that even if the winning combination for “MB” is won internally, “MB” is handled in the game. The symbol combination (according to FIG. 115, “replay” — “replay” — “bell 1 or bell 2” symbol alignment) is not displayed. That is, in the second embodiment, as in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, when “MB + 1 sheet combination” is won internally, the game always shifts to “inside MB” and then corresponds to “MB”. When the symbol combination is displayed, the MB game is started and controlled to “MB general”.

  Second, according to FIG. 113, in the second embodiment, in the gaming state other than inside JAC (inside kind BB (JAC), inside kind 2 BB (JAC)) and in kind BB, The expected degree of payout of game media by is generally set lower than that in FIG. Specifically, the payout number of “cherry” or “watermelon” is set to a lower number than in FIG. 113, and a high payout combination (with a specified number of 3 In this case, the number (winning probability) for the small number of payouts of 3 or more is set lower than that in FIG. Specifically, in the case of “normal time”, the “high payout combination” is “Bell (13 payouts)” and “Bell + 1 play +2 play (13 payouts)”, but any winning probability is There is only 1/65536 (see FIG. 114).

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in the game state other than in the JAC (inside the type BB (JAC), in the type BB (JAC)) and in the type other than the type BB, more games than the prescribed number applied at the time of the game. The number (winning probability) for a low payout combination in which the medium cannot be paid out (a small combination with a payout number of 2 or less when the specified number is 3) is set higher than that in FIG. For example, in the “normal time”, the small combinations having a realistic winning probability among the “low payout combination” are “Bell + 1 double combination (1 payout)” and “Bell + 2 double combination (2 payout)”. The respective winning probabilities are “1 / 3.28” and “1 / 3.64” (1 / 1.72 in terms of the combined probability). In other words, in the “normal time” (the same is true for the gaming state such as “MB inside” or “MB general”), it is possible to win the above low payout combination with a high probability of 1 / 1.72. However, even in such a case, since the number of payouts is suppressed to about 1.5 on average, it can be seen that the payout rate in a game state such as “normal time” is significantly lower than 1.

  In “JAC inside (inside one kind of BB (JAC) inside, inside two kinds of BB (JAC)”), “Bell + 1” and “Bell + 2” Since the number of payouts is 13, the payout rate exceeds 1 greatly. In addition, “One kind of BB medium” has a high probability of 1 / 1.56, “Bell + 1 double + double (13 payouts)”, so the payout rate greatly exceeds 1, It becomes a gaming state that can be expected at the highest payout rate in the gaming state.

  Third, according to FIG. 113, in the second embodiment, a winning combination (low payout combination) in which a smaller number of game media are paid out by the internal lottery “inside the MB” or Win a re-game player with a very high probability. Specifically, in the case of FIG. 113, among the “low winning combination”, the winning combination for paying out one piece is “cherry”, “watermelon”, “single piece”, and “bell + 1 piece combination (single payout)”. The winning combination of the two-sheet payout is “two-sheet combination (two-sheet payout)” and “bell + two-sheet combination (two-sheet payout)”. According to FIG. 113, the total number of low payout combinations in “MB inside” is “40405”. Further, the number of re-game players (replays) is “24500”. Therefore, according to FIG. 113, the winning probability of the low payout combination or the re-playing combination in “MB inside” is an extremely high probability of 64905/65536. And, the condition device of the low payout combination or the re-game combination operates in preference to the condition device of MB, and these condition devices are in a symbol combination that can be stopped on the active line regardless of the stop timing of the reel. It corresponds. For the above reasons, in the second embodiment, “Lower payout combination or re-playing combination is selected in the MB” with a very high probability, and the symbol combination of the low payout combination or re-playing combination appears. Therefore, the MB symbol combination is not displayed and does not shift to the “MB general during” MB game.

  In the second embodiment, the “probability” that is a condition for shifting from “inside MB” to “in MB general” has a winning probability of 1 / 104.03. It is set significantly lower than the embodiment (see FIGS. 49 and 50).

  Fourth, in the lottery table of FIG. 113, the winning probability of “Replay” in “MB inside” is higher than “Normal time” (increased from 1 / 7.30 to 1 / 2.67). . In other words, since the transition of the game state from “normal time” to “inside the MB” can be estimated based on the appearance ratio of the replay, the player can be more interested in the game result.

  However, there is no possibility of shifting to the above-mentioned advantageous bonus game, and the transition destination is only “MB general”, since it is a chance period to easily shift to advantageous bonus games (BB1 game, BB2 game). Since there is no unfavorable game period “inside MB”, the interest of the player changes greatly. Therefore, if the transition to “inside MB” is easily identified, the unfavorable game period is disliked. The player may stop playing the game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the transition to “inside the MB” from the viewpoint of suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player and securing hall profit. Specifically, for example, a player's expectation on the BB may be maintained by generating a BB beat effect (out of result) in “inside the MB”. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult to estimate the transition of the gaming state itself by setting an increase in the replay winning probability in “inside MB”.

[12-3. Transition of gaming state]

  In the slot machine of the second embodiment, the characteristics such as the winning probability in each gaming state are as described above. In the following, the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine of the second embodiment will be described focusing on features different from those of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

  First, the transition relationship of each gaming state is the same as that of FIG. 55 shown in the first embodiment. That is, a BB game (BB1 game, BB2 game) is prepared as an advantageous game period in which a player can acquire a large amount of game media in a relatively short period of time, and a bonus role necessary for operating such a BB game is provided. Winning opportunities for (BB1, BB2) are limited to “normal”. Strictly speaking, a winning opportunity is also given to “in mid-SB”, but is omitted because the SB is not an essential configuration and the rush rate of the SB itself is relatively low. On the other hand, at least one of the “MB inside” and “MB game” that is activated by displaying the symbol combination of the MB combination, which are transferred by winning the MB combination, the play rate is suppressed. Furthermore, while being controlled by “MB inside” and “MB game”, there is no opportunity to shift to the BB1 game and BB2 game, which are advantageous for the player (in other words, winning by internal lottery) In other cases, the winning combination of “BB1” and “BB2” cannot be obtained), and while being controlled in these gaming states, it is a disadvantageous game period for the player. The above is the same as the feature related to the game state transition in the first embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, in addition to the common points with the first embodiment described above, in “inside the MB”, it becomes difficult to display a game that can display a combination of MB symbols. It also has the feature of extending the number of stays in the “medium” game.

  As described in [12-2], the internal lottery feature of “MB inside” has a very high probability (for example, 64905/65536) and “low payout” when using the lottery table of FIG. Alternatively, a re-game is won and one or two game media are paid out or re-game is given. At this time, since the MB symbol combination is not displayed, the gaming state of “MB inside” is continued while the player's hand medal tends to decrease.

  In order for the gaming state to shift from “MB inside” to the MB game “MB general”, the result of the internal lottery must be “out of”, but according to FIG. 114, the probability is 1/104. .03 and not expensive. As a result, in the second embodiment, once the MB combination (“MB + 1 sheet combination”) is won, the user can stay in “MB inside” for a considerable period. Specifically, as shown in pattern 2 in FIG. 56, the average number of staying games “inside the MB” in the second embodiment exceeds 100 games (104.0 according to FIG. 56). game).

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, in the “MB inside” controlled based on the winning of the MB combination, the MB symbol combination is selected with a high probability to win some small combination or replay. By suppressing the opportunity to appear, it is possible to prolong the arrival of games that can display MB symbol combinations. As a result, the game period that is disadvantageous to the player from the winning of the MB role to the end of the MB game can be made longer than in the case of the first embodiment. More negatives can be accumulated. In addition, the lengthening of the disadvantageous game period is a factor that lowers the interest of the player while gaining profits to the hall side, but it also increases the player's expectation for an advantageous game period thereafter. Have.

  And by extending the disadvantaged game period and accumulating the negatives of the game, while maintaining the output rate throughout the game period at a predetermined level, another specific game period ("normal time") Can be set as a game period in which it is easy to obtain a game. Specifically, in the “normal time”, the winning probability of the bonus combination of BB can be set to a high probability (1 / 8.19 as a sum of BB1 and BB2) that is difficult to consider with a conventional gaming machine. In addition, the winning probability of “MB + 1 sheet combination” in “normal time” is 1 / 27.31, which is much lower than the combined winning probability of BB combination.

  Thus, according to the slot machine of the present embodiment, in a specific gaming state (normal time), the winning probability of the bonus combination (BB1, BB2) that brings a game development advantageous to the player is determined as a game development disadvantageous to the player. By increasing the winning probability of the bonus combination (MB (actually an overlapping combination of “MB + 1 sheet combination”)), the BB (BB1 or BB2) is more likely to win the game internally than the MB (MB + 1 sheet combination). Can be realized. In addition, after the BB game is over, it is possible to make a game period that is easier to win internally for the BB than the MB, repeatedly appearing across the execution of the BB game, taking into account that it will be controlled again at the normal time (normal and BB games). Loop). Therefore, according to the slot machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can greatly improve the interest of the player in a specific game period ("normal game state").

[12-4. Features of Second Embodiment]
To summarize what has been described above, it is shown that the slot machine of this embodiment has the following features.

  First, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as a bonus game, a first bonus game (corresponding to a BB game (BB1 game, BB2 game)) controlled to facilitate an increase in game media and a bonus game are used. A second bonus game (corresponding to an MB game) controlled to make it difficult to acquire more game media than the multiplied number is prepared. Furthermore, a third bonus game (SB game) different from both the first bonus game and the second bonus game is also prepared. Each bonus game is controlled by the main board 409. This is the same as the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

  When the slot machine of the present embodiment wins the second bonus combination (MB combination) in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state, a combination different from the second bonus combination (for example, one piece according to FIG. 113). In this case, by executing a control that gives priority to the display of the symbol combination related to the winning combination at the same time as the display of the symbol combination related to the second bonus combination, The display of such symbol combinations is prevented. Taking FIG. 113 as an example, the above simultaneous winning is equivalent to the winning of the duplicate combination “MB + 1 sheet combination”. As described in [10-1-3-3], when the bonus combination and the small combination are won simultaneously, the control that gives priority to the display of the symbol combination of the small combination works. Stopping the combination of symbols of the MB combination is suppressed. Further, according to FIG. 113, no single MB role is prepared, and winning of the MB role is always a simultaneous winning with a single role. By having such a feature, when the MB role is won in a normal game state advantageous to the player, not only the transition to a game period (MB inside to MB game) disadvantageous to the player is performed. By always passing the game inside the MB, it is possible to extend the stay period of the disadvantageous game period by the number of stay games in the MB. And according to such a feature, even if a result of an internal lottery that is not desirable for a player of the MB role is obtained, it is possible to completely prevent the MB combination symbol combination from being displayed immediately in the game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to easily detect the transition timing from an advantageous game period to an unfavorable game period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player who has sensed a fall into an unfavorable game period gives up the continuation of the game, and can be expected to have an effect of continuing the game.

  Furthermore, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, in the internal lottery in the bonus internal state corresponding to the second bonus combination (inside the MB), the predetermined combination (in which the display of the symbol combination is given priority over the second bonus combination) ( The small combination or replaying combination) is selected with a higher winning probability than the first bonus combination in the normal gaming state, thereby preventing the display of the symbol combination related to the second bonus combination. For example, referring to FIG. 113 and FIG. 114, in the internal lottery in the MB, “out of” is selected in which the control that gives priority to the display of the symbol combination related to the second bonus combination is executed. Out of 65536, there are only 630 distributions (1 / 104.03 in terms of winning probability). In other cases of 64906, a small combination or replaying combination is selected (in terms of winning probability, 1 / 1.01). In such a case, the display of the symbol combination is given priority. Therefore, the display of the symbol combination related to the second bonus combination is prevented. That is, theoretically, after winning the MB combination (MB + 1), 100 games or more are controlled and executed in the MB until the MB game is started. This is as shown in FIG. By having such a feature, after winning the MB role, it will be controlled inside the MB for a relatively long time, so the number of games staying in the game period that is disadvantageous for the player is the first implementation It can be extended further than in the case of form. As a result, not only will it be easy to secure a profitable game period on the hall side, but also the difference in the advantage level in the normal game state (normal time) advantageous to the player will be increased, and the game will be sharpened Can do.

  Furthermore, the slot machine of the present embodiment is characterized in that in the second bonus game, the end of the second bonus game is prevented until a specific condition is satisfied. The specific condition here is, for example, as shown in [10-1-3-3] as a specific example of the “end condition regarding the MB game”, the total number of game media paid out during the MB game (specified (Upper limit number) reaches 253, or SB is won by internal lottery (SB game is activated). By providing such a feature, control is realized in which the bonus game, which is disadvantageous to the player as the second bonus game, is continued unless the specific condition is satisfied.

  Furthermore, while the slot machine of the present embodiment has the respective features that prolong the game period which is disadvantageous for the player as described in the above three paragraphs, It is characterized by creating a series of advantageous periods that can be expected to start from an increase in game media. More specifically, in the series of advantageous periods, the appearance ratio of the first bonus combination is higher than the second bonus combination in the normal gaming state, and the bonus internal state (BB1 corresponding to the first bonus combination) The game period controlled to the inside (inside BB2) is shorter than the game period controlled to the bonus internal state (inside MB) corresponding to the second bonus combination. Here, the specific “series of advantageous periods” are “normal time” to “inside BB” to “in BB” to “normal time” to “inside BB” to “in BB”, and so on. Furthermore, this corresponds to a period during which “normal time” and “BB game” can loop (see FIG. 55). 113 and 114, in the internal lottery in the normal gaming state (normal time) in this advantageous period, the appearance ratio of the second bonus combination is 2400 out of the total number 65536 (winning) In terms of probability, it is 1 / 27.31). On the other hand, the appearance ratio of the first bonus combination is 8000 (BB1 is 4800, BB2 is 3200) out of the total number of 65536 (the combined winning probability is 1 / 8.19). From this, it is shown that it is higher than the appearance ratio of the second bonus combination. In addition, referring to FIG. 56, the game period controlled inside the MB is theoretically 104 games, which is longer than the average number of staying games inside the BB (inside the BB1, inside the BB2). As for the specific average number of staying games in the BB, for example, referring to FIG. 114, in theory, a game corresponding to the reciprocal of the probability (1 / 4.06) that “out” is selected in the BB. Therefore, it becomes almost 4 games. This calculated value is for a case where the drawing of the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is 1 in a game where the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination can be stopped, but it is assumed that the drawing of the symbol combination corresponding to the BB combination is not 1. However, if the game that can be stopped once in about 4 games appears and the average number of staying games in the MB exceeds 100 games, it is still according to the first bonus combination It can be said that the game period controlled to the bonus internal state is shorter.

  The slot machine of the present embodiment is advantageous to the player because it has such features, and in this advantageous period, it is easier to win the BB role (BB1, BB2) than the MB role in the normal game. It becomes easy to shift to a new BB game, and a game period that can be expected to increase the game media is created. Furthermore, after the end of the BB game, if it is controlled that it is controlled at the normal time, a game period that can be expected to increase the game media indefinitely until the MB combination is won is created. Therefore, the creation of such an advantageous period can greatly enhance the interest of the player. In addition, since the average number of staying games in the BB is made shorter than the average number of staying games in the MB, when the BB role is won in the normal gaming state of “a series of advantageous periods”, the BB is relatively early. Since the start of the game can be realized, the increase speed of the game medium can be increased through a series of advantageous periods. That is, in the “series of advantageous periods”, a large amount of game media can be acquired in a short time, so that the interest of the player can be enhanced.

[13. Third Embodiment]
A slot machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the present embodiment, the symbol arrangement and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are the same as those illustrated in the second embodiment (FIGS. 112 and 115), and the lottery table is newly illustrated and described (FIG. 116). , FIG. 117). In the following, the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the first or second embodiment, and description of common configurations, controls, and effects will be omitted.

[13-1. Lottery table]
FIG. 116 is an example of a lottery table used for a lottery (internal lottery) for a winning combination in the slot machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 117 shows the winning probabilities for each winning combination in the lottery table shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating. As an example, the effective line in the slot machine of the third embodiment is one line of the middle stage line 623a (see FIG. 47).

  The lottery table of the slot machine of the third embodiment illustrated in FIG. 116 has the following differences compared to the lottery table (FIG. 113) illustrated in the second embodiment.

  In FIG. 116, as the winning combination for “MB”, there is no duplicate combination (“MB + 1 sheet combination” in FIG. 113), but only “MB” of the single combination. The symbol combination corresponding to “MB” (according to FIG. 115, “replay”-“replay”-“bell 1 / bell 2” symbol alignment) can be drawn on the effective line regardless of the reel stop timing. It is considered to be a simple symbol combination. In this way, in the third embodiment, when an internal winning “MB” of a single role is won internally, a symbol combination corresponding to “MB” is always displayed in the game. The game state shifts to “medium”. Therefore, FIG. 116 shows the gaming state of “MB inside” but is not actually controlled to “MB inside”.

  In addition, in FIG. 116, as in FIG. 49 exemplified in the first embodiment and FIG. 113 exemplified in the second embodiment, the BB role (BB1, BB2) is described as a single role. In order to more effectively represent the features of the slot machine of the present embodiment, it is preferable that at least one of the BB roles is provided with an overlapping role with a small role or a replaying role. Furthermore, it is preferable that the drawing combination is 1 for the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination or re-playing combination to be won simultaneously. The allocation ratio between the duplicate role and the single role is not particularly limited, but the effect of the present embodiment that the expectation of winning the BB role is increased when the small role or replaying role is continuously won during normal times ( In order to increase the detail), it is more preferable that the ratio of overlapping roles is higher.

  From this point of view, the lottery table illustrated in FIG. 116 is used in the following description according to the present embodiment. However, for BB1 and BB2, any small combination or replay corresponding to the symbol combination of 1 is drawn. It will be explained as a duplicate role that will be won simultaneously with the role. However, as described above, in the present embodiment, the MB is always won as a single role, and the drawing of the symbol combination is 1.

  In addition to this, there is a slight difference between FIG. 116 and FIG. 113 in that the number of “one-piece combination” is different, but this is not remarkably related to the feature of this embodiment. In other words, the third embodiment is the same as the second embodiment, except that when the single role “MB” is won, the transition is made to “MB general” without passing “MB internal”. The same effect as that of the second embodiment can be obtained by the same configuration.

[13-2. Transition of gaming state]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the game state transition relationship in the third embodiment. As described in [13-1] with reference to the lottery table in FIG. 116, in the third embodiment, only “MB” is prepared for “MB”, and the symbol combination of “MB” is drawn 1 (The symbol combination is stopped on the active line regardless of the stop timing), and when “MB” is won internally, “MB inside” is not controlled in the game without being controlled to “MB inside”. This symbol combination stops and shifts to “MB”. FIG. 118 also shows the feature that this “MB inside” does not exist, and other than that, it is the same as the gaming state transition relationship (FIG. 55) in the first or second embodiment. In addition, as described above in [10-1-3], even if the symbol combination of “MB” stops on the active line in the game where “MB” is internally won, strictly speaking, the internal winning is achieved. Until the symbol combination stops on the active line, the game state is controlled to “inside MB”. However, such “inside MB” control is temporary in the middle of one game and does not affect the determination of the lottery table to be referred to in the internal lottery at the start of the game. From the above, it can be said that it does not pass through “inside MB” or is not controlled to “inside MB”. In this embodiment, when “MB” is won internally based on such recognition, the symbol combination of “MB” is stopped in the game without being controlled to “MB inside” and “MB” The description will be made with reference to the same recognition.

  Here, “MB MB” in which the MB game is activated is in a gaming state unfavorable to the player, but shifts to “normal time” when the total payout amount of the game media reaches a prescribed upper limit number (for example, 253). Because it is possible, if it wins the small role, it is a game state with salvation that it can approach the end of the MB game little by little. In addition, in the “MB medium”, if the SB is won by the internal lottery of “MB general medium” or “2 type BB medium” (the winning probability of 1 / 284.94 according to FIG. 117), the SB game starts. There is also a chance that the MB game can be ended immediately.

  On the other hand, “inside MB” is not a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and the game state of the transfer destination is only “in MB”, which is not good for the player. State. Since “MB inside” has no chance to win “SB” in the internal lottery (see FIG. 116), there is no chance of exiting from an unfavorable gaming state.

  According to the slot machine of the third embodiment, since it is possible not to control the “MB inside” which is only disadvantageous for the player, there is a disadvantageous game period when the MB game is executed. , The burden on the player can be reduced. Further, by preventing the player from having a gaming state (“MB inside”) that only has a disadvantage to the player, it can be expected to have an effect of suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

  Note that, in the slot machine of the third embodiment, as in the first and second embodiments, “notification effect on bonus (refer to [11-6-1] for details)” or “bounce effect in a specific zone ( For details, refer to [11-6-2]), and it is possible to further enhance the player's interest by executing such various effects.

  However, in the case of the third embodiment, since the single role “MB” is prepared and the symbol combination of the MB is the pull-in 1, it is not appropriate to perform the continuous effect on the MB. Therefore, when performing a continuous effect relating to the bonus winning, it is preferable that the MB is excluded and the beat is performed between “BB (BB1 or BB2)” or “out of”.

[13-3. Features of Third Embodiment]
To summarize what has been described above, it is shown that the slot machine of this embodiment has the following features.

  First, in the slot machine according to the present embodiment, as a bonus game, a first bonus game (corresponding to a BB game (BB1 game, BB2 game)) controlled to facilitate an increase in game media and a bonus game are used. A second bonus game (corresponding to an MB game) controlled to make it difficult to acquire more game media than the multiplied number is prepared. Furthermore, a third bonus game (SB game) different from both the first bonus game and the second bonus game is also prepared. Each bonus game is controlled by the main board 409. This is the same as the slot machine of the first and second embodiments.

  The slot machine of the present embodiment has a series of advantages that can be expected to increase the game media starting from the normal gaming state by ending the second bonus game when a specific condition is satisfied in the second bonus game. It is characterized by creating a period. Here, the “specific condition” in the second bonus game is paid out during the MB game as shown in [10-1-3-3] as a specific example of the “end condition regarding the MB game”. This means that the total payout number (specified upper limit number) of game media reaches 253 or that SB is won by internal lottery (SB game is activated). Further, a specific “series of advantageous periods” is “normal time” to “inside the BB” to “in the BB” to “normal time” to “inside the BB” to “in the BB”, and so on. This corresponds to a period during which “normal time” and “BB game” can loop (see FIG. 118). By providing such a feature, the slot machine of the present embodiment allows a game period related to the second bonus game that is disadvantageous to the player (from winning the second bonus combination until the end of the second bonus game). However, by providing a series of advantageous periods that are advantageous to the player after the end of the game period, it is possible to establish a well-rounded game and enhance the interest of the player.

  In the slot machine of the present embodiment, as a more detailed feature related to the “advantageous period”, in the internal lottery performed in the normal gaming state during the advantageous period, the second bonus combination (MB) is simultaneously performed with other combinations. In the case where the first bonus combination (BB1, BB2) can be won simultaneously with the small role or replaying role while not winning the winning combination, While maintaining the advantageous period without being controlled by the gaming state associated with the winning of the second bonus combination, the degree of expectation for the winning of the first bonus combination is increased.

  This feature will be described in detail. As described in [13-1], as the winning combination of the internal lottery in this embodiment, BB1 and BB2 are prepared with a winning pattern of at least one overlapping combination (simultaneous winning with a small combination or re-playing combination) On the other hand, in the MB, only the “MB” role as a single role is prepared without preparing a duplicate role (see, for example, FIG. 116), and the drawing of the symbol combination is set to 1. In such a slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a single MB combination is won in the normal gaming state (normal time), a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination other than the MB combination is displayed in the winning game. Control is not executed and the pull-in is 1, so that the combination of symbols of MB (according to FIG. 115, the symbol alignment of “Replay”-“Replay”-“Bell 1 / Bell 2”) is always an effective line. Displayed above. If such a symbol combination is easy to identify from the player, the player can detect the winning of the MB role and the start of the MB game when the reels 301a to 301c are stopped in the winning game. On the other hand, when the winning combination BB combination (BB1, BB2) is won, in the winning game, the display of the symbol combination of the small combination or re-playing combination that is won simultaneously is preferentially controlled. Here, if the drawing of the symbol combination of the small winning combination or the re-playing winning combination simultaneously is 1, the symbol combination of these small winning combinations or the re-playing winning combination is always displayed on the active line. When a winning combination with a pull-in of not 1 is selected at the same time, or when an outage is selected, a zero or outage is displayed.

  Based on the above, in the slot machine of this embodiment, the symbol combination of the MB combination (according to FIG. 115, “replay”-“replay”-“bell 1 / bell 2” symbol alignment) is displayed. As long as this is not done, the MB role will not be won internally, and the “advantageous period” advantageous to the player will continue, so the player will be given a sense of security from the visual information and willing to continue the game. Can be strong. Furthermore, when winning any of the small roles or re-playing roles that can be won at the same time as the BB role (BB1, BB2) in the normal time (may be read as the corresponding symbol combination continues to be displayed) Not only does the “advantageous period” continue, but it also includes the possibility of winning the BB role at the same time. As the winning combination of these small combinations or re-playing combinations (or the appearance of the symbol combination) continues, the probability that the bonus flag of the BB combination is established at the same time as the BB combination is increased. In other words, the slot machine of the present embodiment has such a feature, so that when the above-mentioned small role or re-game player continues to be won in the internal lottery during the advantageous period, It is possible to increase the degree of expectation for a bonus game (BB game) in which an increase in game media is easy without shifting to an unfavorable game period. An effect that greatly enhances the interest of the player can also be realized in that the display can be expected for the BB game.

[14. Fourth Embodiment]
A slot machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.

  In the slot machine of the present embodiment, during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device according to the second type special object (MB game), the operation trigger of the second type BB (JAC win) and the operation of the second type BB (JAC IN) With a characteristic configuration. Therefore, the fourth embodiment can be appropriately combined with the slot machines of the first to third embodiments described so far, and in such a case, the effects of the combined embodiments can be obtained. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol arrangement and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are the same as those exemplified in the second embodiment, and the lottery table is newly exemplified and described (FIGS. 119 and 120). Below, it demonstrates centering on control in the characteristic MB game of this embodiment.

[14-1. Lottery table]
FIG. 119 is an example of a lottery table used for the lottery of the winning combination (internal lottery) in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 120 shows the winning probability of each winning combination in the lottery table shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating.

  The lottery table of the slot machine of the fourth embodiment illustrated in FIG. 119 is compared with the lottery tables (FIGS. 49, 113, and 116) described in the first to third embodiments during the MB game. The gaming state to be controlled (specifically, “MB in general”, “inside the two-type BB (JAC)”, “in the two-type BB”) has the following characteristics. In the case of FIG. 119, all game states controlled during the MB game are all set so that the payout rate does not exceed 1.

  First, in “MB general”, “Two types BB (JAC)” is set to be easy to win internally. Specifically, in the lottery table so far, the number of “type 2 BB (JAC)” is only “1” (for example, FIG. 49), but in the case of FIG. The number of places is distributed as “18000” (the winning probability is 1 / 3.64). This winning probability is about the same as other roles that are easy to win in general MB (for example, “one-player” winning at 1 / 3.28 or “two-player” winning at 1 / 3.64). Yes, in the fourth embodiment, it can be seen that it is easy to win the JAC in “MB general”.

  Next, “inside the two types BB (JAC)” is the same as the first to third embodiments so far. However, in the fourth embodiment, it is preferable that a predetermined degree of opportunity is given to stop the symbol combination of “Type 2 BB (JAC)”. In the case of FIG. 119, the probability is 18552/65536. By being selected, a game that can stop the symbol combination of “Type 2 BB (JAC)” (game that allows JAC IN) is generated.

  In the fourth embodiment, the pull-in of the symbol combination of “Type 2 BB (JAC)” may be 1 or not. If the pull-in is not 1, teaching may be performed so that the symbol combinations can be aligned by some teaching effect (indication function display may be used). For example, in the case of FIG. 115, the symbol combination of “Type 2 BB (JAC)” (“White 7”-“BAR”-“Red 7”) is not 1 in the drawing, so in the game where the loss is selected , A teaching effect that targets “White 7”-“BAR”-“Red 7” can be performed.

  Next, in “Type 2 BB”, almost all of the assignments are assigned to the winning combination “All roles (for CT)” (according to FIG. 119, 65306/65536). Note that the symbol combination “all roles (for CT)” has 1 pull-in. For this reason, during the two-type BB game (during CT), the “all roles (for CT)” is almost certainly won, the symbol combinations of the roles are displayed, and the game media is paid out (two in FIG. 119). Done.

  In the fourth embodiment, “the execution of one game” is set as an example of “the prescribed end condition regarding the type 2 BB”. That is, when the type 2 BB is controlled by “JAC IN”, the type 2 BB is ended after the type 2 BB game (CT) is executed for only one game. Note that “execution of one game” is an example, and there may be two or more games, or the total payout of game media may have reached a predetermined number. However, if the number of execution games per one type BB game is shortened (for example, it ends with one game), the flow of “JAC IN” to “type two BB game” may be repeated in one MB game. it can. As will be described in detail later, in the fourth embodiment, a characteristic effect of extending the stay time of the MB game can be realized by increasing the number of “JAC IN” in this way.

[14-2. Transition of gaming state]
As described above in [14-1], in the fourth embodiment, a characteristic configuration is provided for the transition of the gaming state during the MB game. In other words, a game state transition pattern is realized in which “Two Kinds of BB (JAC)” is won and it is easy to make a transition to the Two Kinds of BB Game (CT) via “JAC IN”.

  Referring to FIG. 55, in the MB game, a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, the total payout number of game media reaches the prescribed upper limit number of 253) or the SB game is won and the SB game is started. Until then, the game state from “MB in general” to “inside the two types BB (JAC)” to “in the two types BB” is looped. Here, according to the MB game lottery table described in the first to third embodiments (for example, FIG. 113), the winning probability of the type 2 BB (JAC) is set to be extremely low in “MB general medium”. Therefore, in reality, almost all MB games are controlled to be “MB general”. However, in the MB game of the fourth embodiment, the game media is not paid out by being set to win two types of BB (JAC) to some degree frequently and further to “JAC IN”. In addition, the stay period of the MB game can be extended.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the extension of the MB game stay period in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 121 shows an example of the progress of the game during the MB game in the fourth embodiment in detail. Hereinafter, the features of the fourth embodiment will be described with specific examples while confirming the game progress of each game shown in FIG.

  First, at the start of the first game, the gaming state is controlled to “MB general”, and the number of payouts (in the figure) required to reach the end condition (the prescribed upper limit number of 253) for the MB game. “Remaining payout number”) is 200 sheets. Also, the number of game media multiplied in each game is three.

  In the first game, it is assumed that “two winning combinations” is won by internal lottery (the winning probability is 1 / 3.64 according to FIG. 120). Since the symbol combination corresponding to the two-piece combination has 1 pull-in, two game media are paid out when the symbol combination stops on the active line. Therefore, the number of game media in the first game is 2 (OUT2) for the game media paid out as a result of the game, compared to the specified number of 3 (IN3) for the game media used for the game. “Remaining payout number” is 198.

  Next, in the second game, it is assumed that the game state remains “MB in general” and “two types BB (JAC)” is won by internal lottery (the winning probability is 1 / 3.64 according to FIG. 120). ).

  At this time, the symbol combination corresponding to “Type 2 BB (JAC)” is not 1 as in the symbol combination “JAC in MB” shown in FIG. If this is the case, the symbol combination corresponding to “Type 2 BB (JAC)” cannot be stopped in the game, and shifts to “Inside Type 2 BB (JAC)”. At this time, the game medium is not paid out. Therefore, game media in and out of the second game are 0 (OUT0) game media paid out as a result of the game, compared to the specified number of 3 (IN3) game media played for the game. “Remaining payout number” remains 198 and does not decrease.

  In the second game, when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to “Type 2 BB (JAC)” can be pulled in, or the symbol combination corresponding to “Type 2 BB (JAC)” is originally set. If the pull-in is 1, the fourth game “in type 2 BB” is played without going through the third game in type 2 BB (JAC).

  In the third game, it is assumed that a shift is selected in the internal lottery of “2nd class BB (JAC) inside”, and a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbol combination corresponding to “2nd class BB (JAC)” can be drawn. . Since this result is “JAC IN”, the type 2 BB game (CT) is started, and the gaming state shifts to “type 2 BB in progress”. However, no game media is paid out for “JAC IN”. Therefore, game media in and out of the third game are 0 (OUT0) game media paid out as a result of the game, compared to the specified number of 3 (IN3) game media played for the game. “Remaining payout number” remains 198 and does not decrease.

  Next, in the fourth game controlled to be “2nd class BB”, except for the SB that wins with low probability, the “all roles (for CT)” must be won by the internal lottery. Since the symbol combination corresponding to “)” has 1 pull-in, two payouts are made based on winning. Therefore, game media in and out of the fourth game are 2 (OUT2) game media paid out as a result of the game, compared to the prescribed number (3 IN3) of game media played for the game. Thus, the “remaining payout number” is reduced to 196. As described above, “execution of one game” is set as “a specified end condition for the second type BB”, so that the second type BB game satisfies the end condition by executing the fourth game and is again set to “MB general”. Be controlled.

  In other words, in the fifth game, the “MB general medium” game similar to the first game or the second game is played, and after that, the “second kind BB (JAC)” is again won internally, The game progress of the game to the fourth game is repeated, and the MB game is advanced until the “remaining payout number” becomes zero.

  Among the game progresses as described above, in particular, when focusing on the second game in which “Type 2 BB (JAC)” is internally won to the fourth game in which the Type 2 BB game ends, a total of 3 games are executed. Nevertheless, the “remaining payout number” has decreased from 198 to 196, only two. This is the only game in which the game medium is paid out among the three games in the second type BB game in which the “all role (for CT)” wins the prize, and the “second type BB (JAC)” This is because there is no payout of game media in the second game that was won and was not “JAC IN” and the third game that was “JAC IN”. In addition, the total IN / OUT of the game media between the three games is only 2 OUT (0 + 0 + 2) for 9 IN (3 + 3 + 3), and 7 hand-held medals are deducted. Decrease. When converted per game, the “remaining payout number” is reduced by about 0.67 per game, and the deduction of game media is reduced by about 2.33 per game.

  On the other hand, in the case of the MB games exemplified in the first to third embodiments, almost all MB games are controlled and digested as “MB general”, so the first game in FIG. In the image shown in the above, every time a small role is won, the “remaining payout number” decreases. Therefore, for example, if the winning combination of two sheets is continued for three games, the “remaining payout number” is reduced by six. At this time, the total IN / OUT of the game media is 6 OUTs (2 + 2 + 2) with respect to 9 INs. When subtracting, the decrease in hand held medals stops at 3. When converted per game, the “remaining payout number” is reduced by 2 per game, and the deduction of game media is reduced by 1 per game.

  Comparing the above results, the progress of the game from the second game to the fourth game illustrated in FIG. 121 is reduced by the “remaining payout number” compared to the progress of the MB game illustrated in the first to third embodiments. The speed can be suppressed, and the decrease speed of the handheld medal of the player can be increased.

  That is, according to the fourth embodiment, the “JAC” win and the “JAC IN” are generated at a frequency of a certain ratio or higher during the MB game. Since accumulation of the upper limit number can be suppressed, it is possible to delay the arrival of a game that reaches the MB end condition relating to the payout of game media. In other words, the number of games required to digest the MB game can be prolonged.

  Also, according to the fourth embodiment, during the MB game, “JAC” wins and “JAC IN” occur at a frequency of a certain rate or more. The consumption speed of the game medium to be consumed can be increased, and the game period can be made more disadvantageous for the player.

  In the specific example of FIG. 121, the third game controlled to be “inside the two types of BB (JAC)” is described as a case where “JAC IN” is not performed after the JAC win, but in the fourth embodiment, “ In the case of shifting to “in type 2 BB” without going through “inside type 2 BB (JAC)” (that is, when the drawing of the symbol combination of “type 2 BB (JAC)” is 1), There is no change in putting "IN". In the specific example of FIG. 121, even if “JAC IN” is made in the second game won by JAC and the fourth game is played next, the decrease in the “remaining payout number” between these two games is two. There are only (0 + 2), and the total IN / OUT of the game media is reduced by 4 subtracted by 2 OUT (0 + 2) for 6 IN (3 + 3). When converted per game, the “remaining payout number” is reduced by 1 per game, and the deduction of game media is reduced by 2 per game. Therefore, in such a case as well, as in the case of “inside the inside of the two-type BB (JAC)”, “the increase in the number of games required to digest the MB game” and “the increase in the consumption speed of game media” Is obtained.

  In the lottery table shown in FIG. 119, the payout of “all roles (for CT)” is two, but for example, the payout may be further lowered and set to one. In such a case, the effects of “prolonging the number of games required for digesting the MB game” and “increasing the consumption speed of game media” become more remarkable.

  Specifically, for example, when calculating between the second game to the fourth game in FIG. 121, the decrease in the “remaining payout number” is 1 (0 + 0 + 1), and the IN / OUT of the game medium The total number of IN is 9 sheets (3 sheets + 3 sheets + 3 sheets), and OUT1 sheet (0 sheets + 0 sheets + 1 sheet) is reduced by 8 sheets. When converted per game, the “remaining payout number” is reduced by about 0.33 per game, and the deduction of game media is reduced by about 2.67 per game. In addition, even when not passing through “inside of type 2 BB (JAC)”, if the calculation is made between the second game (with JAC IN) and the fourth game in FIG. 121, the “remaining payout number” is reduced. With 1 (0 + 1), the total IN / OUT of the game media is reduced by 5 by subtracting OUT 1 (0 + 1) from IN 6 (3 + 3). When converted per game, the “remaining payout number” is reduced by 0.5 per game, and the deduction of game media is reduced by 2.5 per game.

  In the fourth embodiment, when the payout of “all roles (for CT)” is one in this way, the average number of payouts per game (1 game) in the game period from JAC winning to 2 types BB end. (Corresponding to a decrease in the “remaining payout number”) can be reduced to less than one, and an average payout smaller than the minimum number of game media can be realized.

  As described above, according to the fourth embodiment, in the MB game, it is possible to frequently win two types BB (JAC) and “JAC IN”, thereby paying out game media. The MB game stay period can be extended by the number of games that are not missed, as compared to the MB game in which “JAC IN” hardly occurs, and the MB game disadvantageous to the player can be prolonged.

  Also, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, as in the first to third embodiments, the MB game is in progress during the MB game (more specifically, “MB general” or “2nd class BB”). Since the winning opportunity of “SB” that can be ended may be given (see FIG. 119), not only does the MB game as an unfavorable game period prolong the game, but also from this unfavorable game period. An escape route can be provided to increase game play.

[14-3. Special notification production]
In the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment, as in the slot machines according to the first to third embodiments, “a neglected effect relating to a bonus” (see [11-6-1]) and “a roaring effect in a specific zone” ([[ 11-6-2]), but in addition to these effects, a special notification effect suggesting the end of the MB game based on the feature that the two-type BB game (CT) is repeated (Referred to as a ceiling suggestion effect) can be executed.

  As described in detail in [14-2], in the fourth embodiment, the MB game stay period can be extended by repeating the JAC winning and the two-type BB game (CT) during the MB game. Here, the main end condition of the MB game is that the total number of game media to be paid out reaches the specified upper limit number. On the other hand, when CT is executed, SB winning or at least a predetermined number of game media is always paid out. (In the case of FIG. 119, two payouts by “all roles (for CT)”). Therefore, it can be said that the MB game is finished by at least a predetermined number of CTs.

  More specifically, if the prescribed upper limit number in the MB game is 253 and the payout of “all roles (for CT)” in CT is 2, the total payout number of 127 CT executions is 254 . Therefore, even if there is no prize for a small role other than CT (no prize for a small role in “MB general medium” or “inside of 2 types BB (JAC)”) during the MB game, it is 127 times at the latest Until the “predetermined number of times” CT is executed, the total number of payouts in the MB game reaches the specified upper limit number.

  In the fourth embodiment, a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests the end of the MB game can be executed based on a predetermined number of times (for example, 127 times) related to the CT execution described above. For example, by subtracting the number of CT executions in the MB game from the “predetermined number of times (for example, 127 times)” related to the CT execution, the “remaining CT number” is displayed to indicate how close the MB game is to the end. .

  The “remaining CT count” displayed in the ceiling suggestion effect may be subtracted by 1 when the symbol combination “all roles (for CT)” is displayed by stopping the reel 301. When the symbol combination of “2 types BB (JAC)” is displayed (that is, “JAC IN”), 1 may be subtracted. Further, instead of subtracting one by one each time these symbol combinations are displayed, they may be displayed after being subtracted collectively after being displayed a plurality of times.

  In addition, the “remaining CT count” may be displayed so as to be visible from the player at all times, but the progress of the game may be clearly indicated, but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is displayed so as to be visible from the player. You may do it. For example, the display may be started when the “number of remaining CTs” reaches 30 times, or the display may be performed when 300 games have been played since the previous BB1 game or BB2 game has ended. In such a case, by achieving the predetermined condition, the player can guess the remaining period of the MB game, so even if the MB game, which is a disadvantageous game period, continues, it aims to achieve the predetermined condition Can motivate the game. And if the end of the MB game is suggested by the ceiling suggestion effect, the player's interest can be enhanced. In addition, if the player can grasp the “number of remaining CTs”, the dissatisfaction of the player due to ending the game without knowing that the MB game is about to end can be prevented. It can also be expected to have an effect to give a sense of trust.

  As described above, the total number of game media payouts, which is an MB game end condition, includes not only payouts during the two-type BB game (CT) but also prizes for small roles other than CT ("MB general medium ”And“ winning of a small role in “inside the two types BB (JAC)”) are also counted. If the number of wins for a small role other than such CT increases, the “number of remaining CTs” based only on the number of CT executions may deviate from the conditions until the MB game is actually ended. Therefore, in the ceiling suggestion effect in the fourth embodiment, the payout associated with winning of a small role other than CT is added to the display of the “number of remaining CTs” based on the number of CT executions as described above. Good.

  Specifically, for example, the number of game media paid out by winning a small role other than CT is converted into game media paid out by CT execution and additionally reflected in the “number of remaining CTs”. If there are 2 payouts per CT run and 10 payouts for small roles other than CT, it is converted into 5 CT runs and the “remaining CT count” is subtracted 5 at a stroke. A method is conceivable. At this time, if an announcement effect different from the normal one is displayed (for example, a letter “shortening chance” is displayed), the player's interest can be enhanced by making it feel a special effect. In addition, since a part of the payout due to winning a small role other than CT is reflected in this way, a more accurate suggestion effect can be realized for the end of the MB game. The effect of raising interest is obtained.

  In addition, in the case of the ceiling suggestion effect that reflects the payout accompanying the winning of a small role other than CT and suggests the end timing of the MB game, the present invention is not limited to the fourth embodiment, and the first to third embodiments. However, it can be executed as a ceiling suggestion effect for MB games.

  Further, the display content in the ceiling suggestion effect according to the fourth embodiment may be a display for suggesting the end of the MB game, and is not limited to the display based on the “number of remaining CTs” described above. For example, you may display by "total number of times of CT" in the MB game under execution. Further, for example, it may be displayed not by the number of CTs but by “acquired number” indicating the total number of game media paid out during the CT. Further, the total number of game media paid out other than CT during the MB game may be added to the “acquired number”. Alternatively, the “remaining acquired number” obtained by subtracting the current “acquired number” from the specified upper limit number regarding the MB game end condition may be displayed.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, ceiling suggestion effects by various effect modes can be executed. And various means, such as an image, a sound, and a light, can be employ | adopted for the output means of a ceiling suggestion effect. Specifically, for example, display contents (the number of times and the number of pieces related to the ceiling) to be displayed as a ceiling suggesting effect may be displayed on the image display body 500 controlled by the sub board 510 or controlled by the main board 409. It may be displayed with the special display LED 612 or may be displayed with another display (for example, a segment display). The display of the number of times and the number of sheets related to the ceiling may be in a countdown format or a countup format. In addition, the display mode is not limited to the number and the number of sheets, and for example, a plurality of ranges based on the number of times and the number of sheets are set in advance (for example, the remaining number of times up to a predetermined number of times is 100 times or more and 100 times The display mode may change the blinking pattern of the LED or change the emission color of the LED depending on which range the current state belongs to.

  The above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, but is not limited to this. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine other than a slot machine, such as a pachinko machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Slot machine 10 Clearance 21 Transparent plate 50 Model unit 90 Front opening / closing member 100 Outer main body 100a Rotating shaft 101 Bottom plate 102 Side plate 102a Convex portion 102b Guard portion 103 Top plate 104a Heat radiation port 104b Cord outlet 105 Partition plate 106 Projection step 107 Installation Piece 108 mounting piece 109 opening 110 medal discharge device 110a device main body 110b hopper 110c discharge port 110d overflow bowl 110e payout sensor 111 auxiliary medal storage box 111a medal full sensor 112 power supply device 112a device case 112b top plate 112c rear plate 112d front plate 112e Side plate 112f Slope plate 112g Vent hole 112h Leg portion 112i Vent space 112j Stepped portion 112k Mounting piece 112m Protruding portion 112m-1 Protruding portion 112p Through hole 112r Bottom plate 112s Plate 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Mounting tool 119 Body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 Connector 126 Opening 127 Opening 128 Supporting tube 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal plate 132 Through hole 133 Vent hole 200 Door-shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation part 203 Medal slot 205 Single slot button 206 MAX button 207 Medal selector 207a Solenoid 207b Insertion sensor 208 Medal return button 209 Storage release switch 210 Start lever 211a Left reel stop button 211b Middle reel stop Button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medal basket 213 Return basket 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217a-1 Light source 217a -2 Light guide plate 217b Reflective member 218 Fixing member 219 Concave groove 300 Symbol variation display device 301a Left reel (first reel)
301b Middle reel (second reel)
301c Right reel (3rd reel)
302 Device case 303 Driving means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate portion 305 Top plate portion 306 Right side plate 307 Left side plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel substrate 313 Cable 315 Detent 316 Handle 321a to 321c Reel belt 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Pattern display window 402 Reinforcement bar 402a Guide part 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Rear plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcing member 408 Wiring work space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step portion 413 Tapered portion 414 Wheel 415 鍔 416 Hook portion 417 Triangular space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 4 0 Hinge bracket 420a Fixed member 420b Rotating member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixed piece 420f Bearing piece 420g Overlapping area 420h Overlapped area 420h Overlapped area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle side 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connector 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw 428 Connector main body 429a Holder cylinder 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Nail piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight portion 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main substrate 500 Image display body 500s Dashed area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 Illuminating device 503 Substrate 505 Translucent cover plate 506 Tube frame 507 Translucent cover 508 Receiving unit 509 Engaging unit 510 Sub-board 512 Speaker 600 Upper rail 601 Fixing member 602 Tool 603 Screw 604 Error lamp 606 Replay lamp 608 Start lamp 610 Medal IN lamp 612 (612a, 612b, 612c) Special display LED
613 (613a, 613b) Storage number display LED
614 BET lamp 623a Right-down line 623b Right-up line 700 Connection 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole 702b Hook wall 703 Stopping shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Picking piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I / O interface 1130 I / O interface 1200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A game state control means for controlling any one of a plurality of game states;
In a game with a predetermined number of game media, lottery means for performing an internal lottery for selecting a winning combination from a plurality of combinations based on a lottery table determined for each gaming state;
A symbol display means for displaying a symbol combination of a plurality of symbols based on the winning combination selected in the internal lottery;
Privilege granting means for paying out game media based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state in which the internal lottery is performed for a plurality of combinations including a plurality of types of bonus combinations, and a symbol combination related to the bonus combination after winning the bonus combination. The bonus internal state controlled according to the bonus combination in the game until displayed on the means, and the bonus corresponding to the bonus combination based on the symbol combination relating to the bonus combination being displayed on the symbol display means Including a bonus mid state where the game runs,
The bonus combination includes at least a first bonus combination related to the execution of the first bonus game and a second bonus combination related to the execution of the second bonus game.
First bonus control means for performing control that facilitates increase of game media in the first bonus game;
Second bonus control means for performing control to make it difficult to acquire more game media than the number of bonus games multiplied in the second bonus game;
When a specific condition is established in the second bonus game, bliss creation means for ending the second bonus game and creating a series of advantageous periods that can be expected from an increase in game media starting from the normal gaming state When,
With
The bliss creation means is
In the internal lottery performed in the normal gaming state during the advantageous period, the second bonus combination is not won simultaneously with other combinations, while the first bonus combination is a small combination or replay combination. So that the player can stay in the advantageous period without being controlled by the gaming state associated with the winning of the second bonus combination when the winning combination of the second bonus combination is continued. Bliss improvement means that increases the degree of expectation of winning the first bonus combination,
A gaming machine comprising: